VdS CEA 4001en_2010

VdS CEA Guidelines for Sprinkler Systems

Planning and Installation

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

VdS CEA 4001en

Publisher and publishing house: VdS Schadenverhütung GmbH Amsterdamer Str. 172-174 50735 Köln, Germany Phone: +49 221 77 66 0; Fax: +49 221 77 66 341 Copyright by VdS Schadenverhütung GmbH. All rights reserved.

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)



Planning and Installation Contents 0 0.1 0.2 0.3

Foreword ................................................................................................................. 8 Application of the VdS CEA Guidelines................................................................ 8 Classification system for sprinkler systems .......................................................... 8 Contents of these Guidelines................................................................................ 9

1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5

General .................................................................................................................. 10 Scope.................................................................................................................. 10 Aims .................................................................................................................... 10 Description .......................................................................................................... 11 Approvals ............................................................................................................ 12 Normative references ......................................................................................... 13

2

Definitions ............................................................................................................. 15

3 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5

Contract planning and documentation .............................................................. 24 General ............................................................................................................... 24 Initial considerations ........................................................................................... 25 Preliminary or estimating stage .......................................................................... 25 Design stage ....................................................................................................... 25 Commencement of installation works................................................................. 30

4 4.1 4.2

Extent of sprinkler protection ............................................................................. 30 Scope of protection and exceptions ................................................................... 30 Compartmentation and separation ..................................................................... 32

5 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4

Classification of fire hazards .............................................................................. 32 General ............................................................................................................... 32 Hazard classes ................................................................................................... 33 Storage ............................................................................................................... 34 Protection of false ceiling and false floor spaces................................................ 36

6 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4

Hydraulic design criteria ..................................................................................... 36 General ............................................................................................................... 36 High Hazard Storage - HHS ............................................................................... 37 Pressure and flow requirements for pre-calculated systems.............................. 40 Pipe sizing and layout......................................................................................... 40

7 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 7.6

Water Supplies - General..................................................................................... 41 Suitability............................................................................................................. 41 Connections for other services ........................................................................... 42 Housing of equipment for water supplies ........................................................... 43 Test facility devices............................................................................................. 44 Pressure/flow tests on water supplies ................................................................ 45 Water supply pressure test ................................................................................. 45

3


4

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

8 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 8.6 8.7 8.8

Choice of water supply ........................................................................................ 46 General ............................................................................................................... 46 Public water mains.............................................................................................. 46 Water storage tanks............................................................................................ 47 Natural and artificial sources .............................................................................. 53 Pressure tanks.................................................................................................... 57 Type of water supply........................................................................................... 59 Isolation of water supplies .................................................................................. 61 Choice of water supply ....................................................................................... 61

9 9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 9.5 9.6 9.7 9.8 9.9

Pumps.................................................................................................................... 65 General ............................................................................................................... 65 Multiple pump arrangements .............................................................................. 66 Compartments for pump sets ............................................................................. 66 Maximum temperature of water supply .............................................................. 67 Valves and accessories ...................................................................................... 67 Suction conditions............................................................................................... 68 Performance characteristics ............................................................................... 71 Electrically driven pump sets .............................................................................. 72 Diesel engine driven pumps ............................................................................... 77

10 10.1 10.2 10.3 10.4 10.5 10.6

Installation type and size..................................................................................... 83 Wet pipe installations.......................................................................................... 83 Dry pipe installations........................................................................................... 85 Alternate installations.......................................................................................... 86 Pre-action installations........................................................................................ 86 Subsidiary dry pipe or alternate extensions........................................................ 88 Subsidiary multiple control valve ........................................................................ 88

11 11.1 11.2 11.3 11.4 11.5 11.6

Spacing and location of sprinklers .................................................................... 88 General ............................................................................................................... 88 Maximum area per sprinkler ............................................................................... 89 Minimum distance between sprinklers............................................................... 90 Location of sprinklers in relation to building, facilities and equipment................ 90 Intermediate sprinklers in High Hazard occupancies ......................................... 98 Alternative protection concept for “rack storage and high rack storage”.......... 105

12 12.1 12.2 12.3 12.4 12.5 12.6 12.7 12.8 12.9

Sprinkler design characteristics and uses ...................................................... 112 General ............................................................................................................. 112 Sprinkler types and application......................................................................... 112 Flow from sprinklers.......................................................................................... 114 Sprinkler temperature ratings ........................................................................... 114 Sprinkler response sensitivity .......................................................................... 115 Sprinkler guards................................................................................................ 115 Sprinkler water shields...................................................................................... 116 Sprinkler escutcheon plates.............................................................................. 116 Corrosion protection of sprinklers..................................................................... 117

13 13.1 13.2

Valves .................................................................................................................. 117 Alarm valve station ........................................................................................... 117 Stop Valves....................................................................................................... 117

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


13.3 13.4 13.5 13.6 13.7 13.8

Ring main valves .............................................................................................. 117 Drain valves ...................................................................................................... 118 Test facilities ..................................................................................................... 118 Flushing connections ........................................................................................ 119 Pressure gauges............................................................................................... 120 Relief valve ....................................................................................................... 121

14 14.1 14.2 14.3 14.4

Alarms and alarm devices ................................................................................. 121 Water motor alarms .......................................................................................... 121 Electrical water flow and water and air pressure switches ............................... 123 Alarm transmission equipment to permanently manned locations ................... 124 Monitoring of stop valves .................................................................................. 124

15 15.1 15.2 15.3

Pipework.............................................................................................................. 125 General ............................................................................................................. 125 Pipe hangers..................................................................................................... 130 Pipework in concealed spaces ......................................................................... 134

16 16.1 16.2

Signs, notices and information......................................................................... 135 Block plan ......................................................................................................... 135 Signs and notices ............................................................................................. 135

17 17.1 17.2

Commissioning and approval inspections...................................................... 137 Commissioning inspections .............................................................................. 137 Installation certificate and documents .............................................................. 138

18 18.1 18.2 18.3 18.4

Maintenance of operational readiness............................................................. 139 General ............................................................................................................. 139 Action following sprinkler operation .................................................................. 141 Operator’s control programme.......................................................................... 141 Servicing programme by VdS-approved installer ............................................. 145

19 Monitoring of sprinkler systems....................................................................... 151 19.1 Stop valves ....................................................................................................... 151 19.2 Fill level ............................................................................................................. 151 19.3 Pressure............................................................................................................ 151 19.4 Power supply .................................................................................................... 151 19.5 Lines ................................................................................................................. 152 19.6 Detector lines .................................................................................................... 152 19.7 Sprinkler pump.................................................................................................. 152 19.8 Sprinkler equipment room................................................................................. 152 19.9 Fault warning .................................................................................................... 152 19.10 Power supply of monitoring system.................................................................. 152 19.11 Power supply from electrical network ............................................................... 152 19.12 Power supply from accumulators...................................................................... 153 19.13 Requirements to components of monitoring systems ...................................... 153

5


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Annex A Classification of Hazards.............................................................................. 155 Annex B Process for Categorising Stored Materials................................................. 158 B.1 General ............................................................................................................. 158 B.2 Material factor ................................................................................................... 158 B.3 Effect of stored materials configuration ............................................................ 160 B.4 Additional categorising method for polypropylene, polyethylene, polystyrene and plastics with similar fire behaviour.......................................... 162 Annex C Alphabetic Listing of Stored Products and Categories............................. 164 Annex D Requirements for Multi-Storey Buildings ................................................... 168 D.1 Scope................................................................................................................ 168 D.2 Zoning of installations ....................................................................................... 168 D.3 Requirements for zoned installations ............................................................... 168 D.4 Block Plan ......................................................................................................... 170 Annex E Special Requirements for High Rise Systems............................................ 171 E.1 Scope................................................................................................................ 171 E.2 Design criteria ................................................................................................... 171 E.3 Water supplies .................................................................................................. 172 Annex F Additional Requirements To Increase Life Safety...................................... 174 F.1 Subdivision into zones ...................................................................................... 174 F.2 Wet Pipe Installations ....................................................................................... 174 F.3 Sprinkler type and sensitivity ............................................................................ 174 F.4 Alarm valve station ........................................................................................... 174 F.5 Water Supplies ................................................................................................. 174 F.6 Theatres............................................................................................................ 174 F.7 Additional precautions for maintenance ........................................................... 175 Annex G Methods for sizing pipework........................................................................ 176 G.1 Calculation of pressure losses in pipework ...................................................... 176 G.2 Pre-calculated systems..................................................................................... 180 G.3 Fully calculated systems................................................................................... 180 Annex H Figures with examples (informative) ........................................................... 184 Annex I Approved components ................................................................................... 187 Annex J New technology (Informative)....................................................................... 189 Annex K Protection of Special Hazards...................................................................... 190 K.1 Aerosols ............................................................................................................ 190 K.2 Clothes in multiple garment hanging storage ................................................... 190 K.3 Flammable liquid storage.................................................................................. 192 K.4 Pallets - idle ...................................................................................................... 194 K.5 Spirituous liquors in wooden barrels................................................................. 194 K.6 Non-woven synthetic fabric............................................................................... 195 K.7 Risks with storage of plastics – Storage with containers of unexpanded polypropylene (PP) and polyethylene (PE) and polystyrene (PS) or stored PP/PE/PS materials and plastics with similar fire behaviour................. 195 K.8 Local protection of chipboard manufacture ...................................................... 200 K.9 Special protection concept for racks with solid shelves and gangways ........... 202 K.10 Cable ducts, vertical cable ducts and cable floors............................................ 205

6

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

K.11 K.12 K.13 K. 14


Recycling plants for plastic packaging material................................................ 207 Local application for paper machines ............................................................... 209 Special requirements for the protection of mobile shelving with ceiling sprinklers only........................................................................................ 209 Requirements for the protection of automatic parking systems ....................... 210

Annex L ESFR Sprinkler systems, planning and installation................................... 213 L.1 General ............................................................................................................. 213 L.2 Sprinkler System Design .................................................................................. 217 Annex M Proportioning of film forming foam concentrate in sprinkler systems... 223 M.1 Choice and type of sprinkler system................................................................. 223 M.2 Foam proportioning unit.................................................................................... 224 M.3 Foam concentrate pumps ................................................................................. 225 M.4 Foam concentrate............................................................................................. 225 M.5 Foam concentrate tank ..................................................................................... 226 M.6 Foam concentrate pipes and water-foam concentrate mixture pipes............... 227 M.7 Pressure loss calculation with foam concentrate pipes.................................... 227 M.8 Disposal ............................................................................................................ 229 Annex N Commodity classification methodology utilising calorimeter tests (informative)................................................................................................................... 229 N.1 Introduction ....................................................................................................... 229 N.2 Test principles................................................................................................... 229 N.3 Method .............................................................................................................. 230 N.4 Evaluation of test results................................................................................... 230 N.5 Bibliography ...................................................................................................... 230 Annex O List of numbering of tables and figures CEA/VdS CEA (informative) ..... 231 Annex R Requirements for Material and Fire Resistance Classes and their Classification in accordance with DIN 4102 and DIN EN 13501 ..................... 235 R.1 Principles .......................................................................................................... 236 R.2 Combustibility of materials................................................................................ 236 R.3 Fire resistance of components.......................................................................... 238 Annex S Combustion Heat of Insulating Materials of Cables and Wires (acc. VdS 2134) .............................................................................................................. 242 S.1 General ..................................................................................................................... 242 S.2 Application ................................................................................................................ 242 S.3 Application of tables.................................................................................................. 242 Annex SL........................................................................................................................ 248 Extinguishing support systems................................................................................... 248 Annex Z Notification of installation for sprinkler systems ....................................... 252

7


0

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Foreword

These VdS CEA Guidelines for automatic sprinkler systems – Planning and installation are based on CEA 4001 (DE), edition September 1995. The CEA Specifications have been developed by the GEI 4 expert group of the fire protection section of CEA (Comité Européen des Assurances) in line with the experts of EUROFEU (European Committee of the Manufacturers of Fire Protection and Safety Equipment and Fire Fighting Vehicles). The CEA Member Associations will publish these Guidelines as European guidelines in the respective countries.

0.1

Application of the VdS CEA Guidelines

These Guidelines supersede the edition VdS CEA 4001 : 2008-11 (03) and shall be applicable with any systems applied for as from 01.04.2011. Requirements missing from these Guidelines do not entitle the operator to determine any provisions without prior agreement with VdS. The installation of sprinkler systems shall be subject to these Guidelines and to the applicable legal and official regulations. Any modifications of edition VdS CEA 4001:2008-11 (03) are marked by a vertical line in the margin: Example: combustible Designation for the combustibility of building materials and materials, characteristics of the classification in accordance with Annex R.

0.2

Classification system for sprinkler systems

By publishing these Guidelines in Germany, a classification system for the protective value of sprinkler systems is established. Three classes of availability are distinguished. Class 1 includes systems with very high availability corresponding to the protective value of the former VdS Guidelines, Class 2 includes systems with high availability corresponding to the protective value of the CEA Specifications, and Class 3 includes systems with limited availability corresponding to the protective value of extinguishing support systems. The main difference between sprinkler systems of Class 1 and Class 2 is the availability and reliability of the water supply. In the planning phase of the sprinkler system an analysis should be carried out in cooperation with the competent bodies to determine the appropriate protection target. Due to this classification the operator has a choice – within certain limits and depending on the protection target – between systems of different availability and the appropriate advantages, such as an assessment and approval by VdS. The classification of sprinkler systems is specified in Table 0.01:

8

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


Sprinkler systems

Extinguishing support systems

Class

1

2

3

Application

Full protection

Full protection

Partial protection / preparation for Class 1 or 2 1)

Maximum surface [m²] of protected area

unlimited

50,000 2)

5,000 2)

Limitation from unprotected area

Limitation of fire compartment

Limitation of fire compartment

Stage of extension 1 none Stage of extension 2 ≥ F 30 Stage of extension 3 ≥ F 90

Protective value for persons and property

very high

high

limited, graduated according to stage of extension 3)

1) If a building regulation requires sprinkler protection, systems of Class 3 generally will not fulfil the life safety requirements. 2) Systems installed in larger areas have a lower protective value. 3) As extinguishing support systems are designed only for bridging the time between an alarm and the beginning of fire fighting operations, these systems do not fulfil the requirements that are generally set to water extinguishing systems (e.g. sprinkler systems).

Table 0.01: Classification of sprinkler systems

0.3

Contents of these Guidelines

Every clause of these Guidelines covers all requirements for sprinkler systems of Classes 1 and 2 and their components as well as all requirements for the buildings, rooms or equipment to be protected. The requirements for extinguishing support systems are specified in an Annex and based on the requirements for sprinkler systems of Classes 1 and 2. The requirements to be fulfilled by a sprinkler system of Class 1 are highlighted accordingly. These requirements refer to measures increasing the reliability of sprinkler systems. Example: Additional requirements to be fulfilled by sprinkler systems of Class 1. In certain cases the CEA Specifications refer to national regulations. Such requirements apply to sprinkler systems of Classes 1 and 2 and have been added to these Guidelines accordingly. If alternative requirements of the CEA Specifications are replaced by national regulations, it will be noted accordingly. On certain issues the CEA Specifications require amendments in order to ensure a precise technical realisation. These amendments have been added to these Guidelines accordingly. Furthermore, amendments have been added for alternative protection concepts, the efficiency and reliability of which have been evidenced by fire tests, secure statistical data resp. system-analytical safety engineering methods. Any of the added amendments comply with the existing requirements of VdS 2092, the sprinkler guidelines for planning and installation.

9


1

General

1.1

Scope

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

These Guidelines specify requirements and give recommendations for the design, installation and maintenance of fixed sprinkler systems in buildings and industrial plants, and particular requirements for sprinkler systems which are integral to measures for the protection of life. The requirements and recommendations of these Guidelines are also applicable to any addition, extension, repair, maintenance or other modification to a sprinkler system. It covers the classification of hazards, provision of water supplies, components to be used, installation and testing of the system, maintenance, and the extension of existing systems, and identifies construction details of buildings which are necessary for satisfactory performance of sprinkler systems complying with these Guidelines. The requirements concerning water supplies may be applicable as guidance, to be used with experienced judgement for other fixed, fire fighting systems where no other VdS Guidelines or CEA Specifications exist. These Guidelines do not deal with water spray systems. These Guidelines are intended only for fixed sprinkler systems in buildings and other premises on land. Although the general principles may well apply to other uses (e.g. maritime use), for these other uses additional considerations will almost certainly have to be taken into account. The requirements are not valid for automatic sprinkler systems on ships, in aircraft, on vehicles and mobile fire appliances or for below ground systems in the mining industry. These Guidelines are intended for use by those concerned with selling, designing, installing, testing, inspecting, approving, operating and maintaining automatic sprinkler systems, in order that such equipment will function as intended throughout its life.

1.2

Aims

An automatic sprinkler system is designed to detect a fire and extinguish it with water in its early stages or hold the fire in check so that extinguishment can be completed by other means. The sprinkler system is intended to extend throughout the premises with only limited exceptions. An evaluation of sprinkler protection shall also be based on further aspects, such as combustible insulation or controllers in high rack storage without any additional protection. In some life safety applications, an authority might specify sprinkler protection only in certain designated areas, and solely to maintain safe conditions for the evacuation of persons. It should not be assumed that the provision of a sprinkler system entirely obviates the need for other means of fighting fires and it is important to consider the fire precautions in the premises as a whole.

10

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


Structural fire resistance, escape routes, fire detection and fire alarm systems, particular hazards needing other fire protection methods, provision of extinguishing means, safe working and goods handling methods, management supervision and good housekeeping all need consideration. It is essential that sprinkler systems should be properly maintained by VdS-approved installers to ensure operation when required. This routine is liable to be overlooked or given insufficient attention by supervisors. It is, however, neglected at peril to the lives of occupants of the premises and at the risk of crippling financial loss. The importance of proper maintenance cannot be too highly emphasised. When sprinkler systems are out of service extra attention shall be paid to other fire precautions and the appropriate authorities shall be informed of the shutdown.

1.3

Description

A sprinkler system consists of a water supply (or supplies) and one or more sprinkler installations; each installation consists of a set of installation main control valves and a pipe array fitted with sprinkler heads. The sprinkler heads are fitted at specified locations at the roof or ceiling, and where necessary between racks, below shelves, and other specified places. The main elements of a typical installation are shown in Figure 1.01. The sprinklers operate at predetermined temperatures to discharge water over the affected part of the area below. The flow of water through the alarm valve initiates a fire alarm. The operating temperature is generally selected to suit ambient temperature conditions. Only sprinklers in the vicinity of the fire, i.e. those which become sufficiently heated, operate.

Figure 1.01: Main elements of a sprinkler installation

11


1.4

Approvals

1.4.1

VdS-approved installers and components

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Sprinkler systems shall be installed in accordance with these Guidelines by VdSapproved installers using VdS-approved components and VdS-approved methods for sizing pipework as specified in Annex G. The approved installer shall be approved for each type of system installed by him. If local requirements make sub-contracting necessary such as installation of electrical supplies or public water mains connections, the approved installer shall inform the subcontractor of any special requirements for sprinkler installations to satisfy these Guidelines. If the installation of a system involves more than one approved installer, one of them shall be responsible for the entire installation.

1.4.2

Completion

The approved installer shall send an installation certificate to VdS Schadenverhütung (VdS), Inspection Services, when the system is finally installed. The responsible expert will then carry out the approval inspection. The same procedure will apply to existing systems where alterations have been made.

1.4.3

Periodical inspections

The sprinkler system shall be periodically inspected at least once a year by the authorities’ expert. The inspection report shall confirm that the system is in accordance with these Guidelines, well maintained and in full working order. Any faults and deficiencies shall be noted in the inspection report and the authorities shall specify the time limits for rectification.

1.4.4

Responsible person

The operator shall appoint a responsible person and a substitute, who after they have been given the necessary instructions by the installer, shall ensure that the system remains in working condition. The name, address and telephone number of the person responsible for the installation, as well as those of his or her substitute, shall be prominently displayed in the sprinkler equipment room. The operator shall ensure that:

12

−

the installation conforms to these Guidelines at all times;

−

the installation is in working order at all times;

−

the installation is checked, maintained and tested in accordance with the installers' instructions and these Guidelines;

−

the installation is inspected, by contract, at least once a year by one of the authorities' experts;

−

any faults or deficiencies are corrected within the time limits laid down by the authorities.

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

1.5


Normative references

These Guidelines incorporate dated and undated references to other publications. These references are cited at the appropriate places in the text, and the publications are listed hereafter. For dated references, subsequent amendments to or revisions of any of these publications apply only when incorporated by amendment of these Guidelines. For undated references the latest edition of the publication referred to applies. −

DIN 1045 Concrete, reinforced and prestressed concrete structures

−

DIN 1055 Design loads for buildings/Actions on structures

−

DIN 1072 Road and foot bridges; design loads

−

DIN 1988 Technical regulations for drinking water installations (TRWI)

−

DIN 2460 Steel water pipes

−

DIN 2501 Flanges; connecting dimensions

−

DIN 2880 Application of cement mortar lining for cast iron pipes, steel pipes and fittings

−

DIN 3384 Hose assemblies of stainless steel for gas; safety requirements, testing, marking

−

DIN 4102 Fire behaviour of building materials and building components

−

DIN 6280 Generating sets

−

DIN 8061 Unplasticised polyvinyl chloride pipes; general quality requirements

−

DIN 8075 Polyethylene (PE) pipes

−

DIN V 14011 Terms for fire fighting purposes

−

DIN 14462 Water conduit for fire extinguishing – Planning and installation of fire hose systems and pillar fire hydrant and underground fire systems

−

DIN 17455 General purpose welded circular stainless steel tubes; technical delivery conditions

−

DIN 18232 Smoke and heat control systems

−

DIN 30675-1 External corrosion protection of buried pipes; corrosion protection systems for steel pipes

−

DIN 30681 Compensators for gas installations - Stainless steel expansion joints with bellows units - Safety requirements, testing, marking

−

DIN 50929 Corrosion of metals; probability of corrosion of metallic materials when subject to corrosion from the outside

−

DIN EN 545 Ductile iron pipes, fittings, accessories and their joints for water pipelines - Requirements and test methods

−

DIN EN 671 Parts 1 to 3 Wall hydrants

−

DIN EN 1044 Brazing - Filler metals

−

DIN EN 1045 Brazing - Fluxes for brazing - Classification and technical delivery conditions

−

DIN EN 1057 Copper and copper alloys - Seamless, round copper tubes for water and gas in sanitary and heating applications

13


14

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

−

DIN EN 1092-1 Flanges and their joints - Circular flanges for pipes, valves, fittings and accessories - Part 1: Steel flanges, PN designated

−

DIN EN 1254 Copper and copper alloys – Plumbing fittings

−

DIN EN 10241 Steel threaded pipe fittings

−

DIN EN 10242 Threaded pipe fittings in malleable cast iron

−

DIN EN 10298 Steel tubes and fittings for onshore and offshore pipelines – Internal lining with cement mortar

−

DIN EN 12449 Copper and copper alloys - Seamless, round tubes for general purposes

−

DIN EN 13501 Fire classification of construction products and building elements according to their fire behaviour

−

DIN EN 1363 Fire resistance tests

−

DIN EN 1364 Fire resistance tests for non-load-bearing elements

−

DIN EN 1365 Fire resistance tests for load-bearing elements

−

DIN EN 1366 Fire resistance tests for installations

−

DIN EN 1634 Fire resistance tests for doors and closures

−

DIN EN 60332-3 Tests on electric and optical fibre cables under fire conditions – Part 3-21: Test for vertical flame spread of vertically mounted bunched wires or cables – Category A F/R

−

DIN EN ISO 12944-4 Paints and varnishes - Corrosion protection of steel structures by protective paint systems - Part 4: Types of surface and surface preparation

−

DIN ISO 8528-4 Reciprocating internal combustion engine driven alternating current generating sets – Part 4: Control and switchgear

−

DIN VDE 0108 Power installations and safety power supply in communal facilities

−

DIN VDE 0276-603 Power cables - Part 603: Distribution cables of rated voltage U0/U 0,6/1 kV

−

DIN VDE 0276-604 Power cables - Part 604: Power cables of nominal voltages U0/U 0,6/1 kV with special fire performance for use in power stations

−

DVGW GW 9 Evaluation of soils regarding their corrosion behaviour on buried pipes and containers of non-alloy and low-alloyed ferrous materials

−

EN 54 Fire detection and fire alarm systems

−

EN 287-1 Qualification test of welders – Fusion welding – Part 1: Steels

−

EN 10 204 Metallic products – Types of inspection documents

−

EN 12 259-1+A1 Fixed firefighting systems – Components for sprinkler and water spray systems – Part 1: Sprinklers

−

FM Global DS 2-0 Installation guidelines for automatic sprinklers

−

DIN EN 60623 Secondary cells and batteries containing alkaline or other non-acid electrolytes - Vented nickel-cadmium prismatic rechargeable single cells

−

IEC 60947 Low voltage switchgear and control gear

−

ISO 3046-1 : 1986 Reciprocating internal combustion engines - Performance – Part 1: Declarations of power, fuel and lubricating oil consumptions

−

NT FIRE 049 Combustible products: Commodity classification; Fire test procedure

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


−

R 1.1.1 Pressure pipes made of PVC-U with quality mark of “Gütegemeinschaft Kunststoffrohre e.V.”

−

R 14.3.1 Pressure pipes made of PE 80 and PE 100 in general, with quality mark of “Gütegemeinschaft Kunststoffrohre e.V.”

−

VDA 4500 KLT (tote box) system

−

VdS 2095 Guidelines for automatic fire detection and fire alarm systems; planning and installation

−

VdS 2106 Guidelines for spark detection, spark separation and spark extinguishing systems; planning and installation

−

VdS 2109 Guidelines for water spray extinguishing systems; planning and installation

−

VdS 2132 Guidelines for the approval of installers for fire extinguishing systems

−

VdS 2212 Log book for water extinguishing systems

−

VdS 2234 Fire break walls and complex separation walls; leaflet for arrangement and design

−

VdS 2373 Sprinkler systems - Leaflet for anti-freeze protection

−

VdS 2496 Guidelines for the triggering of fire extinguishing systems

2

Definitions

For the purposes of these Guidelines, the following definitions apply. 'A' gauge A pressure gauge connected to the public water mains, between the supply pipe shut-off valve and the check valve. accelerator A device that reduces the delay in operation of a dry alarm valve, or alternate alarm valve in dry mode, by early detection of the drop in air or inert gas pressure on sprinkler operation. AFFF (aqueous film forming foam) Aqueous film forming foam concentrate based on fluorine surfactants. AFFF/AR (alcohol resistant) Alcohol resistant aqueous and polymeric film forming foam concentrate based on fluorine surfactants with polysaccharides. alarm test valve A valve through which water may be drawn to test the operation of the water motor fire alarm and/or of any associated electric fire alarm. alarm valve A check valve, of the wet, dry or alternate type that also initiates the water motor fire alarm when the sprinkler installation operates.

15


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

alarm valve, alternate An alarm valve suitable for a wet, dry or alternate installation. alarm valve, dry An alarm valve suitable for a dry installation; and/or in association with a wet alarm valve for an alternate installation. alarm valve, pre-action An alarm valve suitable for a pre-action installation. alarm valve station An assembly comprising an alarm valve, a stop valve and all the associated valves and accessories for the control of one sprinkler group. alarm valve, wet An alarm valve suitable for a wet installation. area of operation The maximum area over which it is assumed, for design purposes, that sprinklers will operate in a fire. area of operation, hydraulically most favourable The location in a sprinkler array of an area of operation of specified shape at which the water flow is the maximum for a specific pressure. area of operation, hydraulically most unfavourable The location in a sprinkler array of an area of operation of specified shape at which the water supply pressure is the maximum needed to give the specified design density. arm pipe A pipe less than 0,3 m long, other than the last section of a branch pipe, feeding a single sprinkler. authorities Public authorities, e.g. fire and building control authorities, local water authorities or other appropriate public authorities, or else fire insurers or VdS Schadenverhütung (VdS), responsible for approving sprinkler systems, components and procedures. 'B' gauge A pressure gauge connected to and on the same level as an alarm valve, indicating the pressure on the upstream side of the valve.

16

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


balanced pressure proportioning Proportioning of the foam concentrate with a pressure identical to the water pressure prevailing at the inlet to the proportioning unit. booster pump An automatic pump supplying water to a sprinkler system from a gravity tank or the public water mains. branch pipe A pipe feeding sprinklers either directly or via arm pipes. 'C' gauge A pressure gauge connected to and on the same level as an alarm valve, indicating the pressure on the downstream side of the valve. combustible Designation for the combustibility of building materials and materials, characteristics of the classification in accordance with Annex R. composite pipe system System for the construction of piping, the wall of which consists of several materials in a permanent non-detachable compound, e.g. plastics and aluminium. design density The minimum density of discharge, in mm/min of water, for which a sprinkler installation is designed, determined from the discharge of a specified group of sprinklers, in litres per minute, divided by the area covered, in square metres. design temperature The design temperature is the temperature of a pipe which shall be used as basis for calculating the strength and linear extension. detector sprinkler A sealed sprinkler mounted on a pressurised pipeline used to control a deluge valve. Operation of the detector sprinkler causes loss of pressure to open the valve. distribution pipe A pipe feeding either a branch pipe directly or a single sprinkler on a non-terminal branch pipe more than 300 mm long. distribution pipe spur A distribution pipe from a main distribution pipe, to a terminal branched pipe array.

17


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

double tree arrangement Pipe arrangement with branch pipes on both sides of a distribution pipe. drop A vertical distribution pipe feeding a distribution or branch pipe below. escutcheon plate A plate covering the gap between the shank or body of a sprinkler projecting through a suspended ceiling, and the ceiling. exhauster A device to exhaust the air or inert gas from a dry or alternate installation to atmosphere on sprinkler operation to give more rapid operation of the alarm valve. film forming foam concentrates Film-forming synthetic foam concentrates consist of combinations of fluorine surfactants and hydrocarbon tensides as well as further additives. Aqueous film forming foam concentrates (AFFF) and alcohol resistant film forming foam concentrates (AFFF/AR) can be distinguished. Note: They are classified as hazardous to water and shall be handled in accordance with legal regulations. fire compartment A separated volume in accordance with VdS 2234 (fire compartment separation) capable of maintaining its fire integrity for a minimum specified time. fire-resistant Designation for the fire resistance class of components, characteristics of the classification in accordance with Annex R. fire-retardant Designation for the fire resistance class of components, characteristics of the classification in accordance with Annex R. foam Steady state of small bubbles of lower density than that of flammable liquids or water. Foam generated by film forming foam concentrates form a barrier between fire load and air resp. oxygen. On the surface of most hydrocarbonated fuels these concentrates form a film that is able to suppress both fuel steams and oxygen intrusion. fully calculated A term applied to an installation in which all the pipework is sized by hydraulic calculation by the approved installer.

18

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


gridded configuration A pipe array in which water flows to each sprinkler by more than one route. hanger An assembly for suspending pipework from elements of building structure. HHP High fire risk, production risks (High Hazard Production) HHS High fire risk, storage risks (High Hazard Storage) highly fire-retardant Designation for the fire resistance class of components, characteristics of the classification in accordance with Annex R. highly flammable Designation for the combustibility of building materials and materials, characteristics of the classification in accordance with Annex R. high rise system A sprinkler system in which the highest sprinkler is more than 45 m above the lowest sprinkler or above the sprinkler pumps, whichever is the lower. installation, alternate An installation in which the pipework is selectively charged with either water or air/inert gas according to ambient temperature conditions. installation, dry (pipe) An installation in which the pipework is charged with air or inert gas under pressure. installation, pre-action One of two types of dry, or alternate in dry mode, installation in which the alarm valve can be opened by a fire detection system. installation, wet (pipe) An installation in which the pipework is always charged with water. jockey pump A small pump used to replenish minor water loss, to avoid starting an automatic sprinkler or booster pump unnecessarily.

19


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

LH Light Hazard. life safety A term applied to sprinkler systems forming an integral part of measures required for the protection of life. looped configuration A pipe array in which there is more than one distribution pipe route along which water may flow to a branch pipe. main distribution pipe A pipe feeding a distribution pipe. maximum flow demand (Qmax) The volumetric flow at the point of intersection of the pressure/flow demand characteristic of the most favourable area of operation and the water supply pressure-flow demand characteristic with the water source under normal conditions. mechanical pipe joint A pipe fitting other than threaded tubulars, screwed fittings, spigots and socket and flanged joint, used to connect pipes and components. multiple control A valve, normally held closed by a temperature sensitive element, suitable for use in a water spray installation or for the operation of a pressure switch. multi-storey buildings Buildings comprising two or more storeys, above and/or below ground. node A point in pipework at which pressure and flow(s) are calculated; each node is a datum point for the purpose of hydraulic calculations in the installation. non-combustible Designation for the combustibility of building materials and materials, characteristics of the classification in accordance with Annex R. normal operation According to these Guidelines, normal operation of a building or system means uninterrupted operation without interference of the sprinkler system being necessary.

20

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


of low flammability Designation for the combustibility of building materials and materials, characteristics of the classification in accordance with Annex R. OH Ordinary Hazard. operating pressure The pressure prevailing in the sprinkler system. pipe array The pipes feeding a group of sprinklers. Pipe arrays may be looped, gridded or branched. plastic pipe system System for the construction of piping, the wall of which is made exclusively of plastic material, except for the transition pieces. pre-calculated A term applied to an installation in which the pipes down-stream of the design points have been previously sized by hydraulic calculation. Tables of diameters are given. premix A water-foam concentrate mixture mixed prior to extinguishing operations, constantly available inside the wet pipe installation or a tank. press fitting system System for the construction of piping. The connection between pipe and fitting is by a form-fit modification using a press tool. proportioning Continuous addition of foam concentrate of a specific concentration to the water flow. riser A vertical distribution pipe feeding a distribution or branch pipe above. smoke-proof and self-closing Doors with smoke protection function in accordance with DIN 18095 and Annex R. spreading coefficient Defines the ability of a liquid to spread spontaneously over the surface of another liquid.

21


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

sprinkler, (automatic) A nozzle with a thermally sensitive sealing device which opens to discharge water for fire fighting. sprinkler, flush ceiling pattern A pendent sprinkler for fitting partly above but with the temperature sensitive element below, the lower plane of the ceiling. sprinkler, concealed A recessed sprinkler with a cover plate that disengages when heat is applied. sprinkler, conventional pattern A sprinkler that gives a spherical pattern of water discharge. sprinkler, dry pendent pattern A unit comprising a sprinkler and a dry drop pipe unit with a valve, at the head of the pipe, held closed by a device maintained in position by the sprinkler head valve. sprinkler, dry upright pattern A unit comprising a sprinkler and dry rise pipe unit with a valve, at the base of the pipe, held closed by a device maintained in position by the sprinkler head valve. sprinkler, flat spray A sprinkler with a downward, particularly flat, paraboloid pattern discharge for a certain protection area. Part of the water may be discharged towards the ceiling. sprinkler, fusible link A sprinkler which opens when a component provided for the purpose melts. sprinkler, glass bulb A sprinkler which opens when a liquid-filled glass bulb bursts. sprinkler, horizontal A sprinkler in which the nozzle directs water horizontally against the deflector. sprinkler, pendent A sprinkler in which the nozzle directs water downwards. sprinkler, recessed A sprinkler in which all or part of the heat sensing element is above the lower plane of the ceiling.

22

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


sprinkler, sidewall pattern A sprinkler that gives an outward half-paraboloid pattern discharge. sprinkler, spray pattern A sprinkler that gives a downward paraboloid pattern discharge. sprinkler, upright A sprinkler in which the nozzle directs water upwards. sprinkler group A sub-division of an installation fitted with an alarm valve station and the appropriate pipes and sprinklers. sprinkler system The entire means of providing sprinkler protection in the premises comprising one or more sprinkler installations, the pipework to the installations and the water supplies. sprinkler yoke (arms) The part of a sprinkler that retains the heat sensitive element in load bearing contact with the sprinkler head valve. staggered (sprinkler) layout An off-set layout with the sprinklers displaced one-half pitch along the branch pipe relative to the next range or branches. standard (sprinkler) layout A layout with sprinkler on adjacent branch pipes forming a rectangle. subsidiary alternate (wet and dry pipe) extension A part of a wet installation that is selectively charged with water or air/inert gas according to ambient temperature conditions and which is controlled by a subsidiary dry or alternate alarm valve. subsidiary dry extension A part of a wet or alternate installation that is charged permanently with air or inert gas under pressure. supply pipe A pipe connecting a water supply to a trunk main or the alarm valve stations; or a pipe supplying water to a private reservoir or storage tank. suspended open cell ceiling A ceiling of regular open cell construction through which water from sprinklers can be discharged freely.

23


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

tree arrangement A pipe arrangement with branch pipes on only one side of a distribution pipe. trunk main A pipe connecting two or more water supply pipes to the alarm valve stations. unpolluted atmosphere According to these Guidelines an atmosphere is considered unpolluted if the concentrations for aggressive or corrosive chemicals are not reached. The manufacturer shall specify which chemicals have these characteristics in which concentrations. water flow Product of area of operation and design density with non-uniformity factor due to hydraulics (l/min). water-foam concentrate mixture A mixture consisting of water and proportions of foam concentrate. water supply datum point A point on the installation pipework at which the water supply pressure and flow rate are specified and measured. zone A sub-division of an installation with a specific flow alarm or alarm valve and fitted with a monitored slide valve.

3

Contract planning and documentation

3.1

General

Installation, extensions, modifications and repairs of sprinkler systems shall be carried out by VdS-approved installers using VdS-approved components (see Annex I). Note: Even in the case of modifications and extensions of systems the documentation should be revised according to the below-mentioned details. The information specified in 3.3 and 3.4 shall be available to the operator. All drawings and information documents shall carry the following information: a) the name of the operator and the owner; b) the address and location of premises; c) the occupancy of each building; d) the name of the installer; e) the name of the person responsible for checking the design, who shall not also be the designer; f)

24

date and number of issue.

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

3.2


Initial considerations

Consideration shall be given to any benefits that might be gained by changes in building design, work procedures etc., when preparing the outline design. Although an automatic sprinkler system usually extends throughout a building or plant, it should not be assumed that this entirely obviates the need for other means of fire protection and it is important to consider the fire precautions of the premises as a whole. Account shall be taken of possible interaction between sprinkler systems and other fire protection measures. Where a sprinkler system or an extension or alteration to a sprinkler system is being considered for new or existing buildings and industrial plants the relevant authorities shall be consulted at an early stage.

3.3

Preliminary or estimating stage

The information provided shall include the following: a) a general specification of the system; and b) a block plan of the premises showing: 1) the types of sprinkler groups and the hazard classes and storage categories in the various buildings; 2) the extent of the system with details of any unprotected areas; 3) the construction and occupancy of the main building and any communicating and/or neighbouring buildings; 4) a cross-section of the full height of the building(s) showing the height of the highest sprinkler above a stated datum level; c) particulars of the water supplies, which in the case of public water mains shall include pressure flow data, with the date and time of test, and a plan of the test site; and d) a statement that the installation will comply fully with these Guidelines or giving details of any deviations from their requirements and the reasons therefor.

3.4

Design stage

3.4.1

General

The information provided shall include a notification of installation (see 3.4.2), complete working drawings of the sprinkler groups (see 3.4.3) and details of the water supplies (see 3.4.4).

3.4.2

Notification of installation

The notification of installation shall give the following information: a) the name of project; b) all drawing or document reference numbers; c) all drawing or document issue numbers; d) all dates of issue of drawings or documents; e) all drawing or document titles;

25


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

f) the types of sprinkler groups and the nominal diameter of each alarm valve station; g) the number or references of each alarm valve station in the system; h) the number of sprinklers on each alarm valve station; i) the piping volume in the case of dry or alternate installations; j) the height of the highest sprinkler on each alarm valve station; k) a statement that the installation will comply fully with these Guidelines or giving details of any deviations from their requirements and the reasons therefor; l) a list of approved components included in the system, each identified by manufacturer's name and model/reference number.

3.4.3 3.4.3.1

Installation layout drawings General

The scale shall be not less than 1:200. Layout drawings shall include the following information: a) north point indication; b) fire hazard classes including storage categories and design storage heights; c) constructional details of floors, ceilings, roofs, exterior walls of sprinklered areas and walls separating sprinklered and non-sprinklered areas; d) sectional elevations of each floor of each building showing the distance of sprinklers from ceilings, structural features, etc. which may affect the sprinkler layout or the water distribution from the sprinklers; e) the location and size of concealed roof or ceiling voids, offices and other enclosures sealed at a level lower than the roof or ceiling proper; f) indication of trunking, stagings, platforms, machinery, light fittings, heaters, suspended open cell ceilings etc. which may adversely affect the sprinkler distribution; g) the sprinkler types and temperature ratings; h) the type and approximate location of pipe hangers; i) the location and type of alarm valve stations and location of water motor alarms; j) the location and details of any water flow, and air or water pressure alarm switches; k) the location and size of any subsidiary valves, subsidiary stop valves and drain valves; l) the drainage slope of the pipework; m) a schedule listing the number of sprinklers for each area of protection; n) the location of all test valves; o) the location and details of any alarm panel; p) the location and details of any fire department supply connections; q) a key to the symbols used. Note: Details of other services should not appear on sprinkler drawings except insofar as they are necessary for the correct installation of the sprinkler system. 3.4.3.2

Pre-calculated pipework

All systems require a full hydraulic calculation. Thus, details on pre-calculated systems cannot be given.

26

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

3.4.3.3


Fully calculated pipework

For fully calculated pipework, the following shall be given, with detailed calculations, either on purposely designed work sheets or as a computer print-out: a) the program name and version number, if applicable; b) the date of the worksheet or print-out; c) the actual internal diameters of all pipes used in the calculation; d) for each design area of operation: 1)

the area identification;

2)

the hazard class;

3)

the specified design density in millimetres per minute;

4)

the assumed maximum area of operation in square metres;

5)

the number of sprinklers in the area of operation;

6)

the sprinkler nominal orifice size in millimetres;

7)

the maximum area covered per sprinkler in square metres;

8)

detailed and dimensioned working drawings showing the following: − the node or pipe reference scheme used to identify pipes, junctions, sprinkler heads and fittings which need hydraulic consideration; − the position of the hydraulically most unfavourable area of operation; − the position of the hydraulically most favourable area of operation; − the four sprinklers upon which the design density is based; − the height above datum point of each identified pressure value;

e) for each sprinkler in the area of operation: 1)

the sprinkler node or reference number;

2)

the K factor;

3)

the flow through the sprinkler in litres per minute;

4)

the pressure to the sprinkler or sprinkler assembly in bar;

f) for each hydraulically significant pipe: 1)

pipe node or other reference;

2)

nominal bore in millimetres;

3)

the pipe constant for type and condition (see G1.1 according to C value);

4)

flow in litres per minute;

5)

velocity in metres per second;

6)

length in metres;

7)

numbers, types and equivalent lengths of fittings;

8)

static head change in metres;

9)

pressures at inlet and outlet in bar;

10) friction loss in bar; 11) indication of flow direction.

27


3.4.4 3.4.4.1

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Water supply Water supply drawings

The drawings shall show water supplies and pipework therefrom up to the installation alarm valves. The drawings shall be on an indicated scale of not less than 1:100. A key to the symbols shall be included. The position and type of stop and check valves and any pressure reducing valve, water meter, water lock and any connection supplying water for other services, shall be indicated. 3.4.4.2

Hydraulic calculation

An hydraulic calculation (with relevant flow details) shall show that each trunk main together with any branch main, from each water supply to a water supply test and drain valve, alarm valve station and control valve 'C' gauge (i.e. including control valves of sprinkler groups) is capable of providing the required pressure and flow at the test and drain valve of the alarm valve. 3.4.4.3

Public water mains

Where a public water mains forms one or both of the supplies or provides infill to a reduced capacity storage tank, the following details shall be given: a) the nominal diameter of the mains; b) whether the mains is double-end fed or dead-end; if dead-end, the location of the nearest double-end fed mains connected to it; c) the pressure/flow characteristic of the public water mains determined by a test at a period of peak demand. At least three test points shall be shown. The graph shall be corrected for friction losses and static head difference between the test location and either the control valve 'C' gauge or the suction tank infill valve, as appropriate; d) the date and time of the public water mains test; e) the location of the public water mains test point relative to the alarm valve; f) a pressure/flow characteristic indicating the available pressure at any flow up to the maximum flow demand; g) the demand pressure/flow characteristic for each sprinkler group for the hydraulically most unfavourable (and if required the most favourable) area of operation with pressure taken as at the alarm valve 'C' pressure gauge. 3.4.4.4

Automatic pump set

Where automatic pump sets form one or more of the water supplies the following details of each automatic pump set shall be provided: a) a pump characteristic curve for low water level 'X' (see Figures 8.02 and 8.03), showing the estimated performance of the pump or pumps under installed conditions at the alarm valve 'C' gauge; b) the pump manufacturer's data sheet showing the following: 1) the generated head graph; 2) the power absorption graph; 3) the net positive suction head (NPSH) graph; 4) a statement of the power output of each prime mover; c) the installer's data sheet showing the performance of the pump set, its pressure/flow characteristics, at the control valve 'C' gauge for normal water level and for low water

28

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


level 'X' (see Figures 8.02 and 8.03), and at the pump outlet pressure gauge for normal water level; d) the height difference between the alarm valve 'C' gauge and the pump delivery pressure gauge; e) the sprinkler group number and the hazard classifications; f) the available and the specified NPSH at maximum required flow; g) the minimum depth of water cover in the case of submersible pumps; h) the demand pressure/flow characteristic for the hydraulically most unfavourable and most favourable area of operation calculated at the alarm valve 'C' gauge. 3.4.4.5

Pressure tank

The following details shall be provided: a) the location; b) the total volume; c) the volume of stored water; d) the air pressure; e) the height of the highest sprinkler above the bottom of the tank; f) details of the means of replenishment. 3.4.4.6

Water storage tank

The following details shall be provided: a) the location; b) the total volume; c) the volume and resulting operating time; d) inflow for reduced capacity tanks; e) vertical distance between the pump centre line and the tank low water level 'X'; f) structural details of the tank and roof; g) anticipated frequency of schedule repairs requiring emptying of the tank.

3.4.5

Electrical installation for electrically driven pumps

The following details shall be provided: a) protection of the cables against mechanical damage; b) protection of the cables against fire; c) electrical installations.

29


3.5

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Commencement of installation works

Before the commencement of any works for new installations and/or extensions or modifications of existing installations, the approved installer shall send a written notification (‘Notification of installation’) to VdS Schadenverhütung (VdS). A notification shall be submitted for each new installation, independently of its size, and for all extensions of more than 100 sprinklers as well as for modifications of the main distribution network or of the sprinkler equipment room of existing installations. Notifications are also required for all substantial renewals or modifications of the pipework, e.g. after inspections of old installations (see Requirement Notification of installation VdS 2132). Note: Details in accordance with Annex Z shall be provided.

4

Extent of sprinkler protection

4.1

Scope of protection and exceptions

All areas of a building as well as of the communicating buildings shall be sprinkler protected, except in the cases indicated in Cl. 4.1.1. Any openings communicating between a sprinklered and an unsprinklered building or section shall be closed automatically in the event of fire to provide a fire resistance which is at least equivalent to the required fire resistance of the section to be separated.

4.1.1

Permitted exceptions within a building

On principle, sprinkler protection shall be considered in the following cases, but may be omitted after due consideration of the fire load in the following cases: a) washrooms and toilets (but excluding cloakrooms) which are made of non-combustible materials and which are not used to store combustible materials. The closures of door openings between protected and unprotected areas are not subject to any requirements as far as the permitted exceptions of this subclause are concerned; b) staircases and escape routes with fire-resistant and non-combustible separation from the protected area, containing no combustible material. Door openings between protected and unprotected areas shall have at least smoke-proof and self-closing or fireretardant closures; c) vertical shafts (e.g. lifts) with fire-resistant and non-combustible separation from the protection area, containing no combustible material. Door openings between sprinklered and unsprinklered areas shall have at least fire-resistant closures; d) rooms protected by other automatic extinguishing systems, (e.g. gas, powder extinguishing systems), designed and installed in accordance with VdS Guidelines; e) ceiling areas above the wet end of paper machines. Any levels underneath and adjacent areas with cable trays, hydraulic pumps and other technical equipment are not considered as wet end and shall be included in the technical fire protection. Consultation with VdS is required; f) cloakrooms which are made of non-combustible materials, in which clothes are kept in metal sheet lockers only and which are not used to store combustible materials. The closures of door openings between protected and unprotected areas are not subject to any requirements as far as the permitted exceptions of this subclause are concerned;

30

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


g) rooms with a surface area of up to 20 m², solely containing telecommunication equipment; h) rooms with fire-resistant and non-combustible separation from the protected area, in which wet process works are carried out, however, only by agreement with VdS Inspection Services. Door openings between sprinklered and unsprinklered areas shall have at least fire-resistant closures; i) technical operating rooms with fire-resistant and non-combustible separation from the protected area (e.g. ventilation control room, heating room, refrigerating machinery room, lift machinery room, distribution station for water and steam, fuel oil storage room) with a surface area of up to 150 m². Door openings between protected and unprotected areas shall have at least fire-retardant closures; j) 1. cold areas ≤ 20 m²: The structural separation of cold areas with temperatures below 0°C from the protected area are not subject to any requirements for fire resistance and combustibility of the separation materials, as far as the permitted exceptions of this subclause are concerned, provided that the surface area does not exceed 20 m². 2. cold areas > 20 m² and ≤ 60 m²: The structural separation of cold areas with temperatures below 0°C and a surface area above 20 m² but not exceeding 60 m² shall have fire-resistant and noncombustible separation from the protected area. The door openings between sprinklered and non-sprinklered areas shall have at least fire-retardant closures; k) offices and dwellings with a surface area of up to 150 m² with fire-resistant and noncombustible separation from the protected area; door openings between protected and unprotected areas shall have at least fire-resistant closures; l) crawl spaces without any combustible contents, separated from the protected area by non-combustible materials; m) ramps, canopies and roofings made of non-combustible building materials at fire break walls (see VdS 2234), door/gate openings between protected and unprotected areas shall have at least fire-resistant closures; n) false ceiling spaces and false floor spaces < 0,8 m (see Cl. 5.4) which are not separated by non-combustible materials and in which the false ceilings and floors themselves are made of non-combustible materials; provided that in these areas no materials of high flammability are available, and the fire load of materials of low flammability (e.g. cables, insulating material) does not exceed 12,6 MJ/m² (3,5 kWh/m²); in areas of high cable concentration the fire load per 4 m x 4 m shall not exceed 335 MJ (93,1kWh). It is important to ensure that the fastening of the false ceiling construction is resistant enough, and that any penetrations to (vertical) cable ducts are sealed with noncombustible materials. The same applies to false ceiling spaces such as described above, however with a false ceiling made of combustible materials, provided that this ceiling is separated from the intermediate space at least by a highly fire-retardant separation. If false ceiling and false floor spaces less than 300 mm high do not comply with the a.m. conditions, they shall be divided into fields of less than 100 m² by means of fire-retardant components made of non-combustible materials. Note: The fire load of cables shall be calculated in accordance with Annex S. o) electrical operating rooms (e.g. low voltage and high voltage cabling, transformer cells, battery room, backup power generator room, relay room for telephone switchboard) with a surface area of up to 60 m² and fire-resistant and non-combustible separation from the protected area. Door openings between protected and unprotected areas shall have at least fire-retardant closures. The backup power generator of the emergency power supply of the sprinkler system may be positioned in the electrical operating room.

31


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Note: The permitted exceptions from sprinkler protection are subject to the fact that it may be sensible to sprinkler protect these rooms for risk minimisation purposes. Especially if these rooms are of prime importance for operating procedures (see e.g. i) and o)), appropriate protection measures should be taken.

4.1.2

Necessary exceptions from sprinkler protection

Sprinkler protection shall not be provided in the following areas of a building or plant: a) silos or bins containing substances which expand on contact with water; b) in the vicinity of industrial furnaces or kilns, salt baths, smelting ladles or similar equipment if the hazard would be increased by the use of water in extinguishing a fire; c) areas, rooms or places where the water discharged from a sprinkler might present a hazard; d) in the vicinity of tiltable frying pans, deep fryers and similar equipment, if the hazard would be increased by the use of water in extinguishing a fire. In these cases, other automatic extinguishing systems (e.g. gas, powder or water spray systems) shall be considered, designed and installed in accordance with VdS Guidelines.

4.2

Compartmentation and separation

Compartmentation and separation between combustible materials stored in the open air and in sprinklered buildings shall be at least in accordance with national regulations. Areas with sprinkler systems or equivalent VdS-approved automatic fire extinguishing systems shall be separated from other areas by spatial (at least 5 m) or structural compartmentation (spatial separation and fire break walls and complex separation walls in accordance with VdS 2234 “Fire break walls and complex separation walls – leaflet for arrangement and design”). Openings in structural compartmentations shall have closures in accordance with VdS 2234. Note: Equivalent in the a.m. sense are water spray systems that fully comply with the appropriate VdS Guidelines. Inert gas fire extinguishing systems may also be considered equivalent if they are designed in accordance with the appropriate VdS Guidelines. If sprinkler systems with areas of different design density are not separated at least by fire-retardant and non-combustible materials with fire-retardant closures, two sprinkler rows minimum of higher design density shall extend into the area of lower design density. This does not apply to platforms, operational equipment and offices, in which the systems shall be designed according to the fire hazard. Horizontal separations (ceilings and roofs) are not considered in this context.

5

Classification of fire hazards

5.1

General

The hazard class to which the sprinkler system is to be designed shall be determined before starting on the design work. The buildings and areas to be protected by automatic sprinkler systems shall be classified as Light Hazard (LH), Ordinary Hazard (OH) or High Hazard (HH).

32

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


This classification depends on the occupancy and the fire load and shall be in accordance with Annexes A to C.

5.2

Hazard classes

Buildings or areas to be protected which contain one or more of the following occupancies and fire hazards shall be classified as belonging to one of the following hazard classes:

5.2.1

Light Hazard (LH)

Hazard class LH covers non-industrial occupancies with low fire loads and combustibility in which no single area, that is not at least enclosed by fire-retardant materials, is greater than 126 m².

5.2.2

Ordinary Hazard (OH)

Hazard class OH covers trading and industrial occupancies where combustible materials with a medium fire load and medium combustibility are processed or manufactured. Ordinary Hazard OH is sub-divided into 4 groups: −

OH1, Ordinary Hazard Group 1;

−


−


−

OH4, Ordinary Hazard Group 4.

Materials may be stored in occupancies classified as OH1, 2 and 3 provided that the following conditions are met: a) the protection throughout the room shall be designed to at least OH3; b) the maximum storage heights shown in Table 5.01 shall not be exceeded; c) blocks of storage including surrounding aisles shall not exceed 216m² or an area specified by VdS. Blocks of storage shall be separated by aisles all around. The aisles shall be kept free of storage. When the process area is classified as OH4, storage areas shall be treated as HHS. Note: Storage means that in the process area goods are stored in an area of more than 2 m² und/or over a height of more than 1,2 m. Note: For the storage of materials according to category I or II in OH4 hazards the design according to HHS may be based on the actual storage height and not the maximum permitted storage height acc. Table 6.02, provided that the ceiling height does not exceed 12 m.

33


Storage category

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Maximum storage height

Width of aisles

(m)

(m)

Free standing or block storage (ST1)1)

All other cases

I

4,0

3,5

2,0

II

3,0

2,6

2,0

III

2,1

1,7

2,0

IV

1,2

1,2

2,0

Note: For storage heights exceeding these values, see Cl. 5.2.4. 1)

Also applicable for storage ST4 – ST6 with blocks of up to 50m²

Table 5.01: Maximum storage heights for OH3

5.2.3

High Hazard, Process (HHP)

Hazard class HHP covers trading and industrial occupancies where the materials concerned have a high fire load and high combustibility and are capable of developing a quickly spreading or intense fire. Hazard class HHP is sub-divided into 4 groups: −

HHP1, High Hazard Process Group 1;

−


−


−

HHP4, High Hazard Process Group 4.

Note: If goods are stored, the storage heights shall be in accordance with the design density (see Table 6.02) and the block sizes shall be adhered to.

5.2.4

High Hazard, Storage (HHS)

Hazard class HHS covers the storage of goods where the height of storage exceeds the limits given in 5.2.2. Hazard class HHS, is sub-divided into 4 categories: −

HHS1, High Hazard Storage Category I;

−

HHS2, High Hazard Storage Category II;

−

HHS3, High Hazard Storage Category III;

−

HHS4, High Hazard Storage Category IV.

5.3 5.3.1

Storage General

The overall fire hazard of stored goods is a function of the combustibility of the materials being stored, including their packaging, and of the storage configuration. To determine the required design criteria for stored goods the procedure shown in Figure 5.01 shall be followed. Note: Where large scale fire test data is available, it may be appropriate to use such data to establish design criteria.

34

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


Figure 5.01: Flow chart for determining the class required for storage

5.3.2

Storage Methods

Methods of storing goods are classified as follows: −

ST1: free standing or block stacking;

−

ST2: post or box pallets in single rows (i.e. with aisles no less than 2,4 m wide);

−

ST3: post or box pallets in multiple (including double) rows;

−

ST4: palletised rack;

−

ST5: solid or slatted shelves 1 m or less wide;

−

ST6: solid or slatted shelves over lm and not more than 6 m wide.

Typical examples of storage methods are given in Figure 5.02. Note: For each storage method, there are specific limitations to storage heights depending on the type and design of sprinkler systems (see Cl. 6.2).

Figure 5.02: Types of storage methods

35


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

In order for sprinkler protection to be effective, the limitations and protection requirements of Table 5.02 shall be met. Configuration Limitations

Protection requirements in addition to sprinklers at ceiling or roof

ST1

Storage shall be confined to blocks None not exceeding 150 m2 in plan area2)

ST2

Aisle between rows shall be not less than 2,4 m wide

ST3

Storage shall be confined to blocks None not exceeding 150 m2 in plan area2)

ST4

Aisle separating rows shall be not less than 1,2 m wide.

Intermediate sprinklers are recommended1)

Aisle separating rows shall be less than 1,2 m wide.

Intermediate sprinklers are required

None

ST5

1) Either the aisle separating rows Intermediate sprinklers are recommended shall be not less than 1,2 m wide or storage blocks shall be not more 2 2) than 150 m in plan area

ST6

Either the aisle separating rows shall be not less than 1,2 m wide or storage blocks shall be not more 2 2) than 150 m in plan area

1) 2)

Intermediate sprinklers are required or, if this is impossible, continuous noncombustible full height vertical bulkheads fitted longitudinally and transversally within each shelf.

When the ceiling clearance is greater than 4 m, in-rack sprinklers shall be used. Storage blocks shall be separated by aisles not less than 2,4 m wide.

Table 5.02: Limitations and protection requirements for different storage methods

5.4

Protection of false ceiling and false floor spaces

If the height of the false ceiling or false floor space exceeds 0,8 m, measured between the underside of the roof and the top of the suspended ceiling or between the floor and the underside of the raised floor, these spaces shall be sprinkler protected. If the height of the concealed space at roof and floor is between 0,3 and 0,8 m, the spaces shall be sprinkler protected only if they contain combustible materials (see 4.1.1n) or are constructed with combustible materials. If the height of the concealed space at roof and floor is not greater than 0,3 m, no sprinkler protection is required. Electrical cables with low load for lighting and wall sockets are permitted (see 4.1.1). The protection in the concealed space shall be to LH when the main hazard class is LH, and OH1 in all other cases. See 15.3 for the pipework arrangement.

6

Hydraulic design criteria

6.1

General

The design density shall be not less than the appropriate value given in this clause when all the ceiling or roof sprinklers or all the sprinklers in the area of operation, whichever is the fewer, plus any in-rack sprinklers and supplementary sprinklers, are in operation. The minimum requirements for design density and area of operation for LH, OH and HHP classes are given in Table 6.01. For HHS systems, 6.2 shall be applied.

36

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


Areas of different densities in open communication shall be separated by a zone of at least 2 sprinkler rows wide of the higher density extending into the designed area of lower density. If racks with sprinklers at intermediate levels are located in the overlap area, the increased design density shall be considered when dimensioning the ceiling pipework, but not when designing the water supply. All systems shall be fully calculated. Thus, no details regarding pre-calculated systems are given. Hazard class

Design density (minimum)

Wet or pre-action

mm/min

Dry or alternate

Area of operation in m²

LH

2,25

84

not allowed - use OH1

OH1

5,0

72

90

OH2

5,0

144

180

OH3

5,0

216

270

OH4

5,0

360

not allowed - use HHP1

HHP1

7,5

260

325

HHP2

10,0

260

325

HHP3

12,5

260

325

HHP4

Special consideration required

Table 6.01: Design density and area of operation for hazard classes LH, OH and HHP

6.2

High Hazard Storage - HHS

6.2.1

General

The type of protection and determination of the design density and area of operation are dependent on the combustibility of the product (or mix of products) and its packaging (including the pallet) and the method and height of storage. Specific limitations apply to the various types of storage methods as detailed in Clause 5.

6.2.2

Ceiling or roof protection only

Table 6.02 specifies the appropriate design density and area of operation according to the category and maximum permitted storage height for the various types of storages with roof or ceiling protection only. More specifically, the storage heights indicated in the table are considered the maximum for efficient sprinkler protection where sprinklers are only provided at the roof or ceiling. The distance between the maximum permitted storage height and the roof or ceiling sprinklers should not exceed 4 m. Storage heights exceeding these limits require that intermediate levels of in-rack sprinklers be provided as per 6.2.3 below. Note: Storage height, building height and ceiling clearance (the vertical distance between the roof or ceiling sprinklers and the top of the storage) are all significant variables contributing to the effectiveness and required design density of sprinkler protection. If in the case of an exceeded maximum storage height the distance between maximum permitted storage height and ceiling is > 4 m, this may be compensated by a design

37


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

density increased by 2,5 mm/min. From a distance of 5 m an increase by 1mm/min per each further metre or part thereof is sufficient. The area of operation remains unchanged. Storage methods

Category I (HHS1)

Category II (HHS2)

Category III Category IV (HHS3) (HHS4)

Minimum design density

Area of operation (wet or pre-action system) 2)

mm/min

m2

Maximum permitted storage height1) m ST1

5,3

4,1

2,9

1,6

7,5

free standing

6,5

5,0

3,5

2,0

10,0

or block stacking

7,6

5,9

4,1

2,3

12,5

-

6,7

4,7

2,7

15,0

-

7,5

5,2

3,0

17,5

-

-

5,7

3,3

20,0

-

-

6,3

3,6

22,5

-

-

6,7

3,8

25,0

-

-

7,2

4,1

27,5

-

-

-

4,4

30,0

ST2

4,7

3,4

2,2

1,6

7,5

post pallets in single rows

5,7

4,2

2,6

2,0

10,0

6,8

5,0

3,2

2,3

12,5

and ST4

-

5,6

3,7

2,7

15,0

-

6,0

4,1

3,0

17,5

-

-

4,4

3,3

20,0

-

-

4,7

3,6

22,5

-

-

5,3

3,8

25,0

5,7

4,1

27,5

6,0

4,4

30,0

palletised racks

ST3 post or box pallets in multiple rows and ST5/ST6 solid or slatted shelves

4,7

3,4

2,2

1,6

7,5

5,7

4,2

2,6

2,0

10,0

-

5,0

3,2

2,3

12,5

-

-

-

2,7

15,0

-

-

-

3,0

17,5

260

300

260

300

260

1) The vertical distance from the floor to the sprinkler deflectors, minus 1m or the highest value shown in the table, whichever is the lower. The design shall be in accordance with the theoretical storage height, not the actual one. Instead of the theoretical storage height the actual storage height may be taken as basis for designing the system. For this purpose technical or organisational measures shall be taken to ensure that the storage height is adequate and the distance between maximum permitted storage height and roof or ceiling does not exceed 4 m. 2) Dry and alternate systems should be avoided on High Hazard storages especially with the more combustible products (the higher categories) and the higher storages. Should it nonetheless be necessary to install a dry or alternate system, the area of operation shall be increased by 25%. Note: An interpolation of the values is possible.

Table 6.02: Design criteria with roof or ceiling protection only

38

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


Design density acc. Tables 6.02 resp. 6.03 Example: Distance 3,9m Design density = 7,5mm/min

floor

Design density plus 2,5mm/min Example: Distance 4,9m D. d. = 7,5 + 2,5 = 10mm/min

storage height

floor

storage height

storage height

ceiling/roof

floor

Design density plus 2,5 + n x 1mm/min Example: Distance 7,9m D. d. = 7,5 + 2,5 + 3 x 1 = 13mm/min

Figure 6.01: Increase of design density with high ceilings or roofs

6.2.3

Intermediate level in-rack sprinklers

6.2.3.1 Where more than 50 intermediate level sprinklers are installed in the racks, roof or ceiling sprinklers shall be installed with a separate set of alarm valves. 6.2.3.2 The design density for the roof or ceiling sprinklers shall be a minimum of 7,5 mm/min over an area of operation of 260 m². If goods are stored above the highest level of intermediate protection, the design criteria for the roof or ceiling sprinklers shall be taken from Table 6.03. If the rack protection is designed in accordance with Cl. 11.6, then Cl. 6.2.3.2 will not apply. 6.2.3.3 It shall be assumed that 3 adjoining heads are operating simultaneously on each level of in-rack sprinklers, up to a maximum of three levels, at the most hydraulically remote position. Where rack aisles are no less than 2,4 m in width only one rack need be assumed to be involved. Where rack aisles are less than 2,4 m but no less than 1,2 m in width, two racks shall be assumed to be involved. Where rack aisles are less than 1,2 m in width, three racks shall be assumed to be involved. If the rack protection is designed in accordance with Cl. 11.6, Cl. 6.2.3.3 will not apply. Details for the hydraulic design of the system are specified in Cl. 11.6. Note: In racks with more than one sprinkler row per level a maximum of three adjoining sprinkler rows with three sprinklers each shall be considered.

39


Storage methods

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Category

Category

Category

Category

I (HHS1)

II (HHS2)

III (HHS3)

IV (HHS4)

Maximum permitted storage height above topmost level 1) of rack sprinklers m


Area of operation (wet or pre-action system) 2)

mm/min

m²

ST4

3,5

3,5

2,2

1,6

7,5

260

Pallet rack storage

-

-

2,6

2,0

10,0

260

-

-

3,2

2,3

12,5

260

-

-

3,5

2,7

15,0

260

ST5 and ST6

4,7

3,4

2,2

1,6

7,5

260

solid or

5,7

4,2

2,6

2,0

10,0

260

slatted

-

5,0

3,2

2,3

12,5

260

shelves

-

-

-

2,7

15,0

260

-

-

-

3,0

17,5

260

1) Vertical distance between the topmost rack sprinkler level and the roof or ceiling sprinklers minus 1m. Instead of the theoretical storage height the effective storage height may be used. This implies compliance with the required storage height and with the permitted distance between permitted storage height and roof or ceiling (≤ 4 m). 2) Dry or alternate systems should not be used with high hazard storage, especially with combustible products of higher categories and greater storage heights. Where dry or alternate systems have to be installed nonetheless, the area of operation shall be increased by 25%.

Table 6.03: Design criteria for ceiling sprinklers with in-rack protection

6.3

Pressure and flow requirements for pre-calculated systems


6.4

Pipe sizing and layout

6.4.1

Pipe sizing

Pipe sizes shall be determined in accordance with Annex G. −

All pipe sizes shall be determined by hydraulic calculation using the method shown in G.1 and G.3;

−


6.4.2

Maximum system pressure

Sprinkler systems shall be designed in such a way as to ensure that sprinkler heads are never subjected to a pressure in excess of 12 bar except during pressure testing of the pipework, see Cl. 17. Note: The components shall be selected such that they are appropriate for the maximum system pressure.

40

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


7

Water Supplies - General

7.1

Suitability

7.1.1

Time of operation

Water supplies shall be capable of furnishing automatically at least the requisite pressure/flow conditions of the system. Except as specified in the case of pressure tanks, each water supply shall have a minimum water volume for the following minimum durations: −

LH

30 min

−

OH

60 min

−

HHP

90 min

−

HHS

90 min

Deviating from this, the operating times of 11.6 and Annex K apply to systems installed in accordance with these specifications in consideration of the respective requirements. Note 1: In the case of public water mains and inexhaustible sources the duration is implicit in the requirements given in these Guidelines. A water supply shall not be affected by possible frost conditions or drought or flooding or any other conditions that could reduce the flow or effective capacity or render the supply inoperative. All practical steps shall be taken to ensure the continuity and reliability of water supplies. Note 2: Water supplies should preferably be under the control of the operator, or else the reliability and right of use should be guaranteed by the organisation having control. The water shall be free from fibrous or other matter in suspension liable to cause accumulations in the system piping. Salt or brackish water shall not be retained in sprinkler installation pipework. Note 3: Where there is no suitable fresh water source available, a salt or brackish water supply may be used provided the installation is normally charged with fresh water.

The water supply shall have the following minimum operating times: −

OH

40 min

−

HHP

60 min

−

HHS1

60 min

Moreover, it is possible to reduce the operating time for specific risks which fulfil the requirements specified in Cl. 11.6 and Annex K. The sprinkler system shall have fire department supply connections. The supply pipe shall be DN 100 with a minimum of two ‘B’ hose connections and one self-closing drain valve. To avoid an extraction of water from the sprinkler system, the supply pipe shall be fitted with a non-return valve. For maintenance of the non-return valve a shut-off device shall also be fitted. In the case of a direct connection to the public water mains, an authorisation by the water supply company is required.

41


7.1.2

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Frost protection

The alarm valve station and the feed pipe shall be maintained at a minimum temperature of 4°C.

7.2

Connections for other services

7.2.1

Connection of wall hydrants

In high rise buildings the connection of wall hydrants to sprinkler systems is not permitted. Wall hydrants may be connected to the water supply of the sprinkler system, provided that all of the following conditions are met: a) the planning principles of DIN 14462 “Water conduit for fire extinguishing – Planning and installation of fire hose systems and pillar fire hydrant and underground fire systems” are met; b) a hydraulic calculation of the additional water demand of the wall hydrants has been done; Unless specified otherwise by the authorities or in the fire protection concept, the following flow rates shall be considered hydraulically for wall hydrants at the connection point of the pipework: –

200 l/min per wall hydrant type F with one ‘C’ connection each, but not more than 600 l/min; or

–

100 l/min per wall hydrant type S with one hose connection valve G 1A each in accordance with DIN 14461-3 and rigid hose, but not more than 300 l/min;

c) the operating time of wall hydrants shall be independent of the operating time of the sprinkler system in accordance with DIN 14462. The water quantity shall be available in addition to the water supply of the sprinkler system. The extinguishing water quantity to be available for the hydrant system can be agreed with the competent fire protection authorities or with the issuer of the fire protection concept, as regards the simultaneousness of both systems; d) upon commissioning of the wall hydrant system it shall be ensured that automatic alarms and fault warnings are released via a fire detection system. The type of signal is specified by the operator of the system; e) the water for the wall hydrant pipework is preferably taken upstream of the alarm valve stations through a stop valve located as close as is practical to the point of connection to the water supply of the sprinkler system. If wall hydrants are to be connected downstream of the alarm valve stations, this is permitted only provided that: –

the competent fire protection authorities, the insurer and the operator of the system agree in writing; and

–

the water is preferably taken from the inexhaustible water source.

The water may be taken from the exhaustible water source, provided that:

42

–

only interior hydrants type S are connected with one hose connection valve G1A each in accordance with DIN 14461-3, rigid hose and a maximum flow demand of 100 l/min; and

–

the exhaustible water source is refilled automatically;

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

–


the refill for elevated tanks and pressure tanks (tank filling pump) is designed such that the extraction by a consumer is ensured at all times as regards pressure and flow.

7.2.2 Connection of pillar and ground hydrants In high rise buildings the connection of pillar or ground hydrants to sprinkler systems is not permitted. Water for pillar or ground hydrants may be taken from the sprinkler system, provided that all of the following conditions are met: a) b) c)

the water shall not be taken from the exhaustible water source; extraction is upstream of the alarm valve station through a stop valve located as close as is practical to the point of connection to the water supply of the sprinkler system; c1 – a combined water supply in accordance with 8.6.4 is provided; c2 – Class 1: at least a water supply type 3 is provided with two or more pumps with independent power supplies (the requirements in accordance with 8.6.4 a to d shall be met).

Pillar or ground hydrants shall be considered hydraulically at the connection point of the pipework with the following flow rates: –

where available, in accordance with the requirements of the authorities; or

–

with 1200 l/min per pillar or ground hydrant with two ‘B’ connections each, but not more than 3600 l/min; or

–

with 200 l/min per pillar or ground hydrant with one ‘C’ connection each, but not more than 600 l/min.

Pillar or ground hydrants connected on the premises of the operator to the supply line of the sprinkler system shall also be considered as specified above. Unless specified otherwise by the authorities or in the fire protection concept, the operating time of the pillar or ground hydrants shall be 120 min. The water quantity required for the pillar or ground hydrants shall be available in addition to the water supply of the sprinkler system.

7.3

Housing of equipment for water supplies

Water supply equipment, such as pumps, pressure tanks and gravity tanks, shall not be housed in buildings or sections of premises in which there are hazardous processes or explosion hazards. If sprinkler pumps, alarm valves, compressors or pressure tanks are housed in rooms other than the pump rooms, they shall be protected from unauthorised access, mechanical damage and fire risk. In the case of fire, safe access shall be ensured. Note: In production risks with alarm valves located outside the sprinkler equipment room, appropriate measures shall be taken to prevent unauthorised access (e.g. wire frame). Alarm valve stations outside the sprinkler equipment room shall always be located at a building wall, not more than 10 m from the nearest emergency exit. Access and operation shall be possible even in the case of fire. This regulation is applicable for higher risks (e.g. warehouses), only if the main valve can be operated from the outside (through the building wall).

43


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

If the storage height exceeds 7,5 m in category HHS1 to HHS3, and 4,4 m in HHS4, the alarm valve stations shall also be installed with fire-retardant separation minimum.

7.4

Test facility devices

Sprinkler installations shall be permanently provided with suitable devices for measuring pressure and flow for checking compliance with Clauses 6 and 9. Note: It is sufficient to have a flow measuring device at hand. For protecting the flow measuring device it may be appropriate not to have it permanently installed into the system. The test pipe of water pipework and gravity tanks shall be dimensioned for the water rate, and in the case of sprinkler pumps it shall be dimensioned for the 1,2-fold water rate. The maximum flow velocity shall not exceed 12 m/s. In the measuring section including calming sections the velocity shall not exceed 6 m/s. To restrict the volumetric flow, no shut-off valves shall be used. Downstream of the measuring section the water flow shall be regulated by a shut-off valve. A manometer shall be fitted upstream of the test pipe outlet inside the feed pipe. Manometer and flow measuring device shall be readable from the same spot. Upstream of the measuring equipment a straight calming section shall be fitted, the length of which is at least 10 times the pipe diameter, followed by a section which is at least 5 times the pipe diameter. The pipe diameter of the calming section shall correspond to the nominal width of the measuring equipment.

7.4.1

Measuring equipment at alarm valve stations

A flow measuring device shall be installed at each alarm valve station except in the following cases: a) where two or more alarm valve stations are installed together, the device need be installed only at the hydraulically most remote station, or, when the installations belong to different hazard classes, at the alarm valve station which requires the highest water flow; b) where the water supply is by an automatic pump or pumps, the flow measuring device may be installed at the pumphouse. In all cases, the appropriate allowance must be made for the pressure losses between the water source and the alarm valve station(s) using the calculation methods specified in G.1. Adequate facilities shall be provided for the disposal of test water. Note 1: Dry or alternate alarm valve stations (main or subsidiary) may have an additional flow test valve arrangement of unspecified flow loss characteristic fitted below the alarm valve station, downstream of the main stop valve, to facilitate informal supply pressure testing. Such flow test valves and pipework should have a nominal diameter of DN 40 for LH installations and of DN 50 for other installations. Note 2: Regarding flow measurement in pump systems see Clause 7.1 .

7.4.2

Measuring equipment at water supplies

At least one suitable flow and pressure measuring arrangement shall be permanently installed and shall be capable of checking each water supply. Note: If the flow measuring device is in danger of being polluted, the measuring device can be removed, but shall be available on site at all times.

44

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


The testing apparatus shall be of adequate capacity and shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Care shall be taken with the distance from valves and fittings. The apparatus shall be installed in a frost-proof area.

7.5

Pressure/flow tests on water supplies

The water supply shall be testable at least at Qmax/n of the system, with Qmax being the maximum flow demand and n the number of pumps operating in parallel. In any case it shall be possible to test the nominal delivery rate of the pumps (100%). A test pipe can be used for testing several pumps, provided that the pumps do not influence each other when connected to one test pipe. For this purpose, slide valves or check valves shall be fitted for each pump. The emergency circulation flow shall be granted.

7.6

Water supply pressure test

7.6.1

General

Use the test facility specified in Clause 7.4. Test each supply to the installation independently with all other supplies isolated.

7.6.2

Storage pump and pressure tank supplies

The hydraulics of all installations shall be fully calculated. Fully open the stop valves controlling the flow from the supply to the installation. Open the installation drain and test valve and check that the pump(s), if fitted, start automatically. Check that the flow is as specified in Clause 6 and as recorded during the commissioning test. Record the supply pressure measured on the ‘C’ gauge. Compare this with the appropriate value specified in Clause 6 and the value recorded during the commissioning test. Alternatively the measurement may be in accordance with Clause 7.4.

7.6.3

Public water mains, booster pump, elevated private reservoir and gravity tank

Fully open the stop valves controlling the flow from the supply to the installation. Open the installation drain and test valve and check that the pump(s), if installed, start automatically. Manipulate the drain and test valve to give the appropriate flow specified in Clause 6. When the flow is steady record the supply pressure measured on the ‘C’ gauge. Compare this with the appropriate value specified in Clause 6 and the value recorded during the commissioning test. Note: Measuring and test equipment acc. Clause 7.4 is sufficient.

45


8

Choice of water supply

8.1

General

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Water supplies shall be one or more of the following: a) public water mains (see 8.2); b) water storage tanks (see 8.3); c) inexhaustible sources (see 8.4); d) pressure tanks (see 8.5).

8.2

Public water mains

8.2.1

General

The public water mains shall be capable of satisfying the requirements for pressure, flow and duration. Note: It may be necessary to take into account extra flow required for fire brigade purposes. Sprinkler systems shall not be supplied immediately from the public drinking water mains, unless this is the only water source available. If the sprinkler system has further water sources, e.g. pressure tank or pump system with tank, the sprinkler system shall be connected indirectly. Sprinkler systems shall not be supplied immediately from the public drinking water mains, unless no other type of fire extinguishing system, e.g. wall hydrant system, is connected to the water supply. Sprinkler systems shall not be supplied immediately from the public drinking water mains, unless no additives, e.g. foaming agents or anti-freezing agents are proportioned. In case of an immediate connection to the public water mains, the local water authority shall agree. A VdS-approved safety component with a DVGW quality mark (German Technical and Scientific Association for Gas and Water) shall be used. Consideration shall be given to fitting strainers on all connections from public water mains. In the case of single water supplies, consideration shall be given to the installation of a pressure switch on the supply connection which shall operate an alarm system when the pressure in the supply drops to a predetermined value. The switch shall be positioned on the supply side of any back pressure valve and shall be equipped with a test valve. If a filter is fitted in the supply of the public water mains downstream of the water meter, there is a risk of not providing the required water rate in the case of contaminations. Therefore, the outlet for the sprinkler system shall be located upstream of the filter. Note: A possible impairment of the installation’s functionality caused by a filter may be prevented by means of a bypass, an outlet to the sprinkler system upstream of the filter, or full storage.

46

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

8.3

Water storage tanks

8.3.1

General


Water storage tanks, where used, shall be one or more of the following: −

water storage tank;

−

gravity tank;

−

reservoir.

Tanks shall be fitted with a fill level or water level indicator that is easily readable. The target water level shall be marked. This is not necessary with open, easily accessible tanks, the water level of which can be determined by visual inspection. Each tank shall be fitted with an overflow in accordance with DIN 1988. The accumulating water quantity shall be safely discharged. To ensure the system’s functionality during inspection and maintenance works, the draining connection of the tank shall be dimensioned such that short interruption periods are possible. Not less than 15 m³/h of water shall be drainable, or else it shall be possible to lower the water level to not less than 50 cm below the relieved float valves or appropriate feed valves. The draining connection shall be fitted with a secured shut-off valve. If the tank is to be drained by means of the sprinkler pump, the non-return valve in the fire department supply pipe of DN 50 maximum nominal width, fitted with a shut-off valve secured by strap and lock, may be bypassed.

8.3.2

Minimum water volume

For each system a minimum water volume is specified. This shall be supplied from one or several of the following: −

a water storage tank, with an effective capacity at least equal to the specified water volume;

−

a reduced capacity tank (see Cl. 8.3.4), where the required minimum water volume is supplied jointly by the effective capacity of the tank plus the automatic infill.

The effective capacity of a tank shall be calculated by taking the difference between the normal water level and the lowest effective water level. If the tank is not frost proof, the normal water level shall be increased by 1,0 m and ice venting provided. In the case of enclosed tanks, easy access shall be provided. Tanks fitted with a ceiling shall have an access opening with an inner width of 600 mm minimum. No contaminations due to rain, dust, etc. shall be able to enter the tank via the access openings. Access openings of underground tanks located on green spaces and impassable areas shall rise at least 250 mm above the ground line. Fixed appliances for inspecting the tank, such as ladders, shall be fitted. Tanks located in buildings shall have a distance of at least 400 mm between tank wall and room walls, and at least 500 mm to the room ceiling. For sprinkler systems class 1 only frost-proof tanks are permitted. The extinguishing water shall be kept ice-free at all times. In the case of underground tanks a cover including tank ceiling of 80 cm is sufficient. If in special cases a heating is required, the details shall be agreed with the competent authorities. The use of anti-freezing agents is not permitted.

47


8.3.2.1

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Pre-calculated systems

The hydraulics of all systems shall be fully calculated. Specifications on pre-calculated systems do not apply. 8.3.2.2

Calculated systems

The minimum water volume shall be calculated by multiplying the maximum demand flow by the following operating times: −

LH

30 min

−

OH

60 min

−

HH

90 min

The minimum water volumes for sprinkler systems class 1 shall be calculated by multiplying the maximum demand flow by the following operating times: −

OH

40 min

−

HHP

60 min

−

HHS1

60 min

and in the case of specific risks the specifications of Clause 11.6 and Annex K shall be fulfilled.

8.3.3

Refill rates for water storage tanks

The water source shall be capable of refilling the tank in no more than 36 hours. The outlet of any feed pipe shall be situated at least 2,0 m away from the pump inlet, measured horizontally. Note: See Clause 8.3.4 for the arrangement of water supply and pump test pipe.

8.3.4

Reduced capacity tanks

The following conditions shall be met for reduced capacity tanks: a) the inflow shall be from a public water mains and shall be automatic, via at least two mechanical float valves; b) the effective capacity of the tank shall be no less than that shown in Tables 8.01; c) the tank capacity plus the inflow shall be sufficient to supply the system at full capacity as specified in 8.3.2; d) it shall be possible to check capacity of the inflow; e) the inflow arrangement shall be accessible for inspection. f) the functioning of the feed valves shall only depend on the water pressure in the supply pipe, but not on any other power source. The supply pipe and the pump test pipe shall be arranged such that the inflowing water does not drive any air towards the suction pipe connection, and that the floaters of the float valves are positioned in a calming section. This may be achieved by arranging the supply pipe and the test pipe on the side opposite to the suction pipe connection within a settling chamber, according to Figure 8.01.

48

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


In the case of tanks set up in rooms excessive condensation water shall be avoided by appropriate ventilation resp. heating.

≥ 300mm 4 3 150 - 200

5

4

3

1

2

1 float valve 2 drainage 3 pump suction pipe 4 overflow 5 pump test pipe

Figure 8.01: Reduced capacity tank

Hazard Class

Minimum capacity m3

LH - Wet or pre-action

5

OH1 - Wet or pre-action

10

OH1 - Dry or alternate

20

OH2 - Wet or pre-action OH2 - Dry or alternate

30

OH3 - Wet or pre-action OH3 - Dry or alternate

50

OH4 - Wet or pre-action HHP and HHS

70 but in no case less than 10% of the full capacity

Table 8.01: Minimum capacity of reduced capacity tanks

49


8.3.5

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Effective capacity of tanks and dimensions of suction chambers

The effective capacity of storage tanks shall be calculated as shown in Figure 8.02, where: −

N is the normal water line;

−

X is the lowest water level;

−

D is the nominal diameter of the suction pipe. Nominal diameter of suction pipe ’D’

Distance ’A’ minimum

Distance ‘B’ minimum

Minimum dimension of vortex inhibitor

mm

m

m

m

65

0,25

0,08

0,20 x 0,20

80

0,31

0,08

0,20 x 0,20

100

0,37

0,10

0,40 x 0,40

150

0,50

0,10

0,60 x 0,60

200

0,62

0,15

0,80 x 0,80

250

0,75

0,15

1,00 x 1,00

300

0,90

0,20

1,20 x 1,20

400

1,05

0,20

1,20 x 1,20

500

1,20

0,20

1,20 x 1,20

Table 8.02: Suction pipe inlet clearances Table 8.02 specifies minimum dimensions for the following: −

‘A’ from the suction pipe to the lowest water level (see Figure 8.02) ;

−

‘B’ from the suction pipe to the bottom of the sump (see Figure 8.02).

If a vortex inhibitor is installed with the minimum dimensions specified in Table 8.02, Dimension ‘A’ may be reduced to 0,10 m.

50

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


Figure 8.02: Effective capacity of suction tanks and dimensions of suction chambers

51


8.3.6

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Strainers

In the case of pumps under suction lift conditions, a strainer shall be fitted upstream of the back pressure valve on the pump suction pipe. It shall be fitted so that it can be cleaned without the tank having to be emptied. In the case of open tanks feeding pumps under positive head conditions, a strainer shall be fitted to the suction pipe outside the tank. A stop valve shall be installed between the tank and the strainer. Strainers shall have a cross-sectional area of at least 1.5 times the nominal area of the pipe and shall not allow objects greater than 5 mm diameter to pass. In the case of −

clean water filled into the tank,

−

regular checks of the water quality for contaminations,

−

an installation of the tank in technical operating rooms, and

−

an exclusive use of the water for extinguishing purposes

the installation of a strainer is not required.

8.3.7

Materials, strength

The materials used shall be water-proof and weather-proof, or have a corrosion protection that is permanent for two years minimum. Welded sheet steel tanks shall be made of St 37-2 (or similar) or higher quality, and have a minimum sheet thickness of 3 mm for the walls and 5mm for the tank bottom. Wall and bottom thickness shall be calculated based on the 1,2-fold water pressure on the bottom of the brimful tank. Wall strengthenings shall only be fitted to the interior wall if they are welded to the tank end-to-end. The tank interior wall shall be pre-treated using a streaming method of purity level SA 2 ½ (ISO 12 944-4) prior to the first interior coating against corrosion. The interior coating of the tank shall be in accordance with a system appropriate for underwater and water load variations. The exterior walls of the tanks and the underbody shall at least be prime-coated. Note: If the underbody is not accessible after installation, it shall be prime-coated beforehand.

8.3.8

Underground tanks

If underground tanks are used, a ventilation pipe shall be fitted above the highest possible water level, having a minimum diameter of 78 cm². The ventilation pipe shall be made of corrosion-resistant material and protected against contamination and obstruction. No light shall enter the tank through the ventilation pipe. If the tanks are set up in rooms, an appropriate ventilation resp. heating shall prevent excessive condensation. Underground reinforced concrete tanks below traffic routes shall be dimensioned for a traffic load “LKW 12 to” in accordance with DIN 1072 or fork lift load in accordance with DIN 1055.

52

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


The tanks shall be dimensioned in accordance with DIN 1045, with at least concrete quality C 20/25 (waterproof) and a minimum component strength of 20 cm. A different concrete quality may be used if an equivalent sealing system is used in addition. The concrete cover shall be secured exclusively by distance holders for concrete. A decrease of the internal force variables of filling pressure via earth thrust is not permitted. The permitted crack width Wcal shall not exceed 0,2 mm. Moreover, the concrete quality shall be selected according to ambient conditions. For tank wall penetrations for pipes use sealing systems that permit pipe angle modifications.

8.3.9

Elevated private reservoirs

An elevated private reservoir is a water storage tank connected to a sprinkler system by a supply of its own, and the geodetic height of which provides the operating pressure required by the sprinkler system. The water volume required by the sprinkler system shall be available at all times. If water is extracted from an elevated private reservoir for other purposes than for the sprinkler system, the required water volume shall be provided at all times. The water volumes required for exhaustible elevated private reservoirs shall be at least as follows: −

Sprinkler systems for LH

15 m³

−

Sprinkler systems for OH

30 m³

−

Sprinkler systems for HHS and HHP

40 m³

8.4

Natural and artificial sources

Natural and artificial sources such as rivers, canals and lakes are considered as inexhaustible provided that they are virtually inexhaustible for reasons of capacity and climate etc.

8.4.1

General

8.4.1.1 In the case of flowing waters the angle between the flow direction and the intake axis (seen in the direction of flow) shall be less than 60°. Schematic diagram (angle for intake axis)

suction chamber / settling chamber

jackwell

intake axis < 60°

water flow direction 53


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

8.4.1.2 Excavation of the bed of the lake etc., to create the necessary depth for a pump suction inlet is not recommended, but if unavoidable the area shall be enclosed with the largest screen practicable, but in any case having sufficient clear area as specified in 8.4.3.3 and 8.4.4.5. 8.4.1.3 Two screens shall be provided, with one in use and the other in a raised position ready for interchange when cleaning is necessary.

8.4.2

Settling chambers and suction chamber

8.4.2.1 Where a suction or other pipe draws from a settling chamber or suction chamber fed from an inexhaustible source, the design and dimensions in Figure 8.03 a, 8.03 b and 8.03 c shall apply. Pipes, conduits and the bed of open-topped channels shall have a continuous slope towards the settling chamber or suction chamber of at least 1:125. 8.4.2.2 The dimensions of the suction chamber and the location of suction pipes from the walls of the chamber, their submergence below the lowest known water level (making any necessary allowances for ice) and clearance from the bottom shall conform to 8.3.5 and Figures 8.02 and 8.03 a, 8.03 b and 8.03 c. 8.4.2.3 The chambers shall be arranged to prevent ingress of wind borne debris and of sunlight.

8.4.3

Inlet as weir or above open channel

8.4.3.1 The depth 'd' of water in open channels or weirs (including the weir between the settling chamber and suction chamber) below the lowest known water level of the water source shall be not less than that specified in Table 8.03 for the corresponding width 'w' of inlet or channel and the appropriate flow (see also Figures 8.03 a and 8.03 b). The design shall be done for maximum flow demand Qmax. 8.4.3.2 The settling chamber shall have the same width ‘b’ and depth ‘h’ as the suction chamber, with b ≥ w. 8.4.3.3 Before entering the settling chamber the water shall first pass through a removable screen of wire mesh or perforated metal plate having an aggregate clear area below the water level of 150 mm² for each l/min of pump nominal flow in the case of LH or OH or maximum design flow for HHP or HHS.

54

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


Figure 8.03 a: Jackwell with inlet as weir

Figure 8.03 b: Jackwell with inlet above open channel 55


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Figure 8.03 c: Jackwell with inlet through pipe or feed pipe 0,25m < t ≤ 0,5 m Width w

Maximum flow demand

0,5m < t ≤ 1,0 m Width w

Maximum flow demand

t > 1,0 m Width w

Maximum flow demand

m

l/min

m

l/min

m

l/min

0,088

280

0,082

522

0,078

993

0,125

497

0,112

891

0,106

1 690

0,167

807

0,143

1 380

0,134

2 590

0,215

1 200

0,176

1 960

0,163

3 630

0,307

2 060

0,235

3 160

0,210

5 650

0,334

2 340

0,250

3 510

0,223

6 260

0,410

3 160

0,291

4 480

0,254

7 830

0,500

4 190

0,334

5 590

0,286

9 580

0,564

4 950

0,361

6 340

0,306

10 750

0,750

7 260

0,429

8 310

0,353

13 670

1,110

12 050

0,527

11 420

0,417

18 070

1,170

12 800

0,539

11 820

0,425

18 640

1,500

17 380

0,600

13 900

0,462

21 410

2,000

24 400

0,667

16 270

0,500

24 400

4,500

60 300

0,819

21 950

0,581

31 140

-

-

1,000

29 170

0,667

38 910

-

-

-

-

2,000

203 300

Note : For dimensions not included in this table, the conduit shall be designed such that the water velocity does not exceed 0,2 m/s.

Table 8.03: Minimum width of open channels and weirs (see Figures 8.03 a and 8.03 b)

56

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

8.4.4


Inlet via pipe or feed pipes

8.4.4.1 The diameter of the pipes or feed pipes shall be in accordance with the following equation:

d ≥ 21,68 ⋅ Q 0,357 d = internal diameter of inlet pipe in mm Q = max. flow rate in l/min according to Cl. 8.4.3.1 8.4.4.2 The inlet of the pipes or feed pipes shall be located at least pipe diameter ‘d’ below the lowest known water level. 8.4.4.3 The length of the settling chamber shall have at least the larger value of 10 d or 2,5m, with ‘d’ being the minimum internal diameter of the pipe or feed pipe. 8.4.4.4 The inlet of the pipe or feed pipe (see Fig. 8.03 c) supplying the settling chamber and/or suction chamber, shall be fitted with a screen whose total aperture diameter is at least 5 times the cross section of the pipe or feed pipe ‘d’. Provision shall be made to ensure that the settling chamber can be blocked for regular cleaning and maintenance. For duplicate water supplies separate settling and suction chambers shall be provided. The screen shall be able to withstand the water pressure in the case of obstruction. The mesh width shall not exceed 25 mm.

8.5

Pressure tanks

8.5.1

General

A pressure tank is a tank containing water under air pressure which shall be sufficient to ensure that all the water can be discharged at the necessary pressure. The pressure tank shall be reserved solely for the sprinkler system. The pressure tank shall be easily accessible for external and internal inspection. It shall be protected against corrosion both internally and externally. The discharge pipe shall be situated at least 0,05 m above the bottom of the tank.

8.5.2

Housing

The pressure tank shall be housed either in a readily accessible position in a sprinkler protected building or in a separate sprinkler protected building of non-combustible construction used solely for the housing of fire protection water supplies and equipment. When the pressure tank is housed in a sprinkler protected building the area shall be enclosed by at least fire-retardant construction of non-combustible materials. The pressure tank and housing shall be maintained at or above a temperature of 4°C.

8.5.3

Minimum capacity (water)

The minimum quantity of water in a pressure tank for a single supply shall be 15 m3 for LH and 23 m3 for OH1. The minimum quantity of water in a pressure tank for duplicate supplies shall be 15 m3 in LH and OH (all groups).

57


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

The minimum water volume of pressure tanks designed to class 1 shall be: −

7,5m³ for sprinkler systems for LH and OH

−

15,0m³ for sprinkler systems for OH2 - OH4, HHS and HHP

provided that the water supply of the sprinkler system consists of a pressure tank in connection with a further water source.

8.5.4

Air pressure and contents

8.5.4.1 General The air space shall not be less than one third of the pressure tank volume. Pressure in the tank shall not exceed 12 bar. Note: The maximum permitted pressure of the pressure tank is relevant. The air pressures and water flow rates of the tank shall be sufficient to satisfy the sprinkler installation demand requirements, up to the point of exhaustion. 8.5.4.2 Calculation The air pressure to be maintained in the tank shall be determined from the following formula: P = (P1 + P2 + 0,1h) (Vt/Va)-P1 where: P

is the operating pressure, in bar;

P1

is the atmospheric pressure, in bar (assume P1 = 1);

P2

is the minimum pressure required for the hydraulically most unfavourable sprinkler at the time of complete exhaustion of the pressure tank, in bar

h

is the height of the hydraulically most unfavourable sprinkler above the bottom of the pressure tank (can be negative, if the hydraulically most unfavourable sprinkler is positioned below the tank), in m

Vt

is the total volume of the tank, in cubic metres;

Va

is the volume of air in the tank, in cubic metres.

8.5.5

Charging with air and water

Pressure tanks used as a single supply shall be provided with means for automatically maintaining the air pressure and water level. The air and water supplies shall be capable of filling and pressurising the tank completely in no more than 8 hours. Note: For air supply purposes a quantity of 18 m³/h are assumed to be sufficient. The water supply shall be capable of topping up with water at the operating pressure (P in 8.5.4) of the pressure tank with a flow of at least 6m3/h.

58

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

8.5.6


Control and safety equipment

The tank shall be fitted with a pressure gauge and the required service pressure shall be marked on the gauge. A gauge glass shall be fitted to indicate the water level. Stop valves shall be fitted at each end of the gauge glass and they shall normally be kept closed and a drain valve shall also be provided. The gauge glass shall be protected against mechanical damage and shall be marked with the required water level. The tank shall be fitted with a suitable safety device to ensure that the highest permitted pressure is not exceeded. The tank shall be protected against mechanical damage. The connection between pressure tank and alarm valve station(s) shall have at least the nominal diameter of the largest alarm valve station. However, the diameter shall not fall below DN 100 and need not exceed DN 150. The connection shall have a check valve with one slide valve upstream and one downstream. Both at the water refill and at the air supply one slide valve and one check valve each shall be installed as closely as possible to the tank. The water refill pipe shall have a diameter of DN 40 minimum, the air supply DN 20 minimum. The pressure pipe of the water refill shall be fitted with a gauge. The sprinkler pump shall not be used to refill the pressure tank. The pressure tank shall be fitted with a second gauge. The gauge glass shall be made of a material that does not sliver when bursting, or else a fixed sliver protection shall be fitted, permitting the gauge glass to be read without endangering persons.

8.6

Type of water supply

8.6.1

Single water supplies

The water supply shall conform to the pressure, flow and duration requirements given in Clauses 6 and 8. The following constitute acceptable single water supplies: a) public water mains; b) public water mains with one or more booster pumps; c) pressure tank (LH and OH1 only) (see Clause 8.5); d) gravity tank; e) storage tank with one or more pumps; f) natural or artificial source with one or more pumps (see Clause 8.4).

59


8.6.2

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Superior single water supplies

Superior single water supplies are single water supplies which provide a higher degree of reliability. They include the following: a) public water mains fed from both ends, where each end is capable of satisfying the pressure and flow demands of the system. The public water mains pipe network shall be fed from two or more water sources and shall not be dependent at any point on a single, common trunk main; If booster pumps are required, two or more shall be provided; b) gravity tank with no booster pump, or water storage tank with two or more pumps, where the tank fulfils the following conditions: − the tank shall be full capacity; − there shall be no entry for light or foreign matter; − potable water shall be used; − painting or other corrosion protection, which reduces the need for emptying the tank for maintenance shall be approved by the authorities (see Clause 18.4.5.2); c) inexhaustible source with two or more pumps.

8.6.3

Duplicate water supplies

Duplicate water supplies consist of two single water supplies where each supply is independent of the other. Each of the supplies forming part of a duplicate supply shall conform to the pressure and flow characteristics given in Clause 6. Any combination of single supplies (including superior single supplies) may be used, with the following limitations: a) no more than one pressure tank shall be used for OH1 systems; b) no more than one storage tank of the reduced capacity type shall be used. Two or more pumps drawing water from two independent suction tanks constitute an acceptable duplicate water supply.

8.6.4

Combined water supplies

Combined water supplies are superior single or duplicate water supplies designed to supply more than one fixed fire fighting system, as for example in the case of combined pillar/ground hydrants and sprinkler installations. This does not apply to installations fitted exclusively with sprinkler and water spray valves. Combined supplies shall fulfil the following conditions: a) the system shall be fully calculated (down to the pillar/ground hydrants); b) the supply shall be capable of supplying the sum of the simultaneous maximum calculated flows from each system. The flows shall be corrected up to the pressure required by the most demanding system; c) the duration of the supply shall be no less than that required for the most demanding system. For hydrants the duration shall be in accordance with 7.2;

60

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

8.7


Isolation of water supplies

The connections between the water sources and alarm valve stations shall be arranged so as to ensure the following: a) that servicing of main components such as strainers, pump sets, back pressure valves and water meters is facilitated; b) that any problem occurring to one supply shall not impair the operation of any other source or supply; c) that maintenance can be carried out on one supply without impairing the operation of any other source or supply.

8.8

Choice of water supply

The type of water supply shall be selected in accordance with Table 8.04 in consideration of the maximum protection area.

Low Hazard (LH)

Single water supply

Single superior water supply

Duplicate water supply

X

X

X

1)

Ordinary Hazard (OH)

X

X

X

High Hazard Production (HHP) less than 500 sprinklers

X

X

X

X2)

X2)

X

X

X2)

X2)

High Hazard Production (HHP) 500 sprinklers or more High Hazard Storage (HHS) less than 500 sprinklers

X3)

High Hazard Storage (HHS) 500 to 5000 sprinklers High Hazard Storage (HHS) more than 5000 sprinklers

X2)

1) For OH2 and OH3 a pressure tank shall not be used as single water supply. 2) Each pump set shall be powered by a source that is completely independent of that of any other pump. Even in the case of failure of a pump set it shall be ensured that each further pump set starts automatically. 3) For high rack storage only up to 80 rack sprinklers maximum.

Table 8.04: Classification of water supply

Water supply type 1 consists of one exhaustible water source only. Water supply type 2 consists of one inexhaustible water source only. Water supply type 3 consists of one inexhaustible and one exhaustible water source. Water supply type 4 consists of two inexhaustible and one exhaustible water sources.

61


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Fire hazard

Water supply

Type consisting of 1

Abbrev.

1 exhaustible water source 5) either

a, b

1 pressure tank or 1 gravity tank 2

1 inexhaustible water source either

5)

c, d, e

1 public water mains or

3

LH

Permitted number of sprinklers


in total 4)

per fire section 4)

1000

OH

not permitted

HHP

not permitted

HHS

not permitted

LH

2000 2)

750 1)

OH

1000 3)

750 1)

100

3)

1 pump set or

HHP

1 gravity tank

HHS

100

1 inexhaustible water source and

c, d, e

LH

5000

5000

1 exhaustible water source

a, b, f

OH

5000

5000

HHP

5000

5000

HHS

5000

5000

e.g. 1 public water mains and 1 pressure tank or equivalent combination

a = pressure tanks; b = gravity tanks (exhaustible); c = public water mains; d = gravity tanks (inexhaustible); e = pump sets; f = reduced capacity tanks; a1, b1 = a1 or b1 1) The fire sections shall at least have fire retardant separations made of non-combustible materials. 2) Water supply type 1 may also be used in mixed hazards LH/OH, provided that the number of sprinklers in the OH area does not exceed 400 or 40% of the total number of sprinklers. One fire section in the OH area shall not comprise more than 100 sprinklers. The water supply characteristics shall be in accordance with hazard class OH. 3) Water supply type 2 may also be used in mixed hazards OH/HHP, provided that the number of sprinklers in the OH area does not exceed 400 or 40% of the total number of sprinklers. One fire section in the HHP area shall not comprise more than 100 sprinklers. The water supply characteristics shall be in accordance with hazard class HHP. 4) Sprinklers in voids do not count. 5) Water supplies types 1 and 2 are assessed less favourably than types 3 and 4.

Table 8.05: Types of water supply, Part 1

62

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


Fire hazard

Water supply

Type consisting of 4

2 inexhaustible water sources and

Abbrev.



in total 4)

per fire section 4)

c1, d1, e1+c2,d2,e 2

LH

20000

20000

a, b, f

OH

20000

20000

HHP

20000

20000

HHS

20000

20000

1 exhaustible water source 6) e.g. 2 public water mains and 1 pressure tank or equivalent combination Alternatively:

3 water sources of 50% each 7) and c1,d1,e1+c2 1 exhaustible water source 6) , d2,e2+c3,d 3,e3 e.g. 3 pump sets of 50% and 1 pressure tank Note: With more than 20000 sprinklers additional power supply backups shall be provided by agreement with the VdS Inspection Services. a = pressure tanks; b = gravity tanks (exhaustible); c = public water mains; d = gravity tanks (inexhaustible); e = pump sets; f = reduced capacity tanks; a1, b1 = a1 or b1 Water supplies according to c and e may also be used. If these are not the only water supplies, two thirds of the required water rate or duration will be sufficient. If a pump set is used as an exhaustible water source, its power supply shall be backed up. 1) The fire sections shall at least have fire-retardant separations made of non-combustible materials. 2) Water supply type 1 may also be used in mixed hazards LH/OH, provided that the number of sprinklers in the OH area does not exceed 400 or 40% of the total number of sprinklers. One fire section in the OH area shall not comprise more than 100 sprinklers. The water supply characteristics shall be in accordance with hazard class OH. 3) Water supply type 2 may also be used in mixed hazards OH/HHP, provided that the number of sprinklers in the OH area does not exceed 400 or 40% of the total number of sprinklers. One fire section in the HHP area shall not comprise more than 100 sprinklers. The water supply characteristics shall be in accordance with hazard class HHP. 4) Sprinklers in voids do not count. 5) Water supplies types 1 and 2 are assessed less favourably than types 3 and 4. 6) With more than 10000 sprinklers an automatic refill of the pressure tank is required. 7) Each water supply shall provide at least the pressure required for the most unfavourable area of operation and at least 50% of the water rate for most favourable area of operation. The first water supply shall operate before the pressure in the pipework required for the most unfavourable area of operation falls. The second water supply shall operate at the latest when the supply pressure required for the most unfavourable area of operation has been reached. If one water supply fails, the next one shall operate automatically. At least one water supply shall a storage tank, while the two other tanks may be reduced capacity tanks. It is possible to combine the two reduced capacity tanks in one tank with a partition.

Table 8.05: Types of water supply; Part 2

63


Water supply

Number of sprinklers1)

LH and OH

Type 3 and 4

1 – 5000

Wu

W

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

HHP and HHS

A, B, C

A, B, C

5001 – 20000

W

Wu A1, B1, C1

5001 – 20000

W LH Type 1 and 2

1 – 1000

W 1001 – 2000

Wu

751-5000 Sprinkler Wug W A1, B1, C1 und

1-750 Sprinkler 2) Wu W

W 50%

W 50%

A1, B1, C1 A2, B2, C2, D

A2, B2, C2, D

Wu A2,B2,C2,D

W 50% A1, A2, B1, B2, C3, D

3)

OH

HHP

Wu

Wu

A, B, C

A, B, C

not permitted

not permitted

4)

HHS

not permitted

A, B, C

LH, OH, HHP, HHS = hazard classes W = exhaustible water source, e.g. pressure tank, gravity tank Wu = inexhaustible water source Wug = inexhaustible water source, backed up power supply If one water source is attached to several power sources, the appropriate power source can be selected. A = mains supply; B = private power generator; C = diesel engines; D = standby supply generator A1 = mains 1; A2 = mains 2; A1, B1, C1 = A1 or B1 or C 1) Sprinklers in voids do not count. 2) For high rack storage only up to 80 rack sprinklers maximum. 3) Only permitted with water supply type 2 and up to 100 sprinklers maximum. 4) In the case of a failure of a power supply or pump, at least 100% of the required water rate shall be provided at all times.

Table 8.06: Power supply subject to fire hazard class and number of sprinklers

64

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

LH ... OH 1-5000 sprinklers A,B

water


LH ... HH

HH

5001-20000 sprinklers 751-5000 sprinklers A 1,B 1 A2,B 2,D

water

water

water

A 2,B 2,D

water

water

water

A = mains supply

A 2,B 2,D

A1,B 1

A,B,D

water

water

water

water

E = electric motor

A1 = mains supply 1

B = private power generator

F = controller

A2 = mains supply 2

C = diesel engine

P = pump

A1, B2, C1 = A1 or B1 or C1

D = standby supply generator

Figure 8.04: Examples of power supply for pump sets

9

Pumps

9.1

General

Pumps are installed to provide the required system flow rates at the required pressures. The pumps shall be used for fire fighting purposes only (see 7.2). The pressure at the delivery side of the pump shall decrease continuously (stable characteristic).

65


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Note: The engine shall be selected in accordance with the approval requirements (e.g. increased capacity with increased primary pressures) of the VdS approval for pumps. Pumps shall be driven either by electric motors or diesel engines capable of providing at least the power required for any pump load conditions from zero flow to the end of the pump characteristic. The end of the pump characteristic complies with the flow rate at pump pressure zero, measured at the delivery side of the pump. The pump capacity shall be designed in accordance with the VdS approval for the entire characteristic up to the approval limit. The coupling between the driver and the pump shall be of a type which ensures that either can be removed independently. Pipework shall be supported independently of the pump. Pipes shall be supported immediately upstream and downstream of the pump and connected with zero potential. The installation instructions of expansion joints shall be carefully attended to. During operation it shall not be possible to disable pump sets other than manually, even after response of an engine monitoring system. With several power sources it is essential to ensure that the pump set is powered automatically by another power source in the case of a fault or failure at the controller.

9.2

Multiple pump arrangements

Where more than one pump is installed with a superior single water supply or a duplicate water supply, these shall be powered by independent power sources (see 9.8.1). In any case, pumps shall have compatible characteristic curves and be capable of operating in parallel at all possible flow rates. Where two pumps are installed, each one shall be capable independently of providing the specified flows and pressures. Where three pumps are installed, each pump shall be capable of providing at least 50% of the specified flow at the specified pressure. With several water sources the sprinkler pumps shall be optionally feedable from any of the water supplies, as long as the pumps are not located in separate places (‘H’ circuit). If one tank is cut off in a system with sprinkler pumps operating in suction lift conditions and being fed optionally from two tanks via H arrangement, the sprinkler pump for the empty tank shall not aspirate any air via the priming tank of the sprinkler pump that is not in operation.

9.3

Compartments for pump sets

9.3.1 Pump sets shall be housed in a room built of highly fire-retardant components made of non-combustible materials, used for no other purpose than fire protection. It shall be one of the following (in order of preference): a) a separate building with this room only; b) a building with this room only, adjacent to a sprinkler-protected building with direct access from outside; c) a room with direct access from outside. Note 1: Any other solutions shall be agreed with the fire brigade/VdS. Note 2: The following are not permitted e.g. in rooms of pump sets

66

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

-


storage and/or production; house substations and devices supplied with combustible gases.

9.3.2 Compartments for pump sets shall be sprinkler-protected. Where the pump compartment is separate, it may be impractical to provide sprinkler protection from the alarm valve in the premises. Sprinkler protection may be provided from the nearest accessible point on the downstream side of the outlet non-return valve of the pump via a subsidiary stop valve secured in the open position, together with a water flow alarm switch to provide visible and audible indication of the operation of the sprinklers. The alarm devices shall be installed either at the alarm valve stations or at a permanently manned location such as a gatehouse. A 15-mm nominal diameter drain and test valve shall be fitted downstream of the water flow alarm switch to permit a practical test of the alarm device. 9.3.3 The pump compartment shall be maintained at or above the following temperature: −

+ 5°C for electric motor driven pumps and diesel engines with preheating unit;

−

+ 10°C for diesel engine driven pumps without preheating unit.

9.3.4 Pump compartments for diesel engine driven pumps shall be provided with adequate ventilation in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

9.4

Maximum temperature of water supply

The water supply temperature shall not exceed 40°C. Where submersible pumps are utilised the water temperature shall not exceed 25°C, unless the suitability of the motor has been proven for temperatures up to 40°C.

9.5

Valves and accessories

A stop valve shall be fitted in the pump suction pipe and a non-return and a stop valve shall be fitted in the delivery pipe. In lift condition, when the centre line of the pump is above the maximum water level, a stop valve in the suction pipe may be omitted. Any taper pipe fitted to the pump outlet shall expand in the direction of flow at an angle not exceeding 20°. Valves on the delivery side shall be fitted downstream of any taper pipe in the direction of flow only. If required, means for venting all cavities of the pump casing shall be provided. Arrangements shall be made to ensure a continuous flow of water through the pump sufficient to prevent overheating when it is operating against a closed valve. This flow shall be taken into account in the system hydraulic calculation. The outlet shall be clearly visible and where there is more than one pump the outlets shall be separate. Note: If the water is returned into the tank and the flow rate falls below 2% of the permitted flow, this water volume will not have to be taken into account in the hydraulic calculation. If the water volume is returned into the storage tank/reduced capacity tank, the visible water flow may be led through an arm pipe with slide valve and free outlet.

67


9.6

Suction conditions

9.6.1

General

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Wherever possible, horizontal centrifugal pumps shall be used, installed with a positive suction head. i.e. in accordance with the following: −

At least two thirds of the effective capacity of the suction tank shall be above the level of the pump centre line;

−

The pump centre line shall be no more than 2 m above the lowest water level of the suction tank (level ‘X’ in 8.3.5).

If this is not feasible, the pump may be installed under suction lift conditions or vertical turbine pumps may be used. In risks of hazard classes OH, HHS and HHP with operating times in accordance with Class 1 (see 7.1.1), a cover shall be fitted above the pump centre line covering at least five sixths of the effective capacity of the suction tank. Note: Suction lift should be avoided. Especially with suction lift it is critical not to vary from the requirements stated in 9.6.2 and shown in Figures 8.02 and 8.03.

9.6.2

Suction pipes

The pump suction shall be connected to a straight or eccentric taper pipe at least two diameters long. This pipe shall not have any arm pipe or other fittings. The taper pipe shall have a horizontal topside and a maximum included angle not exceeding 20º. Valves shall not be fitted directly to the pump inlet. If straight pipes at least 2,5 diameters long are to be connected to suction fittings upstream of pumps, taper pipes in accordance with DIN EN 10253 or DIN 2616 may be used. The suction piping, including all valves and fittings, shall be designed in such a way as to ensure that the available NPSH at the pump inlet exceeds the required NPSH by at least 1 m with the maximum demand flow and lowest water level (see ‘X’ in 8.02 and 8.03). Suction piping shall be laid either horizontal or with a rise of 15° maximum towards the pump to avoid the possibility of air locks forming in the pipe. Pumps shall have a measuring point at a distance of at least half the suction fitting diameter from the suction fitting. One measuring point shall be located at a distance of the suction fitting diameter from the suction fitting. Both measuring points shall consist of a bore 6mm in diameter and a welded sleeve for installing the gauge. 9.6.2.1 Positive head Where more than one pump is provided the suction pipes may only be interconnected if they are fitted with stop valves to allow each pump to continue operating when the other is removed for maintenance. The connections shall be dimensioned as appropriate for the flow rate required (see Table 9.01). If more than one sixth of the effective water volume is between the centre line of the pump and the lowest water level (see 8.3.5), a foot valve with pump primer shall be fitted. The pipe diameter for a suction pipe shall not fall below DN 65. The pipe diameter shall be dimensioned such that at maximum demand flow a velocity of 1,8 m/s is not

68

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


exceeded. The flow velocity may be increased to 2,5 m/s while a low pressure of 0,4 bar is not exceeded. 9.6.2.2 Suction lift conditions The pipe diameter for a suction pipe shall not fall below DN 80. The pipe diameter shall be dimensioned such that at maximum demand flow a velocity of 1,5 m/s is not exceeded. The flow velocity may be increased to 2,5 m/s while a low pressure of 0,4 bar is not exceeded. The suction pipes shall not be interconnected. This does not refer to ‘H’ circuits in accordance with 9.2. The height from the low water level (see 8.3.5) to the centre line of the pump shall not exceed 3,7 m. The suction pipe shall be positioned in the tank or reservoir in accordance with Figure 8.02 resp. 8.03 and Table 8.03. A foot valve shall be fitted at the lowest point on the suction pipe. Each pump shall have automatic priming arrangements in accordance with 9.6.2.3. 9.6.2.3 Pump priming for suction lift The automatic pump priming arrangement shall ensure that pumps are constantly kept full of water. Each pump shall be fitted with a separate priming arrangement. The arrangement shall consist of a tank situated at a higher level than the pump and with a pipe connection sloping from the tank to the delivery side of the pump. A non-return valve shall be fitted to this connection. The priming tank, the pump and the suction pipework shall be kept constantly full of water even where there is leakage from the foot valve referred to in 9.6.2.2. Should the water level in the tank fall to two-thirds of the normal level, the pump shall start. Figure 9.01 shows two examples. If the supply to the priming tank is taken from the public water mains forming a supply to the sprinkler installation, the connection shall be made upstream of the non-return valve on the public water mains connection. The size of the priming tank and the pipe shall be in accordance with Table 9.03. Hazard class

Minimum tank capacity l

Minimum diameter of priming pipe DN

LH OH, HHP and HHS

100 500

25 50

Table 9.03: Pump priming tank capacity and pipe size An automatic pump start will not be necessary if the water level in the priming tank is monitored in accordance with Clause 19. If the system is not monitored as specified in Clause 19, an additional fault indication at the controller will be necessary. This indication will have to be transmitted via general fault indication to a permanently manned location.

69


Figure 9.01: Pump priming arrangement for suction lift

70

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

9.7

Performance characteristics

9.7.1

General


The maximum pressure shall not exceed 12 bar. The performance characteristics of pumps shall be recorded in accordance with 3.4.4.4. The maximum system pressure is based on the maximum permitted pressure of the components used.

9.7.2

Pre-calculated systems - LH and OH


9.7.3

Pre-calculated systems - HHP and HHS with no in-rack sprinklers


9.7.4

Calculated systems

The pump set shall be capable of providing at least the flow and pressure of both the most favourable and the most unfavourable areas. The maximum flow demand (Qmax) for supplying the most favourable area may exceed the permitted rate by up to 40%. The pressure shall not fall by more than 30% (of the pressure prevailing with the permitted rate). The flow demand for the most unfavourable area shall fall below the permitted rate at all times (see Figure H.01).

9.7.5

Pressure and water capacity of boosted public water mains

If it is intended to connect a pump to a public water mains, a test shall first be carried out to show that it can supply the flow rate equal to the maximum demand flow plus 20%, at a pressure of at least 1 bar, as measured at the pump inlet. This test shall be carried out at a time of maximum demand on the mains.

9.7.6 9.7.6.1

Pressure switches Number of pressure switches

Two pressure switches shall be provided to start each pump set, connected in series with normally closed contacts. The same level of safety is achieved by starting the pump via two pressure switches with contacts closing when the pressure falls, with parallel connections converging in the controller. The nominal diameter of the pipe leading to the pressure switch shall be ½” minimum. Two pressure switches maximum may be connected to this pipe. 9.7.6.2

Pump start

The pump set shall start automatically when the pressure in the trunk main falls to a value of not less than 0,8 P, where P is the pressure at zero flow. Where two pump sets are installed, the second pump shall start before the pressure falls to a value of not less than 0,6 P. Once the pump has started, it shall continue to run until stopped manually. Where one of the pump sets is electric motor driven this shall be the first to start.

71


9.7.6.3

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Testing the pressure switches

Means shall be provided for testing each pressure switch. If any isolating valve is installed on the connection between the trunk main and any pump starting pressure switch, a back pressure valve shall be installed in parallel with the isolating valve so that a fall in pressure on the trunk main will be transmitted to the pressure switch even when the isolating valve is closed. The same level of safety is achieved by self relieving ball valves.

9.8

Electrically driven pump sets

Note: For VdS-approved controllers the safety requirements specified in this clause may be regarded as fulfilled.

9.8.1

General

9.8.1.1 Where two electric motor driven pumps are used, Clause 8.8 on the choice of water supply also specifies certain power supply requirements. Where a sprinkler pump is supplied by several electric power sources, each power source shall have its own electrically interlocked controller. Where a water rate is delivered by several pumps, each pump shall have its own controller. 9.8.1.2 The electric supply system shall be available at all times. 9.8.1.3 Documentation, such as installation drawings, main supply and transformer diagrams and connections for supplying the pump controller panel as well as motor, control alarm circuits and signals shall be kept available in the sprinkler valve or pump room and be up to date at all times. 9.8.1.4 The pump shall operate at nominal capacity within 15 seconds of the beginning of any starting sequence.

9.8.2

Electricity supply

The operating voltage of public electricity networks and private power generators at nominal operation of pump sets shall not fall below the motor nominal voltage by more than 5%. Where the sprinkler system is powered by two electrical networks, these shall be merged only if the voltage is 110kV minimum. 9.8.2.1 The supply to the pump controller shall be solely for the use of the sprinkler system and separate from all other connections. Where permitted, the electrical supply to the pump controller shall be taken from the input side of the main switch on the incoming supply to the premises and where this is not permitted, by a connection from the main switch. The fuses in the pump controller shall be delayed-action fuses, capable of carrying the stalled motor current for a period of not less than 75% of the time needed for the motor windings to fail and thereafter be able to carry the normal current plus 100% for a minimum of 5 hours.

72

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


This may also be achieved by: using high capacity fuses for the fuses in the pump controller, capable of carrying high voltage current for 20 s minimum. The nominal current of the protection equipment shall be greater than the operating current of the circuit. The sprinkler controller shall only supply the equipment required for operating the sprinkler system. This includes: a) sprinkler pump b) filling pump c) booster pump for sprinkler pipework d) air compressor e) heating elements or heating bands of low capacity (3kW max.) used for keeping the sprinkler system or parts of the pipework free of frost f) motor driven slide valve g) bildge pump (part of sprinkler system) h) lighting of sprinkler equipment room i) ventilation of sprinkler equipment room j) monitoring panel 9.8.2.2 All cables shall be protected against fire and mechanical damage. Cables to the terminal board of the motor or to the connection of submersible pumps shall be laid in one piece. Connection points outside the controller for sprinkler systems and the low voltage main distribution are not permitted. A terminal box shall be located in the direct vicinity of the pump motor, if – in the case of two power sources – the cables from the controllers to the sprinkler pump motor are outside the sprinkler equipment room, not buried and separate. To each cable one load only (controller, equipment, etc.) shall be connected. The cables shall be flame-retardant and have a burning behaviour in accordance with DIN EN 60332-3-22 A or DIN EN 60332-3-24, type C, e.g. cables of type NYY (DIN VDE 0276-603), halogen-free cables with improved behaviour in the case of fire in accordance with DIN VDE 0276-604. The diameter of the conductor shall be 2,5 mm² Cu minimum. Cables required for operating the sprinkler system shall be selected and laid so as to keep them functional in the case of fire. Flame-retardant cables (see above) (e.g. NYY) may be used without any further requirements, provided that they are laid as follows: a) buried with a covering of 70 cm minimum; b) in floors and walls made of non-combustible materials with sufficient covering, e.g. in concrete with a covering of 10 cm; c) in sprinkler equipment rooms; d) in electrical operating rooms in accordance with 4.1.1 o). Otherwise the cables shall be laid as follows:

73


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

e) in “Cable systems with structural separations and busbar distributors” in accordance with DIN 4102-12 (e.g. fire protection enclosures), if active parts, e.g. by structural separations, are protected from water − of class E 30 in rooms that are sprinklered or permitted exemptions from sprinkler protection in accordance with 4.1.1 b), c), g), h), i), m) and n) − of class E 90 in non-sprinklered areas or the following is used: f) fire-resistant cables of class E 90 in accordance with DIN 4102-12 with additional functionality test under exposure to water after exposure to flaming by VdS and protection against mechanical damage, designed as follows: − in false ceiling spaces in accordance with 4.1.1 n) immediately underneath the rough ceiling; − in enclosed flues and ducts made of non-combustible materials; − in installation flues and ducts in accordance with DIN 4102-11; − directly underneath rough ceilings; − in false floors; − on cable trays that are fully covered by non-combustible building materials. Where E 90 cables in accordance with DIN 4102-12 are used, they shall be laid in accordance with the certificate of suitability by the building control authorities. Where sprinkler systems are powered by two electrical power sources, the cables to the controller and to the motors shall be laid at a distance of 3m minimum from each other, unless the controller and the sprinkler pump system are located in the sprinkler equipment room or the cables are buried. For each cable the approved hangers shall be used in compliance with the installation instructions (see certificate by material testing institute). Note 1: All wiring associated with the electric motor driven pump, including the monitoring circuits, should be in accordance with the appropriate regulations for electrical installations. To protect cables from direct exposure to fire they should be run outside the building or through those parts of the building where the fire risk is negligible and which are separated from any significant fire risk by walls, partitions or floors with a fire resistance of not less than 60 min, or they should be given additional direct protection. Note 2: It is strongly recommended that the cables be buried. 9.8.2.3 Standby supply generators Standby supply generators shall be powered by diesel engines. If the operating parameters to be monitored are exceeded or fallen below, select the first option “alarm” (no silencing) of DIN ISO 8528-4 Cl. 7.3. The energy transfer from the standby supply generator to the sprinkler pump motor shall not take place until the generator has reached its nominal operating data. The standby supply generators shall be designed in consideration of the pump start specifics (starting current behaviour).

74

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


In the case of a power failure standby supply generators designed for a sprinkler system plus further loads shall start irrespectively of the operating condition of the sprinkler system. Standby supply generators supplying the sprinkler system only, shall start only if there is a power failure at the sprinkler controller and the sprinkler system operates. Once the first power source returns and is activated automatically, standby supply generators shall continue to operate for 10 min. The control panels for automatic standby supply and mains transfer shall be designed at least as follows: a) for mains operation − 1 voltage monitoring equipment (three-phase) b) for generator operation − 1 voltage meter − 1 ammeter per phase conductor − 1 selector switch with the following positions: − “automatic” − “test” (with no load, but automatic load transfer in case of power failure) − “generator” (manual load connection for testing) − “disabled” (key switch inhibits start) − 1 signal lamp “mains on” − 1 signal lamp “generator on”

9.8.3

Switchboard

9.8.3.1 The main switch and power distribution for the premises shall be situated in a room with at least fire-resistant separation made of non-combustible materials used for no other purpose than for electrical power supplies. Door openings between this room and any adjacent rooms shall have at least fire-retardant closures. Any other location shall be approved by the authorities. The circuit shall not have a ground fault circuit interrupter. The connection to the controller of the sprinkler system shall be fused in the low voltage main distribution. Before this fuse only one more shall be fitted up to the low-voltage-lateral point of delivery. The electrical connections in the main switchboard shall be such that the supply to the pump controller is not isolated when isolating other services.

75


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

e1 = main fuse e2 = fuse for sprinkler connection e3 = main fuse for other loads a1 = load break switch for sprinkler system a2 = main switch for other loads e2/a1 also permitted as circuit breaker

to the switchgear of the sprinkler system

other loads

Figure 9.02: Example of sprinkler system connection in low voltage main distribution 9.8.3.2 Each switch on the dedicated power feed to the sprinkler pump shall be labelled:

SPRINKLER PUMP MOTOR SUPPLY – NOT TO BE SWITCHED OFF IN THE EVENT OF FIRE! The letters on the notice shall be at least 10 mm high and white on a red background. The load break switch for disabling the sprinkler system shall be secured against inadvertent operation and marked especially.

9.8.4

Installation between the main switchboard and the pump controller

9.8.4.1 The current for calculating the correct dimension for the cable shall be determined by taking the largest possible full load current and adding 50%. The cable shall furthermore be able to carry the largest possible starting current for 10 seconds.

9.8.5

Pump controller

9.8.5.1 The pump controller shall be able : a) to start the motor automatically on receiving a signal from the pressure switches; b) to start the motor manually; c) to stop the motor by manual operation only. The controller shall be equipped with an ammeter.

76

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


9.8.5.2 Except in the case of submersible pumps, the pump controller shall be situated in the same room (pump room) as the electric motor and pump. In the case of submersible pumps a duplicate plate with its characteristics shall be affixed to the pump controller. 9.8.5.3 Contacts shall comply with utilisation category AC-3 of IEC 60 947.

9.8.6

Monitoring of pump operation

9.8.6.1 The following conditions shall be monitored: −

power available to the motor on all three phases;

−

pump on demand;

−

pump running.

9.8.6.2 All monitored conditions shall be visually indicated individually in the pump room, faults shall be indicated audibly. They should also be visually and audibly indicated at a location permanently manned by responsible personnel. 9.8.6.3 The visual fault indication shall be yellow. The audible signals shall have a signal strength of at least 75 dB at a distance of 1 m and shall be able to be silenced. 9.8.6.4 A lamp test for checking the signal lamps shall be provided.

9.9

Diesel engine driven pumps

Note: For VdS-approved controllers the safety requirements specified in this clause may be regarded as fulfilled.

9.9.1

General

A diesel engine shall be capable of operating continuously at full load at site elevation with a rated output in accordance with ISO 3046-1:1986. If the operating parameters to be monitored are exceeded or fallen below, select the first option “alarm” (no silencing) of DIN ISO 8528-4 Cl. 7.3. The pump shall be fully operational within 15 seconds of the beginning of any starting sequence. Horizontal pumps shall have a direct drive. The automatic start and operation of the pump set shall not depend on any energy sources other than the engine and its batteries.

9.9.2

Engines

The engine shall be capable of starting at an engine room temperature of +5°C. Note: If a minimum temperature of +10°C at the installation place of the diesel engine is guaranteed, the requirement of a pump start at +5°C will not apply. The governor to control the engine speed shall keep the speed constant between no load and full load conditions of the pump with a deviation of ± 5%. Under nominal load conditions the speed shall not deviate from nominal speed by more than 1,5%. The engine shall be constructed so that any mechanical device fitted to the engine which could prevent the engine starting automatically, will return to the starting position.

77


9.9.3

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Cooling system

The following types of cooling systems are acceptable. a) cooling by water from the sprinkler pump directly into the engine-cylinder jackets via a pressure reducing device if necessary, in accordance with the manufacturer's specification. The outlet pipe shall be open so that the discharge water is visible; b) a heat exchanger, where the water is taken from the sprinkler pump via a pressure reducing device if necessary, in accordance with the manufacturer's specification. The outlet pipe shall be open so that the discharge water is visible. The water in the closed circuit shall be circulated by an auxiliary pump driven by the engine. If the auxiliary pump is belt driven, there shall be multiple belts such that even if half the belts are broken, the remaining belts are able to drive the pump. The capacity of the closed circuit shall conform to the value specified by the engine manufacturers; c) an air cooled radiator with a fan multiple belt driven by the engine. If half the belts break, the remaining belts shall be capable of driving the fan. The water in the closed circuit shall be circulated by an auxiliary pump driven by the engine. If the auxiliary pump is belt driven, there shall be multiple belts such that even if half the belts are broken, the remaining belts are able to drive the pump. The capacity of the closed circuit shall conform to the value specified by the engine manufacturers; d) direct air cooling of the engine by means of a multiple belt driven fan. When half the belts are broken the remaining belts shall be capable of driving the fan. Where cooling water is taken from the pump in quantities exceeding 2% of the maximum calculated system demand rate, the flow shall be taken into account in the system calculations.

9.9.4

Air filtration and intake

The air intake shall be fitted with a suitable filter. Provision shall be made for a suitable air intake into the pump room to ensure the correct operation of the engine.

9.9.5

Exhaust system

The exhaust pipe shall be fitted with a suitable silencer and the total back pressure shall not exceed the engine-maker’s recommendation. Where the exhaust pipe is higher than the engine, means shall be provided to prevent any condensate flowing back to the engine. The exhaust pipe shall be positioned in such a way as to prevent exhaust gases from re-entering the pump room. No combustible materials shall be located near the exhaust pipe.

9.9.6

Fuel, fuel tank and fuel feed pipes

The quality of the diesel fuel used shall conform to the engine-maker's instructions. The fuel tank shall contain fuel oil sufficient to enable the engine to run on full load for:

78

−

3 hours for LH;

−

4 hours for OH;

−

6 hours for HHP and HHS.

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


The fuel tank shall be of welded steel. Where there is more than one diesel driven pump set, there shall be a separate fuel tank and fuel feed pipe for each engine. The fuel tank shall be fixed at a higher level than the motor's fuel pump to ensure a positive head, but not directly above the engine. The fuel tank shall have a sturdy fuel level gauge. Any valves in the fuel feed pipe between the fuel tank and the engines shall be placed adjacent to the tank, have an indicator and be locked in the open position. Pipe joints shall not be soldered. Metallic pipes or metallic hoses shall be used for fuel lines. The feed pipe shall be situated at least 20 mm above the bottom of the fuel tank. A drain valve of at least 20 mm diameter shall be fitted to the base of the tank. The fuel tank vent should be terminated outside the building.

9.9.7 9.9.7.1

Starting mechanism General

Automatic and manual starting systems shall be provided and shall be independent except that the starter motor and batteries may be common to the two systems. It shall be possible to start the diesel engine both automatically, upon receipt of a signal from the pressure switches, and manually by means of a push button on the pump controller. It shall be possible to shut down the diesel engine only manually. The rated voltage of the batteries and starter motor shall be: −

24 V for engines of capacity greater than 1640 cm³;

−

24 V or 12 V for engines of capacity less than or equal to 1640 cm³.

The starter motor and each battery power source shall have the design capacity to rotate the engine at 0°C and 760 mmHg atmospheric pressure for not less than 10 cycles each of not less than 15 s cranking and not more than 10 s rest. At the end of the energised part of each cycle the engine cranking speed shall be not less than 120 r/min while power is applied. 9.9.7.2

Automatic starting system

The automatic starting sequence shall make six attempts to start the engine, each one of 5 to 10 s duration, with a maximum pause of 10 seconds between each attempt. The starting device shall reset itself automatically. It shall function independently of the line power supply. The system shall switch over automatically to the other battery after each starting attempt. The control voltage shall be drawn from both batteries simultaneously. Facilities shall be provided to prevent one battery having an adverse effect on the other. 9.9.7.3

Emergency manual starting system

Emergency manual start facilities shall be provided in accordance with the approval requirements for controllers.

79


9.9.7.4

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Test facility for manual starting system

A manual start test button and indicator lamp shall be provided to permit periodic testing of the manual electric start system without breaking the cover over the emergency manual start facilities button. The controller shall be marked, adjacent to the lamp, with the wording: OPERATE MANUAL START TEST BUTTON IF LAMP IS LIT The manual start test button shall only be brought on line after an automatic engine start followed by a shut down or after six repeated unsuccessful attempts to start automatically. Either of the two conditions shall cause the indicator lamp to light and bring the manual start test button on line in parallel with the emergency manual start push button. When a test manual start has been carried out, the circuit used for this purpose shall automatically become inoperable and the indicator lamp shall be extinguished. The automatic start facility shall be available, even when the manual start test button circuit is activated. 9.9.7.5

Starter motor

The electric starter motor shall incorporate a moveable pinion which will engage automatically with the flywheel gear rim. To avoid shock loading, the system shall not apply full power to the starting motor until the pinion is fully engaged. The pinion shall not be ejected from engagement by spasmodic engine firing. There shall be a means to prevent attempted engagement when the engine is rotating. The starter motor shall cease to operate and shall return to the rest position if the pinion fails to engage with the flywheel gear ring, After a failure to engage, the starter motor shall automatically make repeated attempts to achieve engagement. When the engine starts the starter motor pinion shall withdraw from the flywheel gear ring automatically by means initiated by an electro-mechanical speed sensor. Pressure switches, for example on the engine lubrication system or water pump outlet, shall not be used as a means of de-energising the starter motor. Centrifugal speed switches or voltage generators used for sensing shall have a direct coupling to, or be gear-driven by, the engine; flexible drives shall not be used.

9.9.8

Engine starter batteries

Engine starter batteries and chargers shall be as follows: Two separate battery power supplies shall be provided and shall be used for no other purpose. Batteries shall be either open nickel-cadmium prismatic rechargeable cells complying with DIN EN 60623 or lead acid positive batteries complying with the appropriate IEC and DIN EN standards. The electrolyte for lead acid batteries shall comply with the appropriate IEC and DIN EN standards. Batteries shall be selected, used, charged and maintained in accordance with the requirements of these Guidelines and with any manufacturer's instructions.

80

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


A hydrometer, suitable for checking the density of the electrolyte, shall be provided for non maintenance free batteries. For class 1 systems only lead batteries with positive planté plate or positive tubular plates as well as nickel-cadmium batteries shall be used. Any batteries with plates equivalent to these with regard to their service life are permitted also. Car starter batteries shall not be used. The batteries shall be able to ensure the starting and control of the engine at a temperature of +5°C from trickle charge condition. During the automatic starting procedure with six repeated attempts the voltage drop shall not exceed 45% of the control voltage.

9.9.9

Battery chargers

Each starter battery shall be provided with an independent, continuously connected, fully automatic, constant current and/or constant voltage charger. It shall be possible to remove either charger while leaving the other operational. Chargers for lead acid batteries shall provide a float voltage of 2,25 V ± 0,05 V per cell. The nominal charging voltage shall be suitable for local conditions (climate, regular maintenance, etc.). A boost charge facility shall be provided for charging to a higher voltage not exceeding 2,7 V per cell. The charger output shall be between 3,5% and 7,5% of the 10 h capacity of the battery. Chargers for nickel-cadmium batteries shall provide a float voltage of 1,445 V ± 0,025 V per cell. The nominal charging voltage shall be suitable for local conditions (climate, regular maintenance, etc.). A boost charge facility shall be provided for charging to a higher voltage not exceeding 1,75 V per cell. The charger output shall be between 25% and 167% of the 5h capacity of the battery.

9.9.10

Siting of batteries and chargers

Batteries shall be mounted on stands or stillages. Note: The chargers may be mounted with the batteries and shall correspond to the enclosure protection class of the controller. Batteries and chargers should be located in readily accessible positions where the likelihood of contamination by oil fuel, damp, pump set cooling water, or of damage by vibration is minimal. The battery should be as close as possible to the engine starter motor, subject to the above constraints, in order to minimise voltage drop between the battery and starter motor terminal.

9.9.11

Starter alarm indication

The following conditions shall each be indicated both locally and at a responsibly manned location by both warning lights and an additional audible signal for faults: a) the use of any switch which prevents the pump starting automatically; b) the failure of the engine to start by the end of the six cyclic attempts; c) pump running. The warning lights shall be appropriately marked. The audible signals shall have an intensity of at least 75 dB at a distance of 1 m and be silenceable. A test facility for the warning lights shall be provided.

81


9.9.12

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Tools and spare parts

A standard kit of tools and spare parts as recommended by the engine and pump manufacturers shall be provided.

9.9.13

Engine tests and exercising

Engine tests and exercising shall be as follows: 9.9.13.1 Supplier's test and certification of results Each complete engine and pump set shall be tested on the supplier's test bed for not less than 1,5 h at the rated flow. The following shall be recorded on the test certificate: a) the engine speed with the pump churning; b) the engine speed with the pump delivering water at the rated flow; c) the pump churning pressure; d) the suction head at the pump inlet; e) the pump outlet pressure at the rated flow downstream of any outlet orifice plate; f) the ambient temperature; g) the cooling water temperature rise at the end of the 1,5 h run; h) the cooling water flow rate; i) the lubricating oil temperature rise at the end of the test run; j) where the engine is fitted with a heat exchanger, the initial temperature and the temperature rise of the engine closed circuit cooling water. 9.9.13.2 Site commissioning test When commissioning an installation the automatic starting system of the diesel engine driven pump set shall be activated with the fuel supply isolated for the six cycles each of not less than 15 s cranking and not more than 15 s or less than 10 s rest. After completion of the six starting cycles the fail to start alarm shall operate. The fuel supply shall then be restored and the pump set shall start when the manual start test button is operated. The start and pause times modified compared to 9.9.7.2 can also be effected by means of the emergency manual starting system. Where the test may be done otherwise and without any further auxiliary means, an isolation of the fuel supply may be omitted. In this case, the procedure shall be specified in the operation manual which shall be affixed to the engine or provided if required.

82

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


10

Installation type and size

10.1

Wet pipe installations

10.1.1

General

Wet pipe installations are permanently charged with water under pressure. Wet pipe installations should be installed only in premises where there is no possibility of frost damage, and where the ambient temperature will not exceed 95°C. Note: Wet pipe installations shall be vented.

10.1.2

Protection against freezing

Pipework subject to freezing may be protected by anti-freeze liquid or electrical trace heating or subsidiary dry pipe or alternate extensions. Note 1: The size of any one anti-freeze extension should not exceed 20 sprinklers. Note 2: The total number of sprinklers on anti-freeze extensions should not exceed 100. An anti-freeze solution shall be prepared with freezing point below the expected minimum temperature for the locality (see 18.3.3). In the case of a trace heating system, the piping shall be provided with non-combustible insulation in accordance with DIN 4102, building material class A. Duplicate heating elements shall be provided over the complete length of the frost-endangered pipework. Even in the case of a failure of one of the two heating elements a minimum temperature of 5°C shall be maintained. Each circuit shall be electrically monitored and triggered by separate temperature sensors. The design of the trace heating including insulation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications. The trace heating system shall be monitored for power supply failure and failure of the heating elements or sensors. Any fault warning of the trace heating shall be transmitted to a permanently manned location. For subsidiary dry pipe or alternate extensions, see 10.5.

10.1.3

Sprinkler orientation

Where possible the sprinklers shall be fitted in the upright position to avoid mechanical damage and the collection of foreign matter in the sprinkler fittings and to make it easier to drain the pipe network.

10.1.4

Size of installations

The number of sprinklers to be controlled by a wet alarm valve, including any sprinklers in a subsidiary extension, shall not exceed that shown in Table 10.01. The number of sprinklers specified in Table 10.01 and Clause 19 may include those sprinklers resulting from the maximum permitted protection areas according to Tables 11.01 resp. 11.02. For installations acc. 11.5 and 11.6 the permitted protection area shall be assumed to be 9 m².

83


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Where additional voids and machinery are protected, the number of sprinklers may be increased by 200. Hazard class

Maximum number of sprinklers

LH

500

OH, including any LH sprinklers

1 000, except as allowed in Annexes D and F

HH, including any OH and LH sprinklers

1 000

Table 10.01: Maximum number of sprinklers per installation – wet pipe and pre-action installations The actual number of sprinklers installed shall not, however, exceed the number specified in Table 10.01 and Clause 19 by more than twice the amount. Example ceiling protection Fire hazard:

HHS3

Building surface (L x W):

160 m x 54 m

Required calculated sprinklers, ceiling protection:

160m ⋅ 54m = 960 sprinklers 9m 2 One alarm valve station is sufficient, provided that not more than 2000 effectively installed sprinklers are connected to this group. Example rack protection Rack length:

150 m

Rack width:

2,2 m

Number of racks:

10

Number of sprinkler levels:

8

Required calculated sprinklers, rack protection:

10 ⋅ 8 ⋅ 150m ⋅ 2,2m = 2934 sprinklers 9m 2 Three alarm valve stations are sufficient, provided that not more than 2000 effectively installed sprinklers are connected to each group. Required calculated sprinklers in total: 3894 sprinklers As the number of required calculated sprinklers falls below 5000, a water supply type 3 is sufficient for installations of class 1.

84

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


If two or more storeys are supplied via one alarm valve station, drainage shall be divided into storeys by check valves, and alarms shall be divided into storeys by water flow alarm switches.

10.2

Dry pipe installations

10.2.1

General

Dry pipe installations are normally charged with air or inert gas under pressure downstream of the dry alarm valve and water under pressure upstream of the dry alarm valve. Grid and loop systems shall not be used in dry pipe systems. (This also refers to preaction and alternate systems.) A permanent air/inert gas supply to maintain the pressure in the pipe network shall be installed. The installation shall be pressurised to within the pressure range recommended by the alarm valve manufacturer. Dry pipe installations shall only be installed where there is a possibility of frost damage or the temperature exceeds 95°C, e.g. in drying ovens. In the case of more than two dry alarm valve stations two compressors minimum shall be installed. For charging the pipework of dry pipe installations with compressed air, an air compressor or an equivalent compressed air supply shall be provided as follows: −

effective supply quantity

8 m³/h

−

maximum charging time

1h

10.2.2


All sprinklers in a dry pipe installation shall be fitted in the upright position, except where dry pendent pattern or sidewall sprinklers are used. Dry pendent sprinklers shall only be installed sideways or upwards. Where they are installed sideways, the pipe shall be either galvanised or two nominal widths larger than the connection thread of the dry pendent sprinkler.

10.2.3


The net volume of the pipework downstream of the alarm valve station shall not exceed that shown in Table 10.02. The values specified in Table 10.02 are benchmarks. The charging time of the pipework is relevant (period of time between opening and water discharge at the test facility at the end of the pipework). If the charging time requirements are met, the pipework volume may be larger than that specified in Table 10.02. Note: It is strongly recommended that dry and alternate installations should not be used for HHS applications, since the delay in water reaching the first operating sprinklers could seriously impair the effectiveness of the system.

85


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Design

Maximum volume of pipework (m3)

Without accelerator or exhauster

1,5

With accelerator or exhauster

4,0

Table 10.02: Maximum size per installation – Dry and alternate installations Accelerators and exhausters accelerate the opening of dry alarm valve stations. Sprinkler installations for HHP and HHS shall generally be fitted with accelerators or exhausters. The pipework downstream of the alarm valve stations of dry pipe installations shall be dimensioned such that a charging time of 90 s is met by installations with a design density of ≤ 5 mm/min and 60 s by installations with a higher design density. Charging time is the time between opening and water discharge at the test facility at the end of the pipework. In multi-storey buildings not more than one storey shall be connected to an alarm valve station.

10.3

Alternate installations

10.3.1

General

Alternate installations incorporate either an alternate alarm valve or composite set comprising a wet alarm valve and a dry alarm valve. During the winter months the system piping downstream of the alternate or dry alarm valve is charged with air or inert gas under pressure and the remainder of the installation upstream of the alarm valve with water under pressure. At other times of the year the installation operates as a wet pipe installation.

10.3.2


All sprinklers in an alternate installation shall be fitted in the upright position, except where dry pendent pattern or sidewall sprinklers are used.

10.3.3


The net volume of the pipework downstream of the alarm valve station shall not exceed that shown in Table 10.02.

10.4

Pre-action installations

10.4.1

General

Pre-action installations are divided into two types: 10.4.1.1

Pre-action installation Type A

This is a dry pipe system in which the alarm valve station is activated by an automatic fire detection system but not by the operation of the sprinklers. In the event of a fire detection fault, the pre-action installation shall operate as a dry pipe installation with the specified charging times.

86

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


The air/inert gas pressure in the installation shall be monitored at all times. Consideration shall be given to fit a manually operated valve in an appropriate position to enable the pre-action valve to be activated in an emergency. The pipework downstream of the alarm valve stations of dry pipe installations shall be dimensioned such that a charging time of 90 s is met by installations with a design density of ≤ 5 mm/min and 60 s by installations with a higher design density. Charging time is the time between opening and water discharge at the test facility at the end of the pipework. In multi-storey buildings not more than one storey shall be connected to an alarm valve station. Note: Type A pre-action installations should only be installed in areas where considerable damage could occur if there were an accidental discharge of water. 10.4.1.2

Pre-action installation Type B (alternate installation)

This is a dry pipe system in which the alarm valve station is opened either by an automatic fire detection system or by the operation of the sprinklers. Independently of the response of the detectors, a pressure drop in the pipework causes the opening of the alarm valve. The pipework downstream of the alarm valve stations of dry pipe installations shall be dimensioned such that a charging time of 90 s is met by installations with a design density of ≤ 5 mm/min and 60 s by installations with a higher design density. Charging time is the time between opening and water discharge at the test facility at the end of the pipework. In multi-storey buildings not more than one storey shall be connected to an alarm valve station. Note: Type B pre-action installations may be installed wherever a dry pipe system is called for and the spread of fire is expected to be rapid, e.g. in high-rack storage. They may also be used instead of ordinary dry pipe systems with or without an accelerator or exhauster.

10.4.2


The sprinklers shall be installed in the upright position or as dry pendent sprinklers.

10.4.3

Automatic detection system

The detection system shall be installed in all rooms and compartments protected by the pre-action sprinkler system and shall comply with the relevant parts of EN 54 as well as VdS 2095, VdS Guidelines for automatic fire detection and fire alarm systems, planning and installation, VdS 2496, VdS Guidelines for the triggering of fire extinguishing systems.

10.4.4


The number of sprinklers to be controlled by a pre-action alarm valve shall not exceed that shown in Table 10.01.

87


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

10.5

Subsidiary dry pipe or alternate extensions

10.5.1

General

Subsidiary dry pipe or alternate extensions shall be as specified in 10.2 and 10.3 except that they will be of limited extent and form extensions to standard wet pipe installations. They shall be installed only as follows: a) as a dry pipe or alternate extension to a wet pipe installation in small areas where there is possible frost damage in an otherwise adequately heated building; b) as a dry pipe extension to a wet pipe or alternate installation in cold stores and high temperature ovens or drying rooms.

10.5.2


Sprinklers in a subsidiary shall be fitted in the upright position where there is a possibility of frost damage, except where dry pendent pattern sprinklers are used.

10.5.3

Size of subsidiary extensions

The number of sprinklers on any subsidiary extension shall not exceed 100. Where more than two subsidiary extensions are controlled by one alarm valve, the total number of sprinklers in the subsidiary extensions shall not exceed 250.

10.6

Subsidiary multiple control valve

Sprinkler system extension controlled by multiple control valve utilising sprinklers or sprayers connected to a sprinkler installation via their own actuation valve (or multiple control valve). Water spray extensions may be connected to a sprinkler installation, provided that the connection is not greater than DN 80 and that the additional water demand is taken into consideration when designing the water supplies (see Clause 7). These installations are installed where there are expected to be intensive fires with a very fast rate of fire spread and where it is desirable to apply water over a complete area in which a fire may originate and spread.

11

Spacing and location of sprinklers

11.1

General

11.1.1 All measurements of sprinkler spacing shall be taken in the horizontal plane except where otherwise specified in these Guidelines. In high rooms the sprinkler installation may not be able to provide adequate protection. Therefore, the sprinkler spacing to the floor shall not exceed 15 m, except in rack storage with sprinkler protection in intermediate levels. Any larger spacing shall be agreed with the authorities.

88

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


11.1.2 A clear space shall always be maintained below the deflector of roof and ceiling sprinklers of at least: −

0,5 m for LH and OH except for suspended open ceilings;

−

0,8 m for suspended open ceilings;

−

1,0 m for HHP and HHS.

11.1.3 Sprinklers shall be installed upright, pendent or horizontal as specified by the manufacturer. The spacing of upright sprinklers from the upper edge of the pipe to the deflector with pipes > DN 65 shall be at least 1,5 times the pipe diameter.

11.2

Maximum area per sprinkler

The maximum area of coverage per sprinkler shall be as given in Table 11.01 for sprinklers other than sidewall and in Table 11.02 for sidewall sprinklers. Hazard class

Maximum area per sprinkler

Maximum spacings in Figure 11.01 (m)

m²

Standard layout

Staggered layout

S

D

S

D

m

m

m

m

4,6

4,6

6,1

6,1

LH

21,0

OH

12,0

4,0

4,0

5,0

5,0

HHP and HHS

9,0

3,75

3,75

4,4

4,4

Table 11.01: Maximum coverage and spacing for sprinklers other than sidewall

0,25 S

0,5 S S

0,75 S S S

S 0,5 S

0,5 S D

D

0,5 D

0,5 D

0,5 D

D

D

0,5 D

Figure 11.01: Ceiling sprinkler spacing

89


Hazard Maximum area per class sprinkler

LH

OH

Spacing along walls

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Room width (w)

Room length (l)

Rows of side wall sprinklers

Spacing pattern (horizontal plane)

between sprinklers

sprinkler to end of wall

m²

m

m

m

m

17,0

4,6

2,3

w ≤ 3,7

any

1

single line

3,7 < w ≤ 7,4

≤ 9,2

2

standard

> 9,2

2

staggered

w >7,4

any

w ≤ 3,7

any

3,7 < w ≤ 7,4

≤ 6,8

2

standard

> 6,8

2

staggered

9,0

2)

3,4

1,8

w > 7,4

2

1)

1

2

1)

standard single line

standard

1) An additional row or rows of roof or ceiling sprinklers is/are needed. 2) May be increased to 3,7 m provided the ceiling has a fire resistance of not less than 120 minutes (see Annex R, Table R.6). Notes: The sprinkler deflectors shall be located between 0,1 m and 0,15 m below the ceiling and between 0,05 m and 0,15 m horizontally from the wall. There shall be no obstruction at the ceiling within a square extending along the wall 1,0 m on each side of the sprinkler and 1,8 m perpendicular to the wall. Where beams or girders occur, the bays thus formed shall be protected separately.

Table 11.02: Maximum coverage and spacing for sidewall sprinklers

11.3

Minimum distance between sprinklers

Sprinklers shall not be installed at intervals less than 2 m except in the following cases: −

where arrangements are made to prevent adjacent sprinklers from wetting each other, e.g. with horizontal baffles;

−

intermediate sprinklers in racks (11.5.3 and 11.6.1.4).

−

For sprinklers in ceiling openings 11.4.10 applies.

11.4

Location of sprinklers in relation to building, facilities and equipment

11.4.1

Distance from walls

The maximum distance from walls and partitions to the sprinklers shall be the smallest value applicable from the following list: −

2,0 m for standard spacing;

−

2,3 m for staggered spacing;

−

1,5 m where the ceiling or roof is open joisted or the rafters are exposed;

−

1,5 m from the open face of open faced buildings.

The distance to the wall shall not fall below 0,1 m.

90

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

11.4.2


Distance from ceiling

Sprinklers shall wherever possible be situated with the deflector between 0,075 m and 0,15 m below the ceiling or roof except when they are fitted in false ceilings. Where this is not practicable sprinklers may be installed at lower levels provided that the figures given in 11.4.6 are adhered to and that the height b is the maximum possible. Sprinklers shall never be installed lower than 0,3 m below the underside of ceilings made of combustible materials or 0,45 m below roofs or ceilings made of non-combustible materials. Where circumstances make it unavoidable to use the maximum distances of 0,3 m and 0,45 m, the area involved shall be as small as possible. In the case of trapezoidal roofs the minimum sprinkler distance to the ceiling shall be measured from the lowest part of the crimp and for the maximum distance from the centre between lowest and highest part of the crimp. Where ceilings are divided into bays by transverse and longitudinal joists and inside these bays the minimum distances to the joists in accordance with 11.4.6 cannot be adhered to, sprinklers shall be installed in all bays. In this case all sprinklers shall be located centrally between the joists. Where a smoke-proof space is formed in ribbed or joisted ceilings, whose width (dimension between axes) does not exceed 2 m and whose length does not exceed 25 m, the sprinkler distance to the ceiling may exceed that specified above. The sprinklers shall then extend into the space in their overall height in accordance with Table 11.03. If the space is not smoke-proof or longer than 25 m, the ceiling distances shall be adhered to.

11.4.3

Slope of rooms

Sprinklers shall be installed with their deflectors parallel to the slope of the roof or ceiling. Where the slope is greater than 30° a row of sprinklers shall be fixed at the apex or not more than 0,75 m radially therefrom. Note 1: With a roof slope < 30° the sprinklers shall be positioned such that the maximum admissible ceiling distance is kept even to the apex. Note 2: Table 11.03 and Clause 11.4.6 do not apply to sprinklers fixed at the apex.

11.4.4

Canopies

The distance from the edge of a canopy to the sprinklers shall not exceed 1,5m.

11.4.5

Skylights

Skylights with a volume greater than 1 m3 measured above the normal ceiling level shall be sprinkler protected unless the distance from the normal ceiling level to the top of the skylight does not exceed 0,3 m, or there is a tight fitting frame and glass fitted level with the roof or ceiling. It would be adequate to protect a skylight of 7 m2 maximum and a height of 1,5 m by ceiling sprinklers with a sensitivity that is at least one class higher than required by these Guidelines for the respective risk.

91


11.4.6

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Beams, joists, etc.

When the deflector is positioned above the level of the underside of beams or joists etc., the dimensions of 11.4.2, Figure 11.02 and Table 11.03 shall be observed in order to ensure that effective discharge of the sprinklers is not impaired or else the beam shall be protected on either side as though it were a wall.

d b

a

Figure 11.02: Sprinkler location relative to beams and joists

Figure 11.03: Diagram of sprinkler location in roof trusses

92

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


The distance from girders or beams to the sprinklers shall be at least 0,2 m, or alternatively sprinklers may be positioned directly above a girder or beam non wider than 0,2m at a vertical distance of at least 0,15 m.

11.4.7

Roof trusses

Sprinklers shall be located at least 0,3 m laterally from truss members which are no more than 0,1 m wide. If the width is greater than 0,1 m the minimum lateral distance shall be 0,6 m. Alternatively sprinklers may be positioned directly above a truss no wider than 0,2 m at a vertical distance of at least 0,15 m.

11.4.8

Columns

If roof or ceiling sprinklers are placed closer than 0,6 m to one side of a column, another sprinkler shall be placed within 2 m from the column on the opposite side. Minimum horizontal distance from sprinkler vertical axis to side of beam or joist (a in Figure 11.02)

Maximum height of sprinkler deflector above (+) or below (-) bottom of beam or joist (b in Figure 11.02) m

Conventional sprinkler

Spray sprinkler

Flat spray sprinkler

Upright

Pendent

Upright

Pendent

0,20

-0,20

not allowed

not allowed

not allowed

0,40

0,00

not allowed

0,00

0,00

0,60

0,03

not allowed

0,02

0,06

-0,044

0,80

0,06

not allowed

0,03

0,12

-0,020

1,00

0,10

-0,20

0,05

0,20

0,004

1,20

0,15

-0,17

0,10

0,28

0,028

1,40

0,19

-0,12

0,13

0,36

0,052

1,60

0,26

-0,03

0,16

0,47

0,076

1,80

0,39

0,17

0,18

0,67

0,100

m

not allowed

Note: Dimensions may be interpolated

Table 11.03: Sprinkler location relative to beams or joists

93


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

0,7

Minimum horizontal distance from vertical sprinkler axis to maximum height of sprinkler deflector above (+) or below (-) bottom of beam or joist (b in Figure 11.02)

0,6 0,5 Standard sprinkler upright Standardsprinkler pendent Spray sprinkler upright Spray sprinkler pendent Flat spray sprinkler

0,4 0,3 0,2 0,1 0 -0,1 -0,2 0

0,25

0,5

0,75

1

1,25

1,5

1,75

2

Lateral surface of beams and joists (a in Figure 11.02)

Figure 11.04: Sprinkler distances to joists and other elements

11.4.9

Platforms, landings, mezzanines, ducts etc.

Sprinklers shall be provided under platforms, landings, mezzanines, ducts, heating panels, galleries, walkways etc. which are impermeable to water and: a) rectangular, more than 0,8 m wide and less than 0,15 m from adjacent walls or partitions; b) rectangular and more than 1,0 m wide; c) circular, more than 1,0 m in diameter and less than 0,15 m from adjacent walls or partitions; d) circular and more than 1,2 m in diameter. Design density and area of operation for the sprinklers underneath the platform shall be in accordance with Cl. 6 and with the respective application. For 11.4.9.1 and 11.4.9.2 no reduction of the sprinklers to be considered for hydraulic calculation in accordance with G.3.1 can be applied. 11.4.9.1 Platforms, landings, mezzanines, etc. with LH and OH risks The number of sprinklers shall be increased around the edge of the platform in accordance with 11.4.10. The distances between sprinklers shall not exceed 2 m or fall below 1,5 m. If the minimum distance of 1,5 m cannot be observed due to constructional reasons such as beams, smaller distances will be possible, provided that adjacent sprinklers cannot spray each other. The horizontal distance between the sprinklers and the edge of the platform shall not exceed 0,5 m. The sprinklers in the platform edge area shall be capable of supplying the minimum flow rate of the sprinklers in the rest of the area. For hydraulic calculation only the sprinklers located at the longer edge of the platform need be considered.

94

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


11.4.9.2 Platforms, landings, mezzanines, etc. with HH risks For dimensioning the pipework, the area of operation underneath each platform shall be in accordance with the respective fire hazard class, unless the platform is smaller than the area of operation. In a second calculation the water supply is designed. If the maximum storage height requires no higher design density than 10 mm/min, 45 m² per level shall be considered in addition to the area of operation with the highest water rate (e.g. for ceiling protection of the building), in any case not less than 90 m². If the design density exceeds 10 mm/min, 90 m² in addition to the area of operation with the highest water rate (e.g. for ceiling protection of the building) shall be considered.

11.4.10 Escalators and stair wells The number of sprinklers shall be increased around the ceiling opening formed by escalators, stairs etc. Sprinklers shall not be more than 2 m nor less than 1,5 m away from each other. If, owing to the design of the structure, e.g. girders, the minimum distance of 1,5 m cannot be maintained, smaller spacing may be used provided adjacent sprinklers are not able to wet each other. The horizontal distance between the sprinklers and the opening in the ceiling shall not exceed 0,5 m. If the allowable distance between sprinkler and ceiling is exceeded (e.g. in the case of joists), these sprinklers shall be installed in addition to the sprinklers for ceiling protection. The sprinklers in the region of the opening shall be capable of providing the minimum flow rate for sprinklers in the rest of the ceiling protection. For hydraulic calculation purposes, only the sprinklers on the longer side of the opening need be considered.

11.4.11 Vertical shafts and chutes At least one sprinkler shall be installed at the top of all shafts except where the shaft is inaccessible and made of non-combustible materials and contains no combustible materials except electrical cabling. Note: The maximum permitted fire load acc. 4.1.1 n) relating to the cross sectional area of the shaft shall not be exceeded. In shafts with combustible surfaces, sprinklers shall be installed at each alternate floor level and at the top of any trapped section.

11.4.12 Ceiling obstructions The use of suspended ceiling material below the sprinklers is not allowed unless the material has been shown not to impair sprinkler protection. Where sprinklers are fitted below suspended ceilings, the ceiling material shall be of a type which has been shown not to be subject to partial collapse under incipient fire conditions.

95


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

11.4.13 Suspended open ceilings Suspended open ceilings, i.e. ceilings having a regular open cell construction recurring throughout their design, may be used beneath LH and OH sprinkler systems not involving storage areas where the following conditions are met: −

the ceiling – not the suspended open ceiling – shall be made of non-combustible materials;

−

the total plan open area of the suspended open ceiling, including light fittings, shall not be less than 70% of the ceiling plan area;

−

the minimum dimension of the ceiling openings shall be no less than 0,025 m or no less than the vertical thickness of the suspended ceilings, whichever is the greater;

−

the structural integrity of the ceiling and any other equipment, such as light fittings within the volume above the suspended ceiling, shall not be affected by operation of the sprinkler system.

Sprinklers shall be installed as follows: −

sprinkler spacing above the ceiling shall not exceed 3 m;

−

vertical separation between any conventional or spray sprinkler deflector and the top of the suspended ceiling shall not be less than 0,8 m. This distance may be reduced to 0,3 m if flat spray sprinklers are used;

−

supplementary sprinklers shall be provided to discharge below light fittings or similar obstructions exceeding 0,8 m in width.

Where obstructions within the ceiling void are likely to cause significant interference of the water discharge they shall be treated as walls for the purpose of sprinkler spacing.

11.4.14 Drying ovens and extraction hoods Drying ovens, extraction hoods and similar equipment shall be protected from the inside. Sprinklers outside this equipment within a radius of 3 m shall have the same nominal operating temperature as the sprinklers inside, but 141 °C maximum.

11.4.15 Vertical voids Vertical voids (e.g. wall or façade voids) more than 100 mm in depth, which are limited by vertical combustible materials and have an expansion of more than 100 m², shall be sprinklered.

11.4.16 Cold rooms Cold rooms shall be protected by dry sprinklers. If dry pendent sprinklers are connected to a wet pipe system, 10.2.2 shall be complied with. The connections of the dry sprinklers shall extend into the tempered area by 0,5 m minimum.

96

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


11.4.17 False ceilings and false floors False floors ≤ 500 mm in height shall be protected by quick response flat spray sprinklers; for higher false floors spray sprinklers shall be used. The arrangement of sprinklers in voids shall disregard the combustibility of the false ceilings. The protection areas of sprinklers in voids may be as follows, regardless of 5.4: -

21 m² in voids > 1 m height with non-combustible ceilings

-

15 m² in voids > 1 m height with combustible ceilings

-

12 m² in voids > 0,5 m and ≤ 1 m

-

9 m² in voids ≥ 0,3 m and ≤ 0,5 m

In voids < 0,3 m the protection area shall be agreed with VdS.

11.4.18 Protection of cable trays This clause only applies to cable trays located above, beside or up to a vertical distance of 500 mm under the ceiling sprinklers or sprinklers in false ceilings. If the sprinklers are installed above the cable trays, any possible obstructions resulting from this shall be taken into account. For the protection of the cable tray with a fire load between 7 kWh/m and 21 kWh/m the ceiling protection sprinklers or sprinklers in false ceilings can be used, provided that the adjacent sprinkler row does not exceed a distance between ceiling and deflector of 150 mm. The sprinklers shall be arranged such that the horizontal distance from the centre of the cable tray to the sprinkler does not exceed half the allowable sprinkler distance. Above 21 kWh/m additional sprinklers shall be installed for protecting the cable tray. The requirements of G 3.1 shall be fulfilled. With cable trays the following cases shall be considered: Note: The cable fire load shall be calculated in accordance with Annex S.

Case 1: Fire load ≥ 7 kWh/m

Case 2: Fire load ≥ 21 kWh/m

max. 0,15 m Max. half the allowable sprinkler distance The sprinklers shall be installed ≤ 0,15 m under the ceiling in the cable tray area

Ceiling protection The cable tray shall be protected by additional sprinklers

97


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

11.5

Intermediate sprinklers in High Hazard occupancies

11.5.1

General

Sprinklers protecting double row racks shall be positioned in the longitudinal flues, preferably in the intersection with transverse flues (see Figures 11.07 and 11.08). Up to a flue width of 700 mm the sprinklers may be positioned in the longitudinal flues. If the flues are wider than this, the sprinklers shall be positioned in the rack. The protection of small parts rack storage in accordance with 11.5 shall be agreed with VdS. Sprinklers positioned outside of racks shall – as illustrated in Figure 11.05 – by no means be further away from the nearer outer edge of the storage than 350 mm and not further away from the further outer edge than 1600 mm. Border case = 1.600 = 350

= 700

= 3.200

Flue width > 700mm Sprinkler in rack = 350

> 700

B/2

B/2

= 350

B = 700

Figure 11.05: Sprinkler layout in relation to flue width Note: Exceptions are racks between 3,2 m and 6,4 m in depth with only one longitudinal flue. Whenever any rack or structural steelwork is likely to interfere significantly with the water discharge from the sprinklers, additional sprinklers shall be provided and taken into account in the flow calculation. Note: For the number of sprinklers required see 6.2.3.3. With a horizontal sprinkler spacing of less than 1,2 m additional sprinklers are not required, provided that a staggered sprinkler spacing ensures the water discharge in each flue.

98

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


Obstruction (e.g. rack support)

≤ 1,2 m

≤ 1,2 m

Figure 11.06 Abandonment of additional sprinklers with horizontal sprinkler spacing ≤ 1,2 m It shall be ensured that water from sprinklers operating at intermediate levels can penetrate the goods stored. The distance between goods stored in racking and placed back to back shall be at least 0,15 m, and if necessary pallet stops should be fitted. There shall be a clearance of at least 0,15 m from the sprinkler deflectors to the top of the storage. Note: Regarding flat spray sprinklers see 12.2.4.

11.5.2

Maximum vertical distance between sprinklers at intermediate levels

The vertical distance from the floor to the lowest intermediate level and between levels shall not exceed 3,50 m or two tiers, whichever is the lesser, as shown in Figures 11.07 and 11.08. An intermediate level shall be installed above the top level of storage except where all the roof or ceiling sprinklers are situated at less than 4 m above the top of the storage. Alternatively, this may be compensated by a design density at the ceiling increased by 2,5 mm/min. Above 5 m distance an additional increase by 1 mm/min per metre or part thereof is sufficient. In no case shall the highest level of intermediate sprinklers be installed lower than one tier level below the top of the storage.

99


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Figure 11.07: Location of rack intermediate level sprinklers Category I or II goods

100

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


Figure 11.08: Location of rack intermediate level sprinklers Category III or IV goods

11.5.3

Horizontal position of sprinklers at intermediate levels

In the case of Category I or II goods, sprinklers shall where possible be installed in the longitudinal flue at the intersection with every second transverse flue, with the sprinklers staggered with respect to the next highest row (see Figure 11.07). The horizontal distance between sprinklers shall not exceed 3,75 m and the product of the horizontal distance and the vertical distance between sprinklers shall not exceed 9,8 m². In the case of Category III or IV goods, sprinklers shall be installed in the longitudinal flue at the intersection with each transverse flue (see Figure 11.08). The horizontal distance between sprinklers shall not exceed 1,9 m and the product of the horizontal distance and the vertical distance between sprinklers shall not exceed 4,9 m². Where the horizontal distance between two sprinklers falls below 2 m, appropriate provision shall be made to prevent sprinklers from wetting each other.

11.5.4

Numbers of rows of sprinklers at each level

The number of sprinkler rows per level shall be determined by the total width. When racking is placed back to back the total width shall be calculated by adding together the width of each rack and the distance between them. One row of sprinklers per level shall be installed for every 3,2 m of rack width. They shall be installed in the flues wherever possible.

101


11.5.5

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

HHS intermediate sprinklers in non-shelved racks

Intermediate sprinklers shall be provided for palletised rack storage and multiple row drive through storage (see type ST4 in Table 6.02): a) single row racks not more than 1,6 m wide shall be protected by single rows of sprinklers fitted on the side of the stack not used for access as shown in Figures 11.05 and 11.06; Note: Such racks are generally positioned against walls. The sprinkler rows shall by no means be fitted on the side of the stack used for access. With racks more than 1,6m wide the sprinklers shall be positioned in the racks. b) double row racks not more than 3,2 m wide shall be protected by sprinklers positioned centrally in the longitudinal flues, at the stack ends, and at the tier levels shown in Figures 11.05 and 11.06; c) double or multiple row racks more than 3,2 m wide, but not more than 6,4 m wide shall be protected by two rows of sprinklers installed not more than 3,2 m apart; each row shall have the same distance from the nearest shelf edge. The sprinklers at a particular level in each line shall be located in the same set of transverse flues. In each double or multiple row rack sprinklers shall be installed in each middle flue (longitudinal flue). The detailed design shall be agreed with VdS Schadenverhütung. The following figures show examples for Categories I and II as well as Categories III and IV.

Figure 11.09: Sprinkler layout at intermediate levels of multiple row racks – Materials of Category I or II For the hydraulic calculation 27 sprinklers maximum shall be considered. With more than 3 middle flues (longitudinal flues) this layout is extended accordingly.

102

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


Figure 11.10: Sprinkler layout at intermediate levels of multiple row racks – Materials of Category III or IV For the hydraulic calculation 27 sprinklers maximum shall be considered. With more than 3 middle flues (longitudinal flues) this layout is extended accordingly. Where any rack or structural steelwork could significantly interfere with the water distribution from a sprinkler, an additional sprinkler shall be provided. Rack sprinklers shall be fitted with water shields to prevent them from wetting each other. The water shields shall be fitted directly to the sprinklers.

11.5.6

HHS intermediate sprinklers below solid or slatted shelves in racks (ST5 and ST6)

Intermediate sprinklers shall be provided underneath each shelf (including the top shelf if the roof or ceiling sprinklers are more than 4 m above the goods or water access to the goods is restricted), and located as shown in Table 11.04 and Figure 11.11. The vertical distance between rows shall not exceed 3,5 m. Single rows of sprinklers shall be positioned centrally underneath the shelves. Double rows of sprinklers shall be positioned so that each row has the same distance from the nearest shelf edge. The distance from the end of the shelf parallel to the branch pipe lines to the nearest sprinkler shall be half the sprinkler spacing along the branch lines or 1,6 m, whichever is the smaller.

103


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Shelf width s

Rows of sprinklers

Maximum distance between sprinklers along rows

Maximum distance between rows of sprinklers

Minimum clearance between sprinkler deflector in any row and storage immediately below

m

n

m

m

m

s<1

1

2,8

-

0,15

1
1

2,8

-

0,15

3
2

2,8

2,8

0,15

Note: Regarding flat spray sprinklers see 12.2.4.

Table 11.04: Location of intermediate sprinklers in type ST5 and ST6 storage

Figure 11.11: Location of intermediate sprinklers in type ST5 and ST6 storage In racks with solid shelves or walls accessible via grid platforms or solid shelves in several tiers, sprinklers shall be arranged underneath each grid platform. With an aisle width up to 1,4 m sprinklers may be positioned in mid-aisle with a maximum horizontal spacing of 2,5 m. With an aisle width > 1,4 m two sprinkler rows with staggered layout shall be positioned in the aisle near the racks. The horizontal sprinkler spacing shall not exceed 5m, and the protection area of the sprinklers shall not be exceeded. The a.m. requirements apply to solid platforms with fixtures impermeable to water, such as platforms and mezzanines.

104

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


11.6

Alternative protection concept for “rack storage and high rack storage”

11.6.1

Rack storage and high rack storage

11.6.1.1

Rating basis

High rack storage systems according to these Guidelines are racks with a storage height of more than 7,5 m in HHS1 to HHS3 and more than 4,4 m in HHS4. The maximum storage heights for rack storage (in accordance with Table 6.02) are the threshold values for effective sprinkler protection with ceiling sprinklers. For storage heights exceeding these threshold values rack sprinklers shall be installed in tiers in addition to the ceiling sprinklers. 11.6.1.2

Spacing of tier levels

The distance between the tier levels of the rack sprinklers shall be the distance between the deflectors of the sprinklers. The following maximum vertical distances shall not be exceeded: −

HHS1

5,0 m

−

HHS2

4,0 m

−

HHS3

3,5 m

−

HHS4

2,0 m

On the lowest tier level measurements shall be taken from the floor to the sprinkler deflectors. If a free space (access level) is available on the lowest tier level, which may not be used for storage purposes, the maximum vertical distance may be exceeded by 5%. Design density, horizontal sprinkler arrangement, etc. shall be in accordance with the effective distance. On the top tier level measurements shall be taken from the top of the storage to the deflectors of the tier level below. If these values cannot be complied with, any details of the protection concept shall be agreed with VdS.

105


11.6.1.3

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Design density

With rack protection in accordance with 11.6 for ST4, ST5 and ST6 the rack sprinklers may have the following design density depending on the storage height: Category

Storage height in m


ST4, ST5, ST6

in mm/min

HHS1

4,0

5,0

HHS1

5,0

6,8

HHS2

3,1

5,0

HHS2

4,0

7,5

HHS3

2,1

5,0

HHS3

2,9

7,5

HHS3

3,5

10,0

HHS4

1,2

5,0

HHS4

1,6

7,5

HHS4

2,0

10,0

Table 11.05: Design criteria for rack sprinklers Any systems shall be fully calculated. An interpolation of the values is possible. The design density calculated for rack sprinklers positioned in tier levels results from the distances between these levels in accordance with Table 11.05. In accordance with Table 11.05 the design density of ceiling sprinklers shall be calculated for the highest storage height above the topmost sprinkler tier level (7,5 mm/min minimum). 11.6.1.4

Area of operation, sprinkler arrangement

The area of operation of each tier level shall be assumed to be 45 m². Irrespective of the effective rack dimensions a rack length of 14 m with a theoretical depth of 3,2 m shall be assumed. Even if the effective depth falls below 3,2 m, the flow rates of rack sprinklers shall be calculated based on the theoretical depth. If the longitudinal flue between double row racks falls below 100 mm, the rack sprinkler arrangement shall be agreed with VdS. In the case of rack depths greater than 3,2 m at least 2 sprinkler rows shall be installed per rack level. The rack area of operation of 90 m² is a product of 14 m rack length and a theoretical rack depth of 6,4 m. The middle flue shall be protected as well. The area of operation of ceiling sprinklers shall be assumed to be 300 m² if the total storage height requires a higher design density than 17,5 mm/min. Area of operation: HHS1………………9,7 m HHS2………………7,5 m HHS3………………5,2 m HHS4………………3,0 m

106

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


The sprinklers on each tier level shall be installed staggered. The rack sprinklers shall, on principle, be arranged such that they protect as many vertical flues as possible. If sheet barriers are fitted above each sprinkler level, a staggered layout will not be required. The horizontal sprinkler spacing in the rack depends on both rack construction and platform assembly. The maximum distance on one sprinkler level is 2,5 m. If in the case of a staggered sprinkler layout the maximum permitted vertical distance between the sprinkler levels is fallen below, the horizontal sprinkler spacing may be increased in direct relation of the maximum permitted tier level distance to the selected tier level distance. However, the horizontal sprinkler spacing shall not exceed 4,0 m. With a sprinkler spacing of ≤ 1,5 m an installation is possible irrespective of the flues. The sprinklers on the sprinkler levels shall be installed staggered. Example: In HHS3 risks the distance between two sprinkler levels shall not exceed 3,5 m. If the effective distance is 2,3 m, the maximum horizontal sprinkler spacing will be calculated as follows:

2,5m ⋅ 3,5m = 3,8m 2,3m With three sprinkler levels or more each flue shall be protected on one level minimum, depending on the number of levels. The maximum permitted vertical sprinkler spacing shall be as follows: HHS1……………10,5 m HHS2……………..8,0 m HHS3……………..7,0 m HHS4……………..6,0 m The vertical distance between sprinkler deflector and upper edge of stored goods shall be at least 150 mm. This space shall not be impaired by the rack construction. The sprinkler brackets shall be positioned lengthwise of the rack. The sprinkler deflector shall be positioned at the same height or below adjacent obstructions; in the case of manual loading of racks pendent sprinklers may be installed not more than 5 mm higher (measured to the deflector). Note: Rack deflection in the loaded condition shall be taken into account. Where the horizontal distance between two sprinklers falls below 2 m, appropriate measures shall be taken to prevent the sprinklers from wetting each other. The number of tier levels to be taken into consideration for hydraulic calculation purposes and the size of the ceiling area of operation may be reduced by the measures specified below, only if no spray cans or flammable liquids are stored. In the case of rack systems with more than four tier levels in which the horizontal sprinkler spacing falls below 2,5 m, the number of tier levels to be taken into consideration may be calculated as follows.

107


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Note: The horizontal sprinkler spacing is calculated by dividing the rack length by the number of sprinklers of one row; double sprinklers count as one sprinkler. In the case of different numbers of sprinklers per row the average value shall be used.

N Z = N ges ⋅

x 2,5m

with: NZ

being the number of sprinkler tier levels to be taken into consideration;

Nges

being the total number of sprinkler tier levels;

x

being the average horizontal sprinkler spacing in the tier levels in m.

If the result of the calculation is not a whole number, the result shall be rounded up to the nearest whole number. For rack protection purposes four sprinkler tier levels minimum shall be taken into consideration. The area of operation for each tier level shall be assumed to be 45 m² or 90 m². The area of operation for ceiling sprinklers in wet pipe systems shall be assumed to be 300 m², provided that the total storage height requires a design density exceeding 17,5 mm/min. If the horizontal sprinkler spacing falls below 2,5 m and if horizontal sheet barriers are fitted above all sprinkler levels in the rack, the hydraulic calculation shall only be based on the ceiling area of operation and on the areas of operation of the two hydraulically most unfavourable tier levels in the rack. The supply pipes for rack protection shall be dimensioned by assuming that the sprinklers in the four most unfavourable tier levels will open. The sheet barriers shall be installed immediately above a sprinkler level and fulfil the following requirements: −

if the stored goods protrude over the rack, the sheet barrier shall lead at least to the edge of the stored goods;

−

they shall be made of sheet steel. If other non-combustible materials are to be used, authorisation shall be obtained from VdS;

−

horizontal sheet barriers shall not have gaps wider than 10 mm with rack elements leading through them;

−

the sum of all opening areas in a sheet barrier shall not exceed 5% of the total area;

−

racks positioned closer than 700 mm to the wall shall have barriers leading to the wall and sprinklers installed in the rack.

Note: If “Omega profiles” or similar profiles are used, it will not be necessary to provide a sheet inside the profiles (see Figure 11.12).

108

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Omega profile

gap 10cm max.


sheet barrier

Figure 11.12: Omega profile If another sprinkler level and horizontal sheet barrier is fitted above the topmost stored goods (see Figure 11.13) the ceiling area of operation may be reduced to 150 m². Above the sheet barrier no storage is permitted.

sheet barrier sheet capping

ceiling area of operation 150m² min.

stored goods

≈

≈

Figure 11.13: Sheet barrier and sprinkler level above topmost stored goods 11.6.1.5

Additional sprinklers due to obstructions to spray

Obstructions caused by the rack construction shall be compensated by additional sprinklers. These sprinklers shall also be designed for the flow rate required. 11.6.1.6

Sprinkler layout in single racks at building wall

If the rack or pallets protruding from the rack is/are positioned at a distance of more than 0,7 m to the building wall or another rack, sprinklers shall be installed mid-rack. If the rack or pallets protruding from the rack is/are positioned at a distance of ≤ 0,7 m to the building wall, the following will apply: −

with rack and pallet widths ≤ 1,6 m and one pallet only, sprinklers shall be installed outside the rack between rack and building wall. With two pallets in a row the sprinkler layout shall be agreed with the authorities;

−

with rack or pallet widths > 1,6 m and mixed occupancy (one or two pallets in a row) on each sprinkler level, sprinklers shall be installed mid-rack and additionally outside the rack between rack and building wall.

109


11.6.1.7

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Choice of sprinkler system

Wet pipe systems should be used. If a backed-up power supply is required and the danger of frost cannot be excluded, a pre-action system type B (quick dry pipe system) shall be installed instead of a dry pipe system. The ceiling area of operation shall be increased by 25% compared to that of wet pipe systems. 11.6.1.8

Water supply

The capacity of the extinguishing water storage tank (with full storage) shall be calculated based on the water quantity of the hydraulic calculation. The following formula may be used to estimate the required capacity:

V = 0,09 ⋅ ( A ⋅ B + R ⋅ C ⋅ D) ⋅ 1,4 V = capacity in m³ A = scheduled water design density at the ceiling in mm/min (Table 11.05, 7,5 mm/min minimum) B = area of operation at the ceiling in m² C = number of sprinkler tier levels D = required design density in the sprinkler tier levels in mm/min (acc. Table 11.05 ≥ 5 mm/min) R = rack area of operation in m² 11.6.1.9

Private reservoirs

The water capacity of private reservoirs shall provide an operating time of the sprinkler system (without pressure tank) of not less than 10 min. 11.6.1.10 Power supply For sprinkler systems in high rack storage with more than 80 sprinklers the power supply shall be backed up. 11.6.1.11 Monitoring The sprinkler system shall be monitored if the system requires a backed up power supply. 11.6.1.12 Operating time The operating time of the sprinkler system may be reduced from 90 min to 60 min, if the horizontal sprinkler spacing in the rack falls below 2,5 m and “special” or “quick” response sprinklers are installed for ceiling protection. This does not apply to the storage of spray cans or flammable liquids. In the case of more than one sprinkler row per level and staggered sprinkler layout on the branches of one level the spacing of 2,5 m refers to the nearest sprinkler on the adjacent branch. The maximum sprinkler spacing of 4 m per branch shall not be exceeded for reduction purposes.

110

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

11.6.2


Fixtures impermeable to water such as rack shelves

11.6.2.1

General

In racks with depths between > 1,2 m and < 3,2 m the sprinklers shall be installed staggered at both outsides of the racks. The distance between sprinkler and outer edge of the rack shall not exceed 100 mm. The vertical and horizontal sprinkler spacing shall be the same as for small parts rack storage. This concept may also be used with racks < 1,2 m in depth. Apart from these sprinklers, racks > 3,2 m in depth shall also have midrack sprinklers. Maximum vertical sprinkler spacing in racks with shelves impermeable to water: HHS1………………….4 m HHS2………………….3,1 m HHS3………………….2,1 m HHS4………………….1,2 m The horizontal distance between the sprinklers of one intermediate level shall not exceed 4,0 m. The vertical distance between sprinkler deflector and upper edge of stored goods shall be at least 150 mm. The design discharge of the sprinklers at intermediate levels are calculated from the rack or landing depth (calculationally at least 3,2 m) multiplied by the sprinkler distance and the design density. The areas of operation at intermediate levels are calculated from the rack or landing length (calculationally 14 m max.) multiplied by the rack depth (calculationally at least 3,2 m or 6,4 m). If the maximum possible storage height between two sprinkler levels falls below the maximum storage height (4 m for HHS1; 3,1 m for HHS2; 2,1 m for HHS3 and 1,2 m for HHS4), the calculation of the water supply can be based on an ideal number of levels. The ideal number of levels is calculated as follows:

nE =

Y h

nE

= number of intermediate levels to be considered hydraulically

Y

= total storage height of rack in m

h

= maximum storage height (4 m for HHS1; 3,1 m for HHS2; 2,1 m for HHS3 and 1,2 m for HHS4)

If the horizontal sprinkler distance is reduced below 2,5 m, the number of intermediate levels to be considered for hydraulic calculation can be determined on the basis of 11.6.1.4. If the shelves impermeable to water fulfil the requirements for barriers in accordance with 11.6.1.4, this clause can be applied to determine the size of the area of operation. It is necessary to install a sprinkler level under each rack shelf impermeable to water.

111


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

With the additional installation of a sheet barrier above the upper sprinkler intermediate level (see Figure 11.13) the ceiling area of operation may be reduced to 150 m². 11.6.2.2

Small parts racks

In small parts rack storage the storage height between two sprinkler levels shall not exceed 3 m in HHS1 to HHS3 and 2 m in HHS4. The horizontal sprinkler spacing shall not exceed 2,5 m. 11.6.2.3

Racks with solid shelves and grid platforms

Racks with solid shelves or walls accessible via grid platforms at several levels, shall have sprinklers fitted underneath each grid platform. Up to a flue width of 1,4 m the sprinklers in the flue centre may be arranged at a maximum horizontal distance of 2,5 m. With a flue width > 1,4 m two sprinkler rows with staggered sprinkler layout shall be provided in the flue near the racks. The horizontal sprinkler distance shall be 5 m max., the area per sprinkler, however, shall not be exceeded.

12

Sprinkler design characteristics and uses

12.1

General

Only new, approved sprinklers shall be used. They shall not be painted except by the original manufacturer. They shall not be altered in any respect or have any type of ornamentation or coating applied after despatch from the production factory, except as specified in 12.9.

12.2

Sprinkler types and application

12.2.1

General

Sprinklers shall be used for the various hazard classes in accordance with Table 12.01, and as specified in 12.2.2 to 12.2.4. Hazard class

Design density (mm/min)

Sprinkler type

Nominal K factor

LH

2,25

conventional, spray, flush ceiling, flat, spray, recessed, concealed and sidewall

57

OH

5,0

conventional, spray, flush ceiling, flat spray, recessed, concealed, and sidewall

80

HHP and HHS

≤ 10 mm/min

conventional, spray

80 or 115

> 10 mm/min

conventional, spray

115

conventional, spray

115 or 1601)

conventional, spray, and flat spray

80 or 115

Ceiling or roof sprinklers ≤ 12,5 mm/min > 12,5 mm/min HHS additional sprinklers in high piled storage 1)

in accordance with the manufacturer’s data sheet.

Note: see also Annex J.

Table 12.01: Sprinkler types and K factors for various hazard classes

112

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


Sprinklers of K factor 57 may also be used as rack sprinklers, provided that the protection concept of 11.6 is applied. If sprinklers K 57 are used in racks in accordance with 11.6, the flow rate shall not exceed 70 l/min.

12.2.2

Flush ceiling, recessed and concealed pattern

Flush ceiling, recessed and concealed sprinklers shall not be installed in OH4, HHP or HHS areas. Concealed sprinklers shall not be installed with ceiling heights over 10 m. Sprinklers without fixed deflectors, i.e. with retracted deflectors which drop to the operating position on actuation, shall not be fitted: a) where the ceiling is more than 45° from the horizontal; b) in situations where the atmosphere is corrosive or likely to have a high dust content; c) in racks or under shelves.

12.2.3

Sidewall pattern

Sidewall sprinklers shall not be installed in HHP or HHS installations or above suspended ceilings. They may only be installed under flat ceilings. Note: The operator should be informed about the restrictions for fixtures and furniture in rooms where sidewall sprinklers are used.

12.2.4

Flat spray pattern

The use of flat spray sprinklers shall be restricted to false floor and false ceiling spaces, suspended open ceilings and racks. Where flat spray sprinklers are used in racks, the distance between top of stored goods and deflector may be reduced to 100 mm.

12.2.5

Extended coverage sidewall sprinkler

This type of sprinkler may be used for special protection e.g. hotel bedroom, with an approval by the authorities. Only “quick” response sensitivity shall be used. Extended coverage sidewall sprinklers may be used in LH and OH1 hazards as well as in installations according to Annex E. They may be used in rooms, which have a maximum area of 120 m² with at least fire-retardant walls, a smooth ceiling and a maximum ceiling height of 4,1 m. In one area only sprinklers with identical response sensitivity rating may be used. The area per sprinkler must not exceed 21 m². In rooms with a maximum width of 6,5 m, only one row of extended coverage sidewall sprinklers needs to be installed along the longitudinal wall. In rooms with a width of between 6,5 m and 11 m, two rows of extended coverage sidewall sprinklers must be installed along each of the longitudinal walls. In this case, the sprinklers must be installed staggered. The area of operation with extended coverage sidewall sprinklers is 120 m² and with systems in accordance with Annex E it is 216 m². The distance between two extended coverage sidewall sprinklers installed along the same wall shall be between 3 m and 4,5 m. Extended coverage sidewall sprinklers shall

113


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

be installed at a maximum distance of 300 mm from the adjacent wall and at a distance of 100 mm to 250 mm from the ceiling. Extended coverage sidewall sprinklers shall be installed at a minimum horizontal distance of 0,5 m from corners. The minimum design pressure shall be 2,5 bar for ceiling heights up to 2,8 m and 3 bar for higher ceilings. Note: The operator should be informed about the restrictions for fixtures and furniture in rooms where sidewall sprinklers are used.

12.3

Flow from sprinklers

The water flow from a sprinkler shall be calculated from the following formula:

Q =k× p where: Q is the flow in litres per minute; K is the constant given in Table 12.01; P is the pressure in bar. Where sprinklers K 57 are used in racks in accordance with 11.6, the flow rate shall not exceed 70 l/min.

12.4

Sprinkler temperature ratings

Sprinklers shall be chosen with a temperature rating close to but not lower than 30°C above the highest anticipated ambient temperature. Under normal conditions in temperate climates a rating of 68°C to 74°C is suitable. In unventilated false ceiling and false floor spaces, under skylights or glass roofs etc., it may be necessary to install sprinklers with a higher operating temperature, up to 93°C or 100°C. Special consideration shall be given to the rating of sprinklers in the vicinity of drying ovens, heaters and other equipment which gives off radiant heat. Note: Sprinklers are colour coded to indicate their temperature rating according to Table 12.02: Glass bulb

Temperature rating °C

Fusible link

Temperature rating °C

Orange

57

Uncoloured

57 - 77

Red

68

White

80 - 107

Yellow

79

Blue

121 - 149

Green

93 - 100

Red

163 - 191

Blue

121 - 141

Green

204 - 246

Mauve

163 - 182

Orange

260 - 302

Black

204 - 260

Black

320 - 343

Table 12.02: Colour codes

114

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

12.5


Sprinkler response sensitivity

12.5.1

General

Sprinklers of different sensitivities shall be used in accordance with Table 12.03. Sensitivity rating

in-rack

Ceiling above in-rack sprinklers

Dry systems

All others

Standard ’A’

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Special

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Quick

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Note 1: The sprinklers at the ceiling shall have a sensitivity equal to or of slower response than the sprinklers situated in the racks. Note 2: Most types of sprinklers are rated, in descending order of sensitivity, as one of the following types : −

quick response; RTI <50

−

special response; RTI ≥ 50, ≤ 80

−

standard response ‘A’; RTI > 80, < 200

Note 3: In wet pipe systems sprinklers with higher response sensitivity may also be used. Note 4: In one area only sprinklers with the same response sensitivity should be used. In unfavourable conditions sprinklers near the fire could otherwise open later than adjacent sprinklers of lower response sensitivity. Note 5: In voids ≤ 0,5 m sprinklers of response sensitivity “quick” shall be used. Note 6: The sprinkler sensitivity ratings are specified in EN 12259 Part 1.

Table 12.03: Sprinkler sensitivity ratings

12.5.2

Buildings with smoke and heat exhaust ventilation systems

If sprinkler systems are installed in rooms and buildings with smoke and heat exhaust ventilation systems, it is important to ensure that the operation of the sprinkler system is not impaired. Possible combinations are specified in Table 12.04. Sprinklers

ESFR sprinklers

Powered smoke exhaust

possible in consideration of cross ventilation

limited, see requirements of FM DS 2-0 for ventilation

Natural smoke exhaust activated by smoke detectors

possible and recommended combination in consideration 1) of layout

not recommended

Natural smoke exhaust activated by thermal elements

possible and recommended combination in consideration 1) of layout

activation of exhaust after ESFR (ESFR 68°C, RTI<50; RWA 141°C, RTI>80); observe constructive requirements

Natural smoke exhaust activated by manual call points

recommended combination

recommended combination

1)

e.g. by reduction of sprinkler distance to ceiling

Table 12.04: Combinations of smoke and heat exhaust ventilation systems and sprinkler systems

12.6

Sprinkler guards

When sprinklers are installed in a position at risk of mechanical damage, they shall be fitted with a suitable metal guard.

115


12.7

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Sprinkler water shields

Sprinklers installed in racks or under perforated shelves or platforms or similar locations where water from a higher sprinkler or sprinklers may cause wetting close to the bulb or fusible element, shall be fitted with metal water shields. Water shields and their fastenings shall be designed such that -

they do not affect the water distribution of the sprinkler and water does not run back to the sprinkler on the rear side of the water shields.

Water shields shall have a diameter of at least 0,075 m. They shall be designed such that between the centreline of the sprinkler and an imaginary line between the outer edge of the water shields and the water outlet of the sprinklers, there is an angle of at least 60°. Note: It may be assumed that water shields with a surface of 0,02 m² fulfil the requirement independently of the installation height of the sprinkler.

12.8

Sprinkler escutcheon plates

Escutcheon plates shall be made of metal or a thermosetting plastic material (Duroplast). Escutcheon plates shall not be used to support ceilings or other structures. No part of an escutcheon plate shall project from the ceiling below the top of the visible portion of the heat sensitive element of the sprinkler.

116

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

12.9


Corrosion protection of sprinklers

Sprinklers installed in premises where corrosive vapours are prevalent shall be protected in one of the following ways: a) with a suitable corrosion resistant coating applied by the manufacturer; b) with a Vaseline coating applied once before and once after installation. The anti-corrosion treatment shall not be applied to sprinkler bulbs.

13

Valves

13.1

Alarm valve station

Each installation shall have an alarm valve station.

13.2

Stop Valves

All normally open stop valves which may cut off the water supply to the sprinklers shall: −

close in the clockwise direction;

−

be fitted with an indicator that clearly shows whether it is in the open or closed position;

−

be secured in the open position by a strap and padlock or secured in an equivalent manner.

With buried pipes stop valves shall −

have an aboveground indicator, or

−

have an indicator in street caps that are constantly monitored for being operational and whose electrical components in the street cap are designed according to protection type IP 56, or

−

have an indicator and be installed in an easily accessible underground flue.

Note 1: Stop valve downstream of the alarm valve station should be avoided, where possible. Where stop valves are installed downstream of the alarm valve station, they shall be monitored electrically. Note 2: In locations such as high-rise buildings, where high static pressures are likely, special care shall be taken to ensure that all stop, test, drain and flushing valves are suitable for the installation pressures.

13.3

Ring main valves

Where sprinkler systems are fed by a ring main supply pipe arrangement on the premises, valves shall be installed to isolate the ring into sections, in such a way that no section shall include more than 4 alarm valve stations.

117


13.4

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Drain valves

Drain valves shall be fitted as specified in Table 13.01 to allow drainage from: a) immediately downstream of the alarm valve station or of its downstream stop valve where such exists; b) immediately downstream of any subsidiary alarm valve; c) immediately downstream of any subsidiary stop valve; d) between a dry pipe or subsidiary alarm valve station and any subsidiary stop valve installed for testing; e) any pipe which cannot be drained through another drain valve, with the exception of drop pipes to single sprinklers in a wet installation up to a volume of 100 l, provided that these do not have to be drained regularly. The valves shall be fitted at the lower end of the pipework and sized as specified in Table 13.01. The outlet shall be not more than 3 m above the floor and shall preferably be fitted with a brass plug. Instead of brass plugs galvanised steel plugs may be used also. In systems that do not have to be drained regularly (wet pipe systems), the outlets do not necessarily have to be installed at a maximum of 4 m from the ground. Valve principally draining

Minimum diameter d of valve and pipe

LH installation

DN 40

OH or HHP or HHS installation

DN 50

Subsidiary installation

DN 50

A zone

DN 50

Distribution pipes with no incline to the valve principally draining Branch pipes with no incline to the valve principally draining

Ø ≤ DN 50

DN 20

50 DN < Ø ≤ DN 80

DN 32

Ø > DN 80

DN 50

Ø ≤ DN 50

DN 20

Ø > DN 50

DN 25

Pipework with not incline to the valve principally draining between dry or subsidiary alarm valve and a subsidiary stop valve installed for testing purposes

DN 15

Table 13.01: Minimum size of drain valves

13.5

Test facilities

13.5.1

Alarm and pump start test facilities

15 mm test valves shall be provided, as appropriate, to test: a) the hydraulic alarm and any electric alarm pressure switch by drawing water from the immediate downstream side of: − a wet alarm valve, and any downstream main stop valves; − an alternate alarm valve; − a pre-action alarm valve;

118

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


b) the hydraulic alarm and any electric alarm pressure switch by drawing water downstream of the main water supply stop valve and from the upstream side of: − an alternate alarm valve; − a dry pipe alarm valve; − a pre-action alarm valve; c) any water flow alarm switch installed downstream of the alarm valve station. The test valve shall be connected downstream of the water flow alarm; d) any automatic pump starting device; e) any pump or pressure tank house sprinkler alarm flow switches installed upstream of the alarm valve station.

13.5.2

Test facilities at the end of the pipework

A test facility shall be provided, incorporating a test valve with any associated fittings and pipework, delivering a flow equivalent to the discharge from a single sprinkler with the lowest K-factor of the group, connected at the hydraulically most remote location on a distribution or branch pipe. This test facility shall be accessible without any mobile tools and secured against unauthorised operation (e.g. plug).

13.6

Flushing connections

Flushing connections, with permanently installed shut-off devices, shall be fitted on the spur ends of the installation distribution pipes. They shall be of the same nominal size as the distribution pipe and designed as follows: −

DN 50 minimum and

−

with pipework > DN 50 they shall be fitted on the bottom of the pipework and provided with a free outlet/inlet path of 200 mm minimum which is preferably horizontal.

Flushing connections shall be fitted with appropriate caps or plugs. Note 1: It may be desirable in certain cases to fit flushing connections on branch pipes, e.g. in the form of a blank tee. Note 2: In addition to their use for flushing of the pipework, flushing connections may be used to check that water is available and for carrying out pressure and flow tests. Note 3: Pipework which is completely full of water may be damaged by the increase in pressure due to temperature rises. If complete venting of air in an installation is likely to occur, e.g. in the case of a gridded layout with flushing connections at the extremities, consideration should be given to the fitting of pressure relief valves. Pressure relief valves in sprinkler systems shall consist of metal components only. The performance of the pressure relief valve shall be dimensioned such that in the case of a valve failure the system is not released or the water supply compromised. Alternatively, pressure equalising tanks may be used.

119


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Figure 13.01: Flushing connections

13.7

Pressure gauges

Pressure gauge scale divisions shall not exceed: a) 0,2 bar for a maximum scale value less than or equal to 10 bar; b) 0,5 bar for a maximum scale value greater than 10 bar. Note: The maximum scale value should be of the order of 150% of the known maximum pressure to be applied.

13.7.1

Water supply connections

Each public water mains connection shall be fitted with a pressure gauge between the supply pipe stop valve and the non-return valve ('A’ gauge). Each pump supply shall be fitted with a damped pressure gauge on the supply pipe immediately downstream of the outlet non-return valve and upstream of any outlet stop valve.

13.7.2

Alarm valve stations

Each alarm valve station shall have a pressure gauge fitted at each of the following points: a) immediately upstream of the alarm valve station ('B' gauge); b) immediately downstream of the alarm valve station ('C' gauge); c) immediately downstream of subsidiary alarm valve stations, but upstream of any stop valve.

13.7.3

Removal

Means shall be provided to enable each pressure gauge to be removed readily without interruption of the water or air supply to the installation. If required, self relieving ball valves shall be provided.

120

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

13.8


Relief valve

Where it is expected to have a water column enclosed leading to inadmissible pressure expansion, a relief valve (safety valve) shall be installed. The relief valve should be provided with a size not less than 6.4 mm to operate at pressures not greater than 12 bar. The relief valve shall be installed above the alarm valve station on the riser.

14

Alarms and alarm devices

14.1

Water motor alarms

14.1.1

General

Each alarm valve station shall have its own water motor alarm. Each water motor alarm shall be clearly labelled with the number of the sprinkler group. The installation of water motor alarms (e.g. gongs) may be omitted if two sounders (horns) and at each alarm valve station one additional alarm pressure switch and one visible indicator (lamp) are installed. One of the two sounders shall have back-up power supply and monitored transmission path. The sounders shall be installed outside the sprinkler equipment room at a clearly audible location and labelled “sprinkler alarm”. The standard alarm pressure switch and the additional alarm pressure switch for triggering the sounders/indicators shall be connected via separate monitored transmission paths and separate zones. Failure of an additional pressure switch of one alarm valve station shall not affect the signal transmission of an additional pressure switch of another alarm valve station. For several alarm valve stations located in one room only one redundant sounder is sufficient (see Figures 14.01-14.02). If both the alarm transmission to a permanently manned location and the triggering of sounders are via the same control and indicating equipment, the circuit shall be in accordance with Figure 14.02. In this case, failure of the central signal processing unit in the sprinkler equipment room shall not cause failure of both the alarm transmission and the triggering of redundant sounders.

121


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Figure 14.01: Example: Triggering of sounders via a monitoring panel

Figure 14.02: Example: Triggering of sounders directly by control and indicating equipment with approval as monitoring panel

122

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

14.1.2


Water motor and gong

The gong shall be installed outside the sprinkler equipment room at a clearly audible and accessible location. The water motor shall not be installed any higher than 6 m above the point of connection to the alarm valve. A strainer, readily accessible for cleaning, shall be fitted between the motor nozzle and the alarm valve connection. The water outlet shall be arranged so that any flow of water can be seen.

14.1.3

Piping to water motor

The piping shall be galvanised steel. The equivalent length of pipe between the alarm valve and the water motor shall be not more than 25 m assuming an equivalent length of 2 m for each change of direction. The pipe shall be fitted with a stop valve located within the premises and shall be provided with a permanent drain through an orifice of not more than 3 mm in diameter. The orifice plate may be integral with the pipe fitting, and shall be made either of stainless steel or of a non-ferrous material.

14.2

Electrical water flow and water and air pressure switches

14.2.1

General

Electrical devices to detect the operation of sprinkler systems shall be either water flow alarm switches or pressure switches.

14.2.2

Water flow alarm switches

Water flow alarm switches shall only be used in wet installations. A test facility for water flow alarm switches shall be fitted downstream of each switch to simulate the operation of a single sprinkler. The test facility for water flow alarm switches shall be fitted with a drain. The draw-off pipe shall be galvanised steel or copper. The pressure/flow characteristic of the fully opened test valve and draw-off pipe shall be equal to that of the smallest nominal bore sprinkler installed downstream of the water flow alarm switch. Any orifice plate shall be at the pipe outlet and shall be either stainless steel or non-ferrous material. The draw-off pipe of the water flow alarm switch shall be positioned in such a way that the flow of water can be clearly seen during tests.

123


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

>5D

For testing the water flow alarm switch and for draining the pipe, a shut-off valve (test valve) shall be fitted with a nominal diameter of at least DN 20 (see Fig. 14.03). With this test facility, the water flow alarm switch shall respond at a pressure between 1,0 and 3,6 bar. > DN 20

2 3

1

>5D 4 5 1

> DN 20

2 3 4 5

1 – water flow alarm switch 2 – shut-off valve 3 – gauge (0-16 bar, class 1,6)

4 – nozzle (K = 30) 5 – hopper (optional)

Figure 14.03: Test facility for water flow alarm switches The test facility for water flow alarm switches may be omitted if the switch can either be tested separately with a test facility of K-factor 20 or with a test facility in accordance with 13.5.2.

14.2.3

Dry and pre-action systems

Each discrete section of the installation pipework should be provided with a low air/gas pressure alarm, to provide a visual and audible warning in an area with responsible manning.

14.3

Alarm transmission equipment to permanently manned locations

Any automatic sprinkler electrical alarm connected to a permanently manned location shall conform to EN 54-2 "Control and Indicating Equipment" and to the appropriate requirements of VdS 2095, VdS Guidelines for automatic fire detection and fire alarm systems, planning and installation, resp. VdS 2496, VdS Guidelines for the triggering of fire extinguishing systems. Each sprinkler system shall have an electrical alarm transmission to a permanently manned location.

14.4

Monitoring of stop valves

The monitoring signal of stop valves shall be transmitted to a permanently manned location.

124

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

15

Pipework

15.1

General

15.1.1

Underground piping


Pipes shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and shall be protected against corrosion. Only the following pipes shall be used: −

ductile cast iron pipes in accordance with DIN EN 545

−

steel pipes in accordance with DIN 2460

−

pressure pipes made of polyethylene PE-HD in accordance with DIN 8075 and R 14.3.1 with quality mark by Gütegemeinschaft Kunststoffe e.V. (quality association for plastic products)

−

pressure pipes made of unplasticised polyvinyl chloride (PVC-U) in accordance with DIN 8061 resp. R 1.1.1 with quality mark by Gütegemeinschaft Kunststoffe e.V. (Quality Association for Plastic Products)

−

stainless steel pipes in accordance with DIN 17455 with plastic coating and welded pipe joints

Steel pipes in accordance with DIN 2460 shall be welded by butt or slip-in weld socket joints or joined by connecting sleeves. The steel pipes shall have a factory-made cement mortar lining in accordance with DIN EN 10298. For exterior corrosion protection the pipes shall have protective enclosure. The soil shall be classified in accordance with DVGW worksheet GW 9 resp. DIN 50929 in order to determine the enclosure type in accordance with DIN 30675-1. The joints shall be provided with subsequent corrosion protection in accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications. Quality of pipes, lining and enclosure shall be certified by a works test certificate 2.2 in accordance with EN 10204. The piping instructions for PE 80 and PE 100 pressure pipes by Kunststoffverband e.V. (Plastics Association) shall be followed. Pipes and fittings shall be joined and connected to valves by welding necks via sleeve welding with incorporated heating element resp. hot plate butt welding. The piping instructions for PVC-U pressure pipes by Kunststoffverband e.V. (Plastics Association) shall be followed. Pipes and fittings shall be joined and connected to valves by connecting sleeves resp. bounded socket joints. Adequate precautions shall be taken to prevent damage to piping, for example by passing vehicles.

15.1.2

Above ground piping

Piping shall be steel or copper or VdS-tested and approved pipe systems. When steel pipes with a nominal diameter equal to or less than 150 mm are threaded, cut-grooved or otherwise machined, they shall have a minimum wall thickness in accordance with ISO 65M.

125


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

When steel pipe ends are formed without significantly reducing the wall thickness, e.g. by roll-grooving, they shall have a minimum wall thickness in accordance with ISO 4200 range D, in any case at least 2,6 mm. Copper pipes shall be used in wet pipe systems only, installed in flow direction downstream of the alarm valve. Pipes up to DN 50 shall be in accordance with EN 1057. Pipes between DN 50 and DN 100 shall be in accordance with DIN EN 12449. Copper pipes shall bear the quality mark by Gütegemeinschaft Kupferrohre e.V. (Quality Association for Copper Pipes) and the DVGW quality mark (German Technical and Scientific Association for Gas and Water). Pipes in accordance with DIN EN 1057 with DVGW quality mark and VdS Approval may be used. The minimum wall thickness of copper pipes shall be in accordance with Table 15.01. Diameter

Minimum wall thickness

≤ DN 40

1,5 mm

DN 50 – DN 80

2 mm

DN 100

2,5 mm

Table 15.01: Minimum wall thickness of copper pipes Note: For dry, alternate or pre-action installations, galvanised steel should preferably be used.

15.1.3

Welding

Pipes and fittings ≤ DN 50 shall not be welded on site; flame cutting, welding and any other kinds of thermal processing on site are not at all permitted. Sprinkler pipes shall be welded such that −

all joints are continuously welded;

−

the insides of welding seams do not affect the water flow;

−

the pipe is deburred and any slag is removed.

Welders shall be approved in accordance with EN 287-1. Pipe joints shall not be welded if pipes or fittings such as bends are < DN 50, except where the welding is done and inspected in the workshops of sprinkler companies whose welding procedure and equipment is approved for the respective application by the authorities. Welded pipes shall be marked at a distance of 100 mm from each end with the name or code of the installer. The individual markings at the pipe ends shall be permanent and well legible at two opposite spots of the pipe periphery. The equipment for marking the pipes shall be combined with the welding equipment. Copper pipes shall be hard soldered using capillary solder fittings in accordance with DIN EN 1254. The fittings shall bear the manufacturer’s code. For soldered connections of copper with copper, hard solders CP 105 or CP 203 shall be used in accordance with DIN EN 1044. The use of flux is not necessary. For soldered connections of copper-zinc alloys (brass) or copper-tin alloys (red brass) among themselves or with copper, hard solders AG 304 or AG 306 shall be used in accordance with DIN EN 1044, using flux FH10 in accordance with DIN EN 1045.

126

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


Only solders and fluxes bearing the quality mark for hard solders and hard solder fluxes by Gütegemeinschaft Kupferrohr e.V. (Quality Association for Copper Pipes). The junction from steel to copper shall be a flange connection with the steel pipe being provided with a steel flange PN 16 in accordance with DIN EN 1092-1 and the copper pipe being provided with a solder flange in accordance with DIN 2501 made of red brass. Stainless steel screws shall be used. Up to DN 50 (copper pipe 54 mm x 2 mm) bolted connections may be used with screw pipe connection and double nipple or similar constructions made of red brass. Hard solder connections shall be performed by specially trained experts only. The respective qualification certificate which shall not be any older than two years and acquired at an institution approved by the authorities shall be submitted to the authorities. Welded sleeves shall comply with DIN EN 10241. The boring for welded sleeves shall be at least equal to the thread external diameter and not more than 2mm smaller than the sleeve external diameter. The boring shall be deburred inside. The procedure of welding sleeves onto pipes ≤ DN 50 shall be VdS-approved.

15.1.4

Mechanical pipe joints

Mechanical pipe joints shall be approved. Pipe joints with flanges in accordance with DIN, capillary solder fittings in accordance with DIN EN 1254, malleable cast iron fittings in accordance with DIN EN 10242 (including sealing material) do not require a VdS Approval.

15.1.5

Flexible pipes and joints

If relative movement is likely to occur between different sections of pipework within the sprinkler system, e.g. owing to expansion joints or in the case of free-standing storage racking, a flexible section or joint shall be fitted at the point of connection to the distribution main. Before installation it shall meet the following requirements: a) it shall be capable of withstanding a test pressure of four times the maximum working pressure or 40 bar, whichever is the greater, and shall not include parts which, when subject to fire, might impair either the integrity or the performance of the sprinkler system; b) flexible pipes shall contain a continuous pressure-retaining stainless steel or non-ferrous metal inner tube; c) flexible pipes shall not be fitted in the fully extended position. Flexible pipes and joints shall not be used to take up misalignment between a distribution main and the feed pipes to intermediate sprinklers. Expansion joints shall be steel bellow expansion joints in accordance with DIN 30681 PN 16. They shall bear the DIN DVGW mark and the register number. No reaction forces shall be transmitted to pipe hangers and building. The pipework for mobile equipment, such as mobile racks or machines, shall be connected via pipe swivel joints or stainless steel hoses in accordance with DIN 3384 PN 16. The hoses shall bear the DIN DVGW mark and the register number. The expansion joints and hoses shall be fitted where they are protected from external mechanical impact.

127


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

15.1.6 Press fitting pipe systems The pipe system may be installed in sprinkler systems, provided that the system is VdSapproved for the type of system and type of installation. The manufacturer’s mounting and installation instructions shall be met. A press fitting pipe system comprises at least the following components: -

pipes; pipe fittings; transition pieces to other pipe qualities (materials) or valves; joining technique including the required materials, joining means, tools and assessment principles for the quality of the pipe connection; pipe hangers, where required.

Components of different pipe systems shall not be combined. Application is limited to the protection of LH and OH1-OH3 as well as exhibition halls, cinemas, theatres and concert halls. It shall be ensured that loads cannot fall onto the pipes, neither during normal operation nor in the case of fire. Generally, the requirements of the respective VdS Approval apply. The following shall be met as a matter of principle: a) application in sprinkler wet pipe and dry pipe system, downstream of the alarm valve station in accordance with the VdS Approval; b) installation as vertical main distribution pipe or distribution pipe spur is not permitted for press fitting systems made of galvanised steel; c) the hanger distances specified in 15.2.2 for copper pipes apply to all systems; d) additives in the extinguishing water shall be permitted by the manufacturer and agreed with VdS.

15.1.7

Subsurface piping

Pipes shall be installed in such a way that they are easily accessible for inspection, repairs and modifications. They shall not be embedded in concrete floors or ceilings. Note: Wherever possible, piping should not be installed in inaccessible spaces which make inspection, repairs and modifications difficult. Plastic and composite pipe systems may be installed in concrete floors or ceilings, provided that the system has a VdS Approval for this type of installation. The concrete installation dates shall be announced to VdS beforehand. VdS reserves the right to do an on-site inspection or witness the pressure tests. Note: If a pipe is installed in concrete floors or ceilings, the installer shall inform the operator that any leakages or damage or modifications of the pipework will require an extraordinary effort. For this purpose, the installer may e.g. hand the operator the form enclosed in Annex Q to be signed and distributed accordingly.

15.1.7.1 Plastic and composite pipe systems The pipe system may be installed in sprinkler systems, provided that the system is VdSapproved for the type of system and type of installation. The manufacturer’s mounting and installation instructions shall be met. A plastic or composite pipe system comprises at least the following components:

128

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

-


pipes; pipe fittings; transition pieces to other pipe qualities (materials) or valves; joining technique including the required materials, joining means, tools and assessment principles for the quality of the pipe connection; pipe hangers, where required.

Components of different pipe systems shall not be combined. Application is limited to the protection of LH and OH1-OH3 as well as exhibition halls, cinemas, theatres and concert halls. It shall be ensured that loads cannot fall onto the pipes, neither during normal operation nor in the case of fire. Generally, the requirements of the respective VdS Approval apply. The following shall be met as a matter of principle: a) installation is permitted only in sprinkler wet pipe systems. The room temperature range shall be 10°C to 49°C; b) installation as vertical main distribution pipe and distribution pipe spur is not permitted; c) if a plastic or composite pipe system is approved for installation between concrete ceiling and false ceiling, the material of the false ceiling shall have a fire resistance of at least 30 minutes. Fire loads above the false ceiling are not permitted; d) free installation in accordance with 15.1.2 is not permitted; e) only sprinklers in accordance with the approval of the pipe system shall be used. The design temperature of the pipe shall at least be equal to the operating temperature of the sprinklers; f) coats of paint or similar are not permitted. This does not apply to procedures and substances permitted by the manufacturer; g) only the pipe ducts permitted by the manufacturer and by VdS shall be used; h) installation only in rooms with unpolluted atmosphere; i) additives in the extinguishing water are not permitted (e.g. anti-freezing agent, foaming agent, other additives); j) the bridging of expansion joints shall be avoided. Where this is not possible, the bridging shall be in accordance with the respective approval. It is recommended to agree the procedure with the architect or structural engineer in the planning phase.

15.1.8

Protection against fire and mechanical damage

Piping shall be installed in such a way that the pipes are not exposed to mechanical damage. Where pipes are installed above gangways with low headroom, or at intermediate levels, or in other similar situations, precautions shall be taken against mechanical damage. Pipework for sprinkler systems including water supply shall only be pass through sprinklered areas, except where −

it is buried;

−

it passes through rooms specified in 4.1.1 in which an exemption from sprinkler protection is permitted;

−

it is separated by at least fire-resistant components, together with any hangers;

−

it passes on ground level, is sealed and covered by concrete slabs.

The pipework shall be visible, otherwise it shall be easily laid open at all times. This does not apply to buried pipework and pipes including hangers that are separated by at least fire-resistant components.

129


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Note: The hangers shall be enclosed in accordance with the design loads specified in these Guidelines.

15.1.9

Painting

Non-galvanised steel pipework shall be painted. Galvanised piping shall be painted wherever the coating has been damaged, e.g. by threading. Note: Extra protection may be needed for unusually corrosive conditions.

15.1.10 Drainage Means shall be provided to enable all the pipework to be drained. Where this cannot be done through the drain valve at the alarm valve, extra valves shall be fitted in accordance with 13.4. In the case of dry, alternate and pre-action installations branch pipes shall have a slope towards the distribution pipe of at least 0,4% and distribution pipes shall have a slope towards the appropriate drain valve of at least 0,2%. Branch pipes shall always be connected to the side or top of distribution pipes.

15.2

Pipe hangers

15.2.1

General

Pipe hangers shall be fixed directly to the building or, if necessary, to machines, storage racks or other structures. They shall not be used to support any other installations. They shall be of the adjustable type in order to secure an even load bearing capability. Hangers shall completely surround the pipe and shall not be welded to the pipe or fittings. The part of the structure to which the hangers are secured shall be capable of supporting the pipework. Pipes greater than DN 50 nominal diameter shall not be supported from corrugated steel sheet or aerate concrete slabs. Distribution pipes and risers shall have a suitable number of fixed points to take account of axial forces. No part of any hanger shall be made of combustible material. Nails shall not be used. Hangers for copper pipes shall be provided with a suitable lining with sufficient electrical resistance, in order to prevent contact corrosion. Suitable are e.g. powder saponified ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymers applied with the whirl sintering method, or a bracket lining with PTFE foil. If other materials are used, their appropriateness shall be verified.

15.2.2

Spacing and location

Hangers shall generally be spaced no more than 4 m apart on steel pipe and 2 m apart on copper pipe. For pipes of over DN 50 nominal diameter these distances may be increased by 50% provided that one of the following conditions is met:

130

−

2 independent hangers are fitted directly to the structure;

−

a hanger is used which is capable of bearing a load 50% greater than that called for in Table 15.03.

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


When double hangers are used, the spacing shall be: −

7 m with nominal diameters DN 80 to DN 100

−

8 m with nominal diameters ≥ DN 125

Note: If one hanger fails, the spacing of the remaining hangers shall not exceed 8 m. At the end of the pipework two brackets with one pendulum each shall be fitted. When mechanical pipe joints are used: −

there shall be at least one hanger within 1 m of each joint;

−

there shall be at least one hanger on each pipe section.

The distance from any terminal sprinkler to a hanger shall not exceed: −

0,9 m for 25 mm diameter piping;

−

1,2 m for piping greater than 25 mm diameter.

The distance from any upright sprinkler to a hanger shall not be less than 0,15 m. Vertical pipes shall have additional hangers in the following cases: −

pipes more than 2 m long;

−

pipes more than lm long feeding single sprinklers.

The following pipes need not be separately supported unless they are at a low level or otherwise vulnerable to mechanical impact: −

horizontal pipes less than 0,45 m long;

−

drop or rise pipes less than 0,6 m long feeding individual sprinklers;

−

drop or rise pipes less than 1,0 m long feeding individual sprinklers and passing through a false ceiling so that horizontal movement of the drop or rise pipe is prevented.

Extension sleeves for threaded rods of hangers shall be secured, e.g. by a counter nut. The same applies to threaded rods for fastening corrugated steel sheet hangers. Fastening constructions to corrugated steel sheets, aerate or pumice concrete slabs shall be agreed with VdS. The pipe hangers at the carrying construction shall have a spacing of not more than 12 m, and the last sprinkler shall have a distance of not more than 6 m from such a hanger. If no operating equipment is located above the sprinkler pipe, no additional hanger is required at the carrying construction, provided that the ceiling construction can bear a single load of 1000 N. Plugs in aerate or pumice concrete slabs shall have a distance of not less than 150 mm from the edge of the slab. Where fastenings to corrugated steel sheets, aerate or pumice concrete cannot bear twice the calculated load according to Table 15.03, the requirement may be reduced to the single calculated load, provided that the hangers spacing is reduced proportionately.

131


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

With aerate or pumice concrete slabs the additional hanger at the carrying construction may be omitted, if the fastening is stuck through the slab and welded or screwed to a steel plate. Sprinkler pipes passing through sleeves and recesses in the building construction and bearing on, shall be fastened by pipe hangers every 25 m, gridded branch pipes every 50 m. The spacing of bearing points shall not exceed 6 m. The pipe hanger shall not be designed as a fixed bearing. Where sprinkler branch pipes pass through sleeves, the free pipe end shall be supported as well. The nominal diameter of sleeves for branch pipes shall not exceed DN 80. Where the bearing area in pipe sleeves has a length of 10 cm minimum, this area may be regarded as “two independent hangers”. Where sprinkler pipe hangers are fastened to wooden beams, the minimum values specified in Table 15.02 shall be complied with. Nominal diameter ≤ DN 50

Bolt diameter

Wood screw diameter

mm

mm

6

2x6

> DN 50 ≤ DN 100

8

2x8

> DN 100 ≤ DN 150

10

2 x 10

>DN 150 ≤ DN 200

12

2 x 12

Table 15.02: Fastening to wooden beams In the case of double hangers the number of wood screws resp. bolts shall be increased in accordance with Figure 15.01 subject to the type of hanger. Single hangers

2 wood screws

1 bolt

4 wood screws

2 bolts

Spacing ≤5m

Double hangers Spacing 5m to 8m

Figure 15.01: Hangers for the fastening to wooden beams

132

1 through bolt

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


Screw bolts shall have washers on both sides, unless the pipe hanger has the same bearing area. The strength of the wooden beams shall be 0,1 m. The screw bolts shall be located at a distance from the lower beam edge that is at least 3 times their diameter. Wood screws shall be screwed in up to a depth of at least 8 times their diameter and be fixed at the side of the wooden beam. The distance between screws and lower beam edge shall be at least 5 times their diameter. Where threaded rods of support systems are screwed into blind holes, e.g. in the case of anchors, the other side of the rod shall be able to pass through the thread by at least 2cm. Beam clamps for pipes up to DN 65 shall be fastened to beams only if their bearing areas do not deviate from the horizontal by more than 10°. The clamps shall only be loaded by vertical traction. The clamp screws shall be mounted to the sloping area of the beam. Any other types of beam clamps shall be approved by the authorities. Sound absorbing inlays shall be used in pipe hangers only if the authorities require it. The type of sound absorbing inlay shall be agreed with the authorities in each individual case.

15.2.3

Design

Hanger materials shall consist of steel of at least 3 mm thickness. In galvanised design 2,5 mm are sufficient. Exempted are loops made of hot-dip galvanised material, which may have the minimum dimensions 25 mm x 1,5 mm for pipes up to DN 50. The minimum cross sections of pipe hangers (except for pipe brackets) are specified in Table 15.03. Nominal pipe diameter (d)

Minimum load capacity at 20°C1)

Minimum cross section2)

mm

N

mm²

d ≤ 50

2.000

30 (M8)

50 < d ≤ 100

3.500

50 (M10)

100 < d ≤ 150

5.000

70 (M12)

150 < d ≤ 200

8.500

125 (M16)

200 < d ≤ 250

10.000

150 (M18)

250 < d ≤ 300

12.500

180 (M20)

1)

When the material is heated to 200°C the load bearing capacity shall not deteriorate more than 25%.

2)

The nominal cross section of threaded rods shall be increased so that the minimum cross section is still achieved.

Table 15.03: Minimum cross section for pipe hangers Pipe hangers for the suspension of single pipes, which do not fulfil the requirements, shall be approved.

133


15.2.4

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Anchorage in concrete ceilings

Anchors shall be approved by the building control authorities as follows: −

for individual fastening in cracked concrete (European Technical Approval in accordance with European Technical Approval Guideline 001/Part 1-4 Opt. 1-6), or

−

for multiple fastening of non-bearing constructions (European Technical Approval in accordance with European Technical Approval Guideline 001/Part 6). Note: Comparable national approvals such as any still valid general building control approvals by German Institute for Construction Technology (DIBt) for anchors for lightweight ceiling lining and false ceilings are equivalent to approvals in accordance with ETAG 001/Part6.

The anchors shall be dimensioned in accordance with the building control approval. The relevant load is the 1,4-fold of the effective load. Anchors shall fulfil the requirements of the following table as regards tensile strength (steel failure, NRk,s) and thread (if applicable). Minimum thread of Use for ceiling anchorage of pipes of anchor nominal width D by means of one anchor per anchorage spot

Characteristic tensile strength (steel failure) NRk,s [N]

D ≤ DN 50

M8

≥ 6.000

DN 50 < D ≤ DN 100

M10

≥ 10.500

DN 100 < D ≤ DN 150

M12

≥ 15.000

DN 150 < D ≤ DN 200

M16

≥ 25.500

DN 200 < D ≤ DN 250

M20

≥ 30.000

DN 250 < D ≤ DN 300

M20

≥ 37.500

Table 15.04: Minimum tensile strength and minimum thread When anchors approved for multiple anchorage of non-bearing constructions are used, it shall be ensured even in the event of theoretical failure of one anchor the pipework remains functional. Note: This may be achieved e.g. at pipe deflexions or end anchorage of projecting pipes by using one anchor approved for multiple anchorage of non-bearing constructions for every two independent anchorage spots (pipe hangers) or by reducing the hanger distances at these spots. The distance of the penultimate hanger from the pipe end shall not exceed 3 m, and 2,5 m for pipes DN 25. The fastening of pipe deflexions shall be designed such that after an assumed failure of a hanger at a deflexion a hanger distance of 6 m is not exceeded. Redundancies are not required, provided that at the relevant spots an anchor approved for individual anchorage in cracked concrete is used.

15.3

Pipework in concealed spaces

Where sprinkler protection is required in concealed spaces such as false ceilings and floors, the pipework shall be designed as follows:

134

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


15.3.1 False ceilings above OH occupancies Sprinklers above the ceiling may be fed from the same branch pipes as the sprinklers below the ceiling.

15.3.2

All other cases

The sprinklers in false ceilings and floors shall be fed from separate branch pipes.

16

Signs, notices and information

16.1

Block plan

16.1.1

General

A block plan of the premises shall be placed close to a main entrance where it can be readily seen by the fire brigade or others responding to an alarm. The plan shall show: a) the installation number and the location of the corresponding alarm valve station and water motor alarm; b) each separate area of hazard classification, the relevant hazard class and the maximum storage height; c) by means of colour shading or hatching the area covered by each alarm valve and, if required by the fire brigade, indication of routes through the premises to those areas; d) the location of any subsidiary stop valves.

16.2

Signs and notices

16.2.1

Location plate

A location plate of weather-resistant material and lettering shall be fixed on the outside of the external wall as close as practical to the entrance nearest the installation main alarm valve stations. The plate shall bear the wording: ALARM VALVE STATION in letters not less than 35 mm high, and INSIDE in letters not less than 25 mm high. The wording shall be in white letters on a red background.

16.2.2

Signs for stop valves

A sign shall be fitted close to the main and any subsidiary stop valves bearing the words: SPRINKLER STOP VALVE The sign shall be rectangular with white letters not less than 20 mm high on a red background.

135


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Where the stop valve is enclosed in a room with a door the sign shall be fixed on the outside of the door, and a second sign, bearing the words « Keep locked shut » shall be fixed on the inside of the door. The second sign shall be circular with white letters not less than 5 mm high, on a blue background.

16.2.3 16.2.3.1

Alarm valve station General

Where the sprinkler system comprises more than one group, each alarm valve station shall be prominently marked with the number identifying the group it controls. 16.2.3.2

Fully calculated installations

In fully calculated installations a durable notice shall be fixed to the rise pipe next to each alarm valve station. The notice shall include the following information: a) the group number; b) the hazard classification or classifications of the areas protected by the group; c) for each hazard class area within a group: 1) the design requirements (area of operation and density of discharge); 2) the pressure-flow requirement at the 'C' gauge or flow test facilities for the most unfavourable and most favourable areas of operation; 3) the pressure-flow requirement at the pump delivery pressure gauge for the most unfavourable and most favourable areas of operation; 4) the height of the highest sprinkler above the level of the 'C' gauge; 5) the height difference between the 'C' gauge and the pump delivery pressure gauge.

16.2.4

Water supply connections to other services

Stop valves controlling water supplies from sprinkler system supply pipes or trunk mains to other services shall be appropriately labelled; e.g. ‘Firefighting hose reels’, ‘Domestic water supply’, etc. The labels shall have raised or embossed lettering and be fixed to stop valves to inhibit unauthorised removal.

16.2.5

Suction and booster pumps

16.2.5.1

Pre-calculated installations

All systems require a full hydraulic calculation. Thus, details on pre-calculated systems cannot be given. 16.2.5.2

Fully calculated installations

An installer's data sheet shall be displayed beside the pump, giving the following information: a) the pump manufacturer's data sheets; b) a schedule listing the technical data specified in 3.4.4.4; c) a copy of the installer's pump characteristics sheet, similar in presentation to Figure H.01; d) the pressure loss, at flow Qmax, between the pump outlet and the most hydraulically remote group 'C' gauge.

136

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

16.2.6 16.2.6.1


Electric switches and control panels Alarm transmission

Where water flow into an installation initiates an automatic alarm to the fire brigade or to a remote control station, a notice to that effect shall be fixed adjacent to the alarm valves. 16.2.6.2

Diesel engine driven pump

The alarms specified in 9.9.11 at both the diesel engine controller and the responsibly manned location shall be marked as appropriate: a) fail to start, e.g. diesel engine driven pump failure to start; b) disabled condition, e.g. diesel engine driven pump starter switched off; c) operation sprinkler pump, e.g. sprinkler pump running. The manually operated shut-down mechanism (see 9.9.7) shall be labelled as follows: SPRINKLER PUMP SHUT-OFF 16.2.6.3

Electric motor driven fire pump

Each switch on the dedicated power feed to an electric sprinkler fire pump motor shall be labelled as follows: SPRINKLER PUMP MOTOR SUPPLY NOT TO BE SWITCHED OFF IN THE EVENT OF FIRE

16.2.7

Testing and operating devices

All valves and instruments used for testing and operation of the system shall be appropriately labelled. Corresponding identification shall appear in the documentation.

17

Commissioning and approval inspections

17.1

Commissioning inspections

17.1.1

Pipework

During installation all pipework shall be inspected for cleanliness on the inside. Moreover, after installation the entire pipework shall be thoroughly flushed via its flushing connections. All installation pipework shall be hydrostatically tested for not less than 24 hours, to a pressure of not less than 15 bar, or 1,5 times the maximum pressure to which the system will be subjected, (both measured at the alarm valves), whichever is the greater. The pressure test in plastic and composite pipe systems shall be in accordance with the respective installation instructions. The installer shall issue a pressure test report. Dry pipework shall also be tested pneumatically to a pressure of not less than 2,5bar for not less than 24 hours. Any leakage that results in a loss of pressure greater than 0,15 bar for the 24 hours shall be corrected.

137


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Any faults disclosed, such as permanent distortion, rupture or leakage, shall be corrected and the test repeated. Note: If climatic conditions do not allow hydraulic testing to be carried out immediately, it should be carried out as soon as conditions permit.

17.1.2

Equipment

The system shall be tested in accordance with the routine control programme. Any deficiencies shall be corrected.

17.1.3

Water supplies

Water supplies shall be tested in accordance with 7.5 over the required operating time at 100% of the nominal delivery rate of the pump. If the maximum flow demand (Qmax) exceeds 100% of the nominal delivery rate, this quantity shall be delivered for at least 15 minutes in this test run. Diesel motor driven pumps shall also be tested in accordance with 18.3.3.4 and 18.3.3.5.

17.2

Installation certificate and documents

17.2.1

Required documents for VdS Schadenverhütung

Upon completion of the installation the installer shall issue an installation certificate and send it to VdS without being asked. The following documents shall be attached to the installation certificate: − hydraulic calculation relevant for rating the water supply; − drawing of reduced capacity tank/storage tank; − power supply details; − pressure test report (not required for extensions of less than 11 sprinklers); − flushing test report (not required for extensions of less than 11 sprinklers); − pump test report in accordance with 17.1.3; − handover document to the operator; − list of companies, institutions etc. responsible for maintaining the operational readiness in case of sprinkler systems installed in buildings occupied by several companies etc.; − manufacturing document for the welding procedure of prefabricated pipes; − for reduced capacity and storage tanks made of reinforced concrete: − test report on the concrete quality; − test report and reinforcement approval by a test engineer for structural design.

17.2.2

Required documents for the operator

a) Installation certificate stating that the system complies with all appropriate requirements of these rules, or giving details of any deviation from the requirements; b) a complete set of operating instructions and "asbuilt" drawings including identification of all valves and instruments used for testing and operation and an operator’s programme for inspection and checking (see 18.3).

138

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


18

Maintenance of operational readiness

18.1

General

Sprinkler, water spray and foam extinguishing systems have a high success rate in extinguishing fires, also in hazards with high fire loads. To maintain operational readiness of these extinguishing systems, regular inspections and repairs shall be carried out. This clause specifies the minimum measures to be taken and the parties responsible for carrying them out. Given the diversity of system designs, however, it is impossible to specify the full range of control and repair measures. The operator shall carry out regular inspections (see 18.3). The operator shall appoint one responsible staff member (“sprinkler warden”) and one deputy to be in charge of servicing and controlling the extinguishing system. They shall see to it that the operating and maintenance instructions of the installer and any legal regulations are met. After control and repair works the entire system shall be returned to the proper operational condition. On all works carried out for maintaining the operational readiness the operator shall keep a log book to be kept on the premises (e.g. VdS 2212). Note: The operator should notify all persons involved of the intent to carry out the a.m. works and/or of the results. Any modification or servicing of water extinguishing systems, such as inspections, maintenance works or repairs shall be carried out by installers who are VdS-approved for the respective type of system, have the system-specific spare parts and the required data. Note: The VdS-approved installers for water extinguishing systems are listed in VdS 2490.

18.1.1

Replacement sprinklers

A stock of spare sprinklers shall be kept on the premises as replacements for operated or damaged sprinklers. Spare sprinklers, together with sprinkler spanners as supplied by the manufacturer, shall be housed in a cabinet or cabinets located in a prominent and easily accessible position where ambient temperature does not exceed 38°C. The number of spare sprinklers shall be not less than: a)

6 for LH installations;

b)

24 for OH installations;

c)

36 for HHP and HHS installations.

The stock shall be replenished promptly after spares are used. Where installations contain high-temperature sprinklers, sidewall or other variations of sprinkler pattern or contain control valves, an adequate number of these spares shall also be maintained.

139


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Old spare sprinklers no longer approved (e.g. those with a response sensitivity RTI > 200) shall be replaced by approved sprinklers or complemented by them not later than in the following cases: −

when sprinklers are installed in racks with PP/PE/PS materials or storage containers;

−

when substantial extensions or modifications of installations are carried out.

18.1.1.1

Replacement of installed old sprinklers

Installed sprinklers operate under a variance permit, subject to the following exceptions: −

rack sprinklers in storages with PP/PE/PS materials or storage containers, where the sprinklers are no longer approved for the application; they shall be replaced by sprinklers approved for the relevant hazard;

−

applications in which the performance of old sprinklers is doubtful (e.g. insufficient response sensitivity in low voids with increased fire load).

After considerable reconstruction or change of use in existing sprinkler systems the a.m. variance permit does not apply. Old sprinklers shall be replaced by new approved sprinklers not later than 50 years after installation.

18.1.2 18.1.2.1

Precautions and procedures when a system is not fully operational Minimising the effects

Servicing, alterations and repairs of systems which are not fully operational shall be carried out such as to minimise the time and extent of non-operation. When an installation is rendered inoperative the operator shall implement at least the following measures: a)

the fire authorities shall be informed if the alarm is connected to the fire brigade;

b)

alterations and repairs to an installation or its water supply (except possibly a life safety installation, see Annex F) shall be carried out during normal working hours;

c)

any hot work shall be subject to a permit system. Smoking and naked lights shall be prohibited in affected areas during the progress of the work;

d)

when an installation remains inoperative outside working hours all fire doors and fire shutters shall remain closed;

e) fire extinguishing appliances shall be kept in readiness, with trained personnel available to handle them;

140

f)

as much as possible of the installation shall be retained in an operative condition by cutting off pipework feeding the part or parts where work is taking place;

g)

in the case of manufacturing premises, when the alterations or repairs are extensive, or it is necessary to disconnect a pipe exceeding 40 mm diameter, or to overhaul or remove a main stop valve, alarm valve or check valve, every effort shall be made to carry out the work while any machines are turned off;

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


h)

any pump which is out of commission shall be isolated by means of the valves provided.

i)

The staff responsible for monitoring the respective areas shall be informed and the areas shall be permanently inspected.

Note: Where possible, parts of the zones should be reinstated to provide some protection overnight by using blinders and blanks within the pipework; the blinders and blanks shall be fitted with visible indicator tags numbered and logged to ensure their removal after the works have been finished. 18.1.2.2

Planned shut-down

Only the operator shall give permission for a sprinkler group or zone to be shut down for any reason other than an emergency. Before a system is wholly or partly shut down every part of the premises shall be checked to ensure that there is no indication of fire. Where premises are subdivided into separate occupancies constituting buildings in communication or into risks protected by common sprinkler installations, all occupiers shall also be advised that the installation is to be turned off. Particular attention shall be given to situations where installation pipework passes through walls or ceilings where these may feed sprinklers in areas needing special consideration. 18.1.2.3

Unplanned shut-down

When an installation is rendered inoperative as a matter of urgency or by accident, the precautions in 18.1.2.1 shall be observed as far as they are applicable with the least possible delay. The authorities shall also be notified as soon as is possible.

18.2

Action following sprinkler operation

18.2.1

General

The water to an installation or zone of an installation that has operated shall not be shut off until all fire has been extinguished. The decision to shut down an installation or zone which has operated because of fire shall be taken only by the fire brigade. Following shut-down after operation of an installation, the operated sprinkler heads shall be replaced by heads of the correct type and temperature rating, and the water supply restored. Unopened sprinklers around the area in which operation took place shall be checked for damage by heat or other cause and replaced as necessary. Components removed from the system shall be retained by the operator for possible examination by an authority.

18.3

Operator’s control programme

General The installer shall provide the operator with instructions on the controls of the system to be carried out. This includes action to be taken in respect of faults and operation of the 141


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

system, with particular mention of the procedure for emergency manual starting of pumps, and details of the weekly control as per 18.3.3. Note: In the case of installations without any significant safety deficiencies, −

inspected by VdS at least once a year,

−

being subject to the conclusion of a servicing contract with a VdS-approved installer, and

−

being subject to appropriate organisational measures,

the daily and weekly controls may be adjusted accordingly and by agreement with VdS.

18.3.1

Special controls

During the cold season sprinkler systems shall be especially protected against freezing. The pipework of dry pipe systems shall be drained before and during each frost period. For further details on the protection of sprinkler systems against freezing see VdS 2373. The following controls shall be carried out and recorded: − accumulators The electrolyte level and density of all cells of accumulators (including those in diesel engine starter batteries and those for controller power supplies) shall be controlled. If the density is low, the installer shall check the battery charger. If the charger is working normally, the installer shall replace the battery or batteries affected. − control of compressor oil levels Any procedures stipulated by the component manufacturers shall be carried out additionally.

18.3.2

Daily controls

Daily controls shall be carried out on all weekdays. Maximum interval between controls due to Sundays and holidays shall be three days. In the case of systems whose operational status is monitored automatically in accordance with Clause 19, daily controls are not necessary. In this case, controls shall be carried out at least once a week. The following shall be checked and recorded:

142

−

fill levels in water tanks (storage tanks, reduced capacity tanks, ground and elevated tanks and pump priming tanks);

−

fill levels in pressure tanks;

−

fill levels in fuel tanks;

−

fill levels in foam concentrate tanks;

−

pressure in pressure tanks;

−

pressure upstream of alarm valves;

−

pressure in pipework of dry, alternate and pre-action installations;

−

functionality of the heating equipment (during heating period) in the sprinkler equipment room, for wet pipe systems, etc.

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

18.3.3 18.3.3.1


Weekly control General

Each part of the weekly routine shall be carried out at intervals of not more than 7 days. 18.3.3.2

Controls

The following shall be controlled and recorded: a) the correct operational position of all main stop valves; Note: The slide valves in pipes, e.g. upstream and downstream of the pump, from the water supplies to the extinguishing system, upstream of alarm valves being able to interrupt the water flow, shall be secured in the open position such that unauthorised persons cannot adjust them. The slide valves in pipes, e.g. test pipe, pipe leading to the fire department supply connections, draining pipe of tanks being able to decrease the water flow, shall be secured in the closed position such that unauthorised persons cannot adjust them. b) any water levels in rivers, canals, lakes that are relevant for the water supply of the system. 18.3.3.3

Water motor alarm control

Each water motor alarm shall be sounded for not less than 30 s and simultaneously the connection to the fire brigade or the permanently manned location shall be checked. Note: The procedure shall be agreed with the alarm signal recipient. 18.3.3.4

Automatic pump starting control

The automatic pump starting control shall include the following: a) fuel and engine lubricating oil and cooling water levels in diesel engines shall be checked; b) water pressure on the starting device shall be reduced, thus simulating the condition of automatic starting; c) when the pump starts, the starting pressure shall be checked and recorded; d) the oil pressure, cooling water temperature and engine speed on diesel engines shall be checked, as well as the flow of cooling water through open circuit cooling systems For pump start controls the test run shall last until the normal operating data of the driving motor, such as power consumption, oil/cooling water temperature, are reached. In the case of electric motors the power consumption is measured. 18.3.3.5

Control of manual diesel engine restart

Immediately after the pump start as per 18.3.3.4, the following diesel engine controls shall be carried out: a) the engine shall be run for the time recommended by the manufacturer, or at least until the operating temperature has been reached; the engine shall then be stopped and immediately restarted using the manual start button; b) the water level in the primary circuit of closed circuit cooling systems shall be controlled.

143


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Oil pressure, engine temperatures and coolant flow shall be monitored throughout the control. Oil pipes shall be controlled and a general control made for leakage of fuel, coolant or exhaust fumes. This also applies to diesel engines of standby supply generators.

18.3.4

Monthly control

The following shall be controlled and recorded: −

visual control of pipework, sprinklers, nozzles and pipe hangers;

−

function control of automatic priming and refill equipment for reduced capacity tanks, pump priming tanks and elevated reservoirs;

−

control of permitted storage heights; control of minimum spacing between sprinkler deflector or nozzles and top of stored goods;

−

sprinkler systems with foam proportioning;

−

function control of the proportioning unit and any of its fittings without the use of water or foaming agent.

18.3.5

Quarterly control

General The following controls and inspections shall be made and recorded at intervals of not more than 13 weeks by the operator/person responsible (“sprinkler warden”). These checks may also be carried out during the servicing by a VdS-approved installer: 18.3.5.1

Control of fire hazard classification

The effect of any changes of structure, occupancy, storage configuration, heating, lighting or equipment etc. of a building on hazard classification or installation design shall be identified in order that the appropriate modifications may be carried out. Note: Following significant modifications the correct hazard classification should be agreed with the authorities or an approved installer. 18.3.5.2

Sprinklers, multiple controls and sprayers

Sprinklers, multiple controls and sprayers affected by deposits shall be carefully cleaned. Painted or distorted sprinkler heads, multiple controls or sprayers shall be replaced by a VdS-approved installer. Particular attention shall be paid to sprinklers in spray booths, where more frequent cleaning and/or protective measures are necessary. 18.3.5.3

Pipework and pipe hangers

Pipework and hangers shall be random-checked for corrosion and painted as necessary. Bitumen-based paint on pipework, including the threaded ends of galvanised pipework, and hangers shall be renewed as necessary. Note: Bitumen-based paint may need renewal at intervals varying from 1 to 5 years according to the severity of the conditions.

144

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


Tape wrapping on pipes shall be repaired as necessary. The pipework shall be controlled for electrical earthing connections. Sprinkler pipework shall not be used for earthing electrical equipment and any earthing connections from electrical equipment shall be removed and alternative arrangements made. 18.3.5.4

Protection against freezing

The specific gravity of the anti-freeze solution shall be verified quarterly for unheated areas during the frost period, and generally quarterly for permanent cold storage. 18.3.5.5

Electrical supplies

Any secondary electrical supplies from diesel generators shall be checked for satisfactory operation. 18.3.5.6

Stop valves

All stop valves controlling the flow of water to sprinklers shall be operated to ensure that they are in working order, and securely refastened in the correct mode. This shall include the stop valves on all water supplies, at the alarm valves and all zone or other subsidiary stop valves. 18.3.5.7

Water flow alarm switches

Water flow alarm switches shall be controlled for correct function and allocation to the area of protection. 18.3.5.8

Trace heating and localised heating systems

Heating systems to prevent freezing in the sprinkler system shall be checked for correct function. 18.3.5.9

Monitoring system

Function control of the monitoring system (at least 1 transmitter per monitoring line); including transmission to permanently manned location.

18.4

Servicing programme by VdS-approved installer

Each routine of the schedule shall be carried out by a competent person of the VdSapproved installer who shall provide the operator with a signed, dated report of the inspection and advise of any rectification carried out or needed, and advise of any external factors, which may have affected the results. Any procedures stipulated by the component manufacturers shall be carried out in addition to this programme.

18.4.1 18.4.1.1

Half-yearly servicing routine by VdS-approved installer General

The following checks and inspections shall be made and recorded at intervals of not more than 6 months.

145


18.4.1.2

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Control of pump start

If in the event of a power failure an electric motor is supplied by an emergency power supply, the automatic changeover shall be tested. 18.4.1.3

Dry alarm valves

Dry alarm valves, and any accelerators and exhausters in dry pipe installations and subsidiary extensions shall be submitted to a trip test. To avoid flooding the entire pipework, an additional valve may be fitted downstream of the alarm valve. This shall be secured in the open position. Every five years the dry pipe installation shall be checked by carrying out the trip test with total flooding via the test facility in the presence of the authorities. 18.4.1.4

Sprinkler systems with foam proportioning

A function test of the foam proportioning unit shall be carried out with water, but without foaming agent. The functioning of all mechanical and electrical components of the foam proportioning unit shall be tested without using any foam concentrate. Foam tanks and components permanently in contact with foam concentrate shall be checked for visible signs of defects, e.g. leakages and fouling of seals.

18.4.2 18.4.2.1

Yearly servicing by VdS-approved installer General

The following checks and inspections shall be made and recorded at intervals of not more than 12 months. 18.4.2.2

Wet alarm valves

Mechanically moveable components shall be checked for smooth movement. 18.4.2.3

Automatic pump flow test and public mains flow test (direct connection)

Each water supply pump or direct connection in the installation shall be tested at the full load condition. The entire operational area of the pump (pump curve) or of the direct connection shall be checked. The required pressure/flow values shall be reached. Note: Appropriate allowances shall be made for pressure losses in the supply pipe and valves between the source and the gauge at the measuring point. 18.4.2.4

Diesel engine failed-to-start test

The failed-to-start alarm shall operate after the sixth cycle of cranking, when the following sequence is carried out: a) the fuel supply shall be isolated; b) the engine shall be cranked for not less than 15 s; c) cranking shall be stopped for not less than 10 s and not more than 15 s; d) (b) and (c) shall be repeated a further five times; e) the fuel supply shall be restored. Immediately after this test the engine shall be started using the manual starting system.

146

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

18.4.2.5


Float valves on water storage tanks

Float valves on water storage tanks shall be checked for correct function. 18.4.2.6

Strainers and screens

Strainers and screens in the water supply shall be inspected at least annually and cleaned as necessary. 18.4.2.7

Sprinkler systems with foam proportioning

The foam quality of sprinkler systems with foam proportioning shall be checked by the manufacturer or by a trained expert in accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications. The availability of specified quantities of concentrate in operational foam concentrate tanks and the available reserve quantity should be checked in accordance with the appropriate requirements. A function test of the foam proportioning unit and any of its fittings shall be carried out using foam concentrate via the test pipe. The functioning of the foam proportioning unit shall be tested at a flow of 500 l/min. Appropriate flow measuring devices shall be fixed (or available). The foam proportioning percentage shall comply with the foam concentrate manufacturer’s specifications or come within the tolerances specified by the manufacturer. During the test the water/foam concentrate mixture shall be led into an appropriately dimensioned collecting tray via an appropriate connection. The operator is responsible for a controlled disposal of the water/foam concentrate mixture. Any contamination of the water supply by foam concentrate shall be prevented. Immediately after expiry of the period specified for the proportioning, the water/foam concentrate mixture shall be drained from the test pipe. The period specified for the proportioning shall not exceed 3 min. The design concentration of the foam concentrate shall be verified by appropriate measures (e.g. refractometer, conductivity measurement device). Following the test, any components in contact with the foam concentrate, which are free of foam concentrate while in operational status, shall be flushed with water. Any components permanently filled with foam concentrate mixture shall be drained and thoroughly flushed with water before refilling with foam concentrate or foam concentrate mixture.

18.4.3 18.4.3.1

3-year inspection by VdS-approved installer General

The following checks and inspections shall be made and recorded at intervals of not more than 3 years. 18.4.3.2

Water supply stop valves, alarm and non-return valves

All water stop valves, alarm and non-return valves shall be controlled and replaced or repaired as necessary.

18.4.4

5-year inspection by VdS-approved installer

Storage and pressure tanks All tanks shall be examined for corrosion externally and internally. The tanks shall be cleaned, repainted and/or have the corrosion protection refurbished, as necessary. The test intervals for pressure tanks shall be in accordance with the Pressure Equipment Directive and the appropriate legal regulations.

147


18.4.5

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

15-year inspection by VdS-approved installer

At not more than 15-year intervals, all storage tanks shall be drained, cleaned, and examined internally. The structure shall be repaired, as necessary.

18.4.6

25-year inspection/12,5-year inspection

More details regarding procedure and extent of the inspection are given in the leaflet VdS 2091. The entire pipework of wet pipe systems shall be inspected every 25 years, and the entire pipework of dry pipe systems shall be inspected every 12,5 years. The pipework shall be pressurised with 10 bar minimum and thoroughly flushed after the test, as necessary. Missing test facilities (see 13.5.2) at the end of the pipework shall be added. For every 100 sprinklers one branch pipe, or a total of at least three pipes, whichever is the greatest, shall be checked for incrustation and corrosion. Any damage affecting the performance of the system shall be removed. In addition, different diameters of main distribution pipes and distribution pipe spurs shall be checked, with at least one pipe each of three diameters. The inspection of pipe sections of wet pipe systems may generally be limited to the number of alarm valve stations to be checked as per Table 18.01. Wet pipe systems

Number of alarm valve stations

Number of alarm valve stations to be checked (pipework)

up to 10

1

up to 20

2

up to 30

3

up to 40

4

up to 50

5 etc.

Table 18.01: Random inspections of pipework Where the stations are located in several buildings, at least the pipework of one alarm valve station per building shall be inspected. If the pipework of several alarm valve stations within one building requires inspection, especially those areas should be checked in which operational influences may have caused damage to the pipework. The scope of inspections for dry pipe systems shall not be reduced. The characteristics of the installed sprinklers of each installer shall be randomly tested by the VdS Laboratories. The scope of random tests is specified in Table 18.02.

148

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


Total number of sprinklers

Number of sprinklers to be submitted

up to 5.000

20

up to 10.000

40

up to 20.000

60

up to 30.000

80

up to 40.000

100

more than 40.000

determined by VdS according to hazard

Table 18.02: Random tests of sprinklers Where dry pendent sprinklers are installed, these shall also be randomly tested by the VdS Laboratories every 12,5 years. The scope of random tests is specified in Table 18.03. Total number of dry pendent sprinklers

Number of sprinklers to be submitted

up to 100

5

up to 200

10

more than 200

in accordance with Table 18.02

Table 18.03: Random tests of dry pendent sprinklers Sprinklers should mainly be taken from those areas in which operational influences may have caused damage to the sprinklers, e.g.: −

frequent change of water due to sprinkler system extensions;

−

highly corrosive ambient conditions;

−

influence of the water used;

−

periodical temperature variations;

−

vibrations;

−

radiant heat.

Where the sprinklers are located in different buildings, at least 20 sprinklers per building shall be submitted. In the case of different operational influences within one building it may be necessary to check a larger number of sprinklers. VdS will determine the number according to the hazard in question. Additional measures shall be taken if −

the error rate possibly causing failure > 2,5%;

−

the error rate possibly causing impairment > 25%;

−

the sum of both > 25%.

Two further random tests may be carried out to confirm or verify the result, with the error rate being assessed for all sprinklers submitted. If after the third random test the error rate of all the tested sprinklers exceeds the a.m. values, appropriate measures shall be taken, e.g. the sprinklers of the respective system shall be removed. Where the negative results refer to parts of the system whose ambient conditions are not representative for the entire system, VdS shall evaluate the system with regard to the ambient conditions. This may involve new random tests in a different part of the system, in which case the negative results of former random tests are disregarded.

149


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Note 1: Further random checks will only make sense if the a.m. error rates may be fallen below by all samples taken (sum of all individual samples). This shall apply to a second random check of the same scope if the error rate of the first random check −

possibly causing failure does not exceed 5%;

−

possibly causing impairment does not exceed 50%;

−

the sum of both does not exceed 50%.

A third random check of the same scope will only make sense if the total error rate of both prior random checks −

possibly causing failure does not exceed 3,25%;

−

possibly causing impairment does not exceed 37,5%;

−

the sum of both does not exceed 37,5%.

From an economic point of view it is advisable to consider whether a second or third random check makes sense with regard to the size of the system. The minimum scope of the random check shall be in accordance with Table 18.01. Any increase shall be agreed with VdS. If possible, one random check should include sprinklers of the same construction, installed in areas typical for the system. If the system includes sprinklers of different construction, samples representative of each construction should be submitted. Note 2: A failure of individual sprinklers will be assumed if the sprinkler does not open, the K factor is reduced by 30%, or the water is not distributed. An impairment will be assumed if the K-factor is reduced by more than 10%, or in the case of inherent obstructions to spray. For the sprinkler system the VdS-approved installer shall submit to VdS a document confirming the tasks carried out. For 12,5/25-year inspections the requirements specified in VdS 2091 shall be met.

18.4.7

Modifications by VdS-approved installer

Any modifications to sprinklered areas, e.g. partitions, false ceilings, new machines or modified operating equipment, require an adjustment of the sprinkler protection.

150

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

19


Monitoring of sprinkler systems

In the following cases the operational status of sprinkler systems shall be monitored automatically: −

OH systems with more than 3000 sprinklers;

−

HHP and HHS systems with more than 750 sprinklers;

−

high rack storage systems with more than 80 sprinklers.

This requirement may also apply to sprinkler systems of other fire hazard classes, especially in the case of increased requirements for life safety reasons.

19.1

Stop valves

System parts whose failure or wrong adjustment may interrupt the flow of extinguishing water, prevent an alarm or the automatic start of pumping devices (e.g. sprinkler pumps) shall be permanently monitored for operational status. The following shall be monitored for correct adjustment: −

stop valves fitted in the extinguishing water flow, such as slide valves in the main water pipe, or slide valves for feed valves;

−

stop valves that are fitted not directly in the extinguishing flow, but may impair the extinguishing water flow, such as slide valves in the test pipe;

−

stop valves of pressure switches upstream of alarm devices, in fuel pipes, of fill level indicators, of monitoring equipment, in pipes of pump priming tanks;

−

stop valves in the connection between accelerator or exhauster and dry pipework.

19.2

Fill level

The sufficient storage of extinguishing water and fuel shall be monitored. This shall include e.g. the fill level of: −

storage tanks, such as intermediate, ground and elevated tanks;

−

pressure tanks;

−

fuel tanks;

−

pump priming tanks.

The monitoring device shall be easy to check.

19.3

Pressure

The operating pressure of main water pipes, pressure tanks and dry pipe systems shall be monitored.

19.4

Power supply

The power supply of the sprinkler system shall be monitored for power failure, disablement of the sprinkler pump controller, faulty controls of diesel engines or backup power generators.

151


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Regarding diesel engines and backup power generators the primary side of the chargers and the control voltage shall be monitored.

19.5

Lines

Switching and control lines for the transmission of switching commands shall be monitored automatically for broken wire and short circuit, provided that these faults would impair the operation of the sprinkler system. This does not apply to circuits that fully run in the transmission and receiving equipment. Lines for receiving and transmitting fault warnings shall be monitored for broken wire and short circuit.

19.6

Detector lines

In the case of individual indications not more than 60 fault detectors shall be included in one detector line. In all other cases not more than 15 fault detectors are permitted.

19.7

Sprinkler pump

While the sprinkler system is in operational status, any operation of the sprinkler pump shall be indicated as a fault.

19.8

Sprinkler equipment room

The sprinkler equipment room shall be monitored for keeping the minimum temperature as well as for flooding (if possible due to local conditions).

19.9

Fault warning

Any faults of the sprinkler system shall be indicated visually and audibly at a permanently manned location within the company. The audible signal shall be silenceable; the visual indication shall not extinguish until the fault has been remedied. If the company does not have any permanently manned location, the fault warning shall be transmitted automatically to staff members (e.g. via a telephone dialling device). Faults of the sprinkler system and faults of the monitoring system shall be indicated separately. As long as a fire alarm is indicated, the monitoring system or monitoring module of the control and indicating equipment shall not indicate any fault warnings.

19.10

Power supply of monitoring system

The power supply requires two power sources. One power source shall be an electrical network operated without interruption. The other power source shall be an accumulator automatically and uninterruptedly taking over the power supply of the monitoring system. The power sources shall have fixed connections to the monitoring system. The failure of one power source, even due to faults such as broken wire or short circuit, shall not lead to a failure of the other power source.

19.11

Power supply from electrical network

The power supply from the electrical network shall be designed such that an unlimited operation of the system and alarm devices is ensured. The power supply from the

152

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


electrical network shall be able to supply the charging current for the accumulator regular operation. The power supply from the electrical network requires a separate circuit with a separate, specially labelled fuse. Upstream of this fuse and up to the low-voltagelateral point of delivery of the electrical network (point of delivery into the building in which the monitoring system is located) only one more fuse may be fitted. A disablement of other equipment shall by no means interrupt the circuit. The charging device shall be designed such that it can automatically charge the accumulator from end-of-discharge voltage to 80% of its nominal capacity within 24 h maximum. The charging process shall take no longer than 72 h.

19.12

Power supply from accumulators

For systems with automatic fault warning at a not permanently manned location, the capacity of the accumulator shall be designed such that in the case of faulty network supply an unqualified operation of the system is ensured for not less than 72 h. After 72h the necessary alarm devices shall be operable for not less than 0,5 h. For systems with automatic fault warning at a permanently manned location (provided that an appropriate troubleshooting service is permanently available), the capacity of the accumulator shall be designed such that in the case of faulty network supply an unqualified operation of the system is ensured for not less than 30 h. After 30 h the necessary alarm devices shall be operable for not less than 0,5 h. For systems with automatic fault warning at a permanently manned location with a permanently available troubleshooting service), the capacity of the accumulator shall be designed such that in the case of faulty network supply an unqualified operation of the system is ensured for not less than 4 h. After 4 h the necessary alarm devices shall be operable for not less than 0,5 h. Separate equipment shall be available for the network power supply of monitoring system and charging device, and it shall be possible to immediately connect an emergency generating unit for supplying the charging device. The emergency generating unit shall be able to supply the monitoring system for not less than 30 h. The accumulator shall not be connected to any loads other than the sprinkler system. Accumulators shall be located sufficiently ventilated, dry and frost-proof rooms. They shall be positioned where they are protected from anticipated external impact as may lead to damage. Maintenance and inspection on the spot shall be possible.

19.13

Requirements to components of monitoring systems

Any components of monitoring systems shall be at least protection type IP 54. The functioning of the monitoring system shall be verifiable. Fault warnings for stop valves shall be released according to the shifting travel of the valves to be monitored. The shifting travel is the way from the just about closed condition to the completely open condition of the valve. Any stop valves fitted in the extinguishing water flow and any other stop valves that are permanently open while the sprinkler system is operational, shall, during closing, release a fault warning at not more than 20% of the shifting travel from the operational status of the valve.

153


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Any stop valves not fitted in the extinguishing water flow and closed while the sprinkler system is operational, shall release a fault warning before the water flow starts and at the latest at 10% of the shifting travel from the operational status of the valve. Fault warnings of stop valves of alarm devices and pressure switches shall be released even in intermediate positions. Fill level indicators of tanks shall release a fault warning if the nominal fill level is reduced by more than 10%. Pressure tanks shall release a fault warning if overfilled by more than 10%. Fuel tanks shall release a fault warning if the nominal fill level is reduced by more than 25%. The pressure monitoring of sprinkler systems immediately connected to public water mains shall release a fault warning, if the static pressure falls below the minimum pressure of the hydraulic calculation. Where reduced capacity tanks are refilled from public water mains, a fault warning shall be released, if the pressure in the water mains falls below 1 bar. In pressure tanks an operating pressure reduced by more than 10% shall release a fault warning. In dry pipe systems an operating pressure in the pipework reduced by more than 20% shall release a fault warning.

154

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


Annex A Classification of Hazards Tables A.01, A.02 and A.03 contain lists of minimum hazard classification. They shall also be used as guidance for occupancies not specifically mentioned. Schools and other educational institutions (certain areas) Offices (certain areas) Hotels (certain areas, see 5.2.1) Prisons

Table A.01: Light hazard occupancies (LH)

Type of business

Ordinary hazard group

OH1

OH2 1)

Ceramics

OH3 2)

OH4

glass factories

Chemicals

cement works

photographic laboratories

dyers soap factories photographic film manufacturers

Engineering

sheet metal product manufactur ers

engineering factories

car workshops (garages) electronics factories radio equipment factories washing machine factories

abattoirs bakeries biscuit factories breweries chocolate factories confectionery factories dairies

animal fodder manufacturers corn mills dehydrated vegetable and soup manufacturers farms sugar manufacturers

alcohol distilleries

laboratories (physical) laundries car parks (nonautomatic) museums

broadcasting studios railway stations operating rooms

cinemas and theatres concert halls convention rooms tobacco manufacturers TV studios

book binders cardboard manufacturers paper factories

waste paper processing

Food and beverages

Miscellaneo us

Paper

hospitals hotels libraries excluding book stores restaurants schools (LH, see 5.2.1) offices (LH, see 5.2.1)

paint application shops with watersoluble substances

155


Type of business

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Ordinary hazard group

OH1

OH2

1)

Rubber and plastics

Shops and offices

Textiles and clothing

OH3 2)

OH4

cable manufacturers (excluding PP/PE/PS or materials with similar fire behaviour, see HHP1) injection moulding (plastics excluding PP/PE/PS or materials with similar fire behaviour, see HHP1) plastic manufacturers and plastic goods (excluding foam plastics, PP/PE/PS or materials with similar fire behaviour, see HHP1) data processing (computer room excluding tape storage) offices (LH, see 5.2.1) leather goods manufacturers

Timber and wood

department stores shopping centres

exhibition halls 4)

carpet manufacturers (excluding rubber and foam plastics) cloth and clothing factories footwear manufacturers (excluding synthetic leather shoes) knitting manufacturers linen manufacturers mattress manufacturers (excluding foam plastics) sewing manufacturers weaving mills woollen and worsted mills

cotton mills flax preparation plants hemp preparation plants

woodworking manufacturers furniture factories (without foam plastics) furniture showrooms upholsterers (without foam plastics)

plywood manufacturers

1) Areas where there is panting; large quantities of flammable liquids or similar high fire load areas shall be treated as OH3. 2) Warehouses generally and high rise buildings according to Annex D in order to ensure flexibility. 3) Where combustible panels are used for insulation purposes, a higher hazard classification should be considered. 4) Very high ceilings require special consideration.

Table A.02: Ordinary hazard occupancies

156

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


HHP1

HHP2

HHP3

HHP4

cable manufacture PP/PE/PS or materials with similar fire behaviour

fire lighter manufacture

cellulose nitrate

firework manufacture

candle wax and paraffin factories

expanded plastics, expanded rubber and expanded plastics products (M4)

carpet manufacturers (with unexpanded plastics) floor cloth and linoleum manufacture footwear manufacturers with synthetic or plastic shoes injection moulding synthetics PP/PE/PS or materials with similar fire behaviour (M3)

carpet manufacturers (with rubber and expanded plastics) chipboard factories5) paint, colour and varnish manufacture

manufacture

tires for motor vehicles and freight vehicles

paper machines saw mills tar processing depots for buses, unloaded lorries and railway cars

match manufacturers print shops paint shops with solvent plastic manufacture and plastic goods PP/PE/PS or materials with similar fire behaviour refrigerator factories resin, soot and turpentine manufacture rope manufacturers rubberware manufacture rubber substitute manufacture synthetic fibre manufacture (excluding acrylic) wood wool manufacture 5)

Additional local application may be necessary.

Table A.03: High hazard process occupancies

157


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Annex B Process for Categorising Stored Materials B.1

General

The overall fire hazard of stored goods (defined as a product and its packaging) is a function of its heat release rate (kW) which in turn is a function of its heat of combustion (kJ/kg) and its burning rate (kg/sec). The heat of combustion is determined by the material or mix of materials in the goods. The burning rate is determined by both the materials involved and the configuration of the material. To categorise products, this method first addresses the material involved to produce a « material factor » and then modifies this where necessary due to the configuration of the goods to determine the category. Where no modification is required, the « material factor » is the sole determinant of the Category. Where stored goods and/or packaging contain polypropylene, polyethylene, polystyrene or plastics with similar fire behaviour, they shall be categorised in accordance with B.2, B.3 and B.4. The sprinkler system shall be designed according to the higher category resulting from the two methods, with K.7 being the highest category.

B.2

Material factor

Figure B1 shall be used to determine the Material Factor when goods consist of mixtures of materials. When using Figure B1, the stored goods shall be considered to include all packaging and pallet material. For the purpose of this evaluation, rubber should be treated in the same way as plastic. The storage of rubber tires is subject to special requirements. The following four material factors shall be used in determining the Category. (For categorising polypropylene, polyethylene, polystyrene and plastics with similar fire behaviour see also B.4.)

B.2.1

Material Factor 1

Non combustible products in combustible packaging and low or medium combustibility products in combustible/non-combustible packaging. Products having little plastic content as defined below (see Figure B.01): −

unexpanded plastic content less than 5% by weight (including the pallet);

−

expanded plastic content less than 5% by volume.

Examples :

158

−

metal parts with /without cardboard packaging on wood pallets;

−

powdered foods in sacks;

−

canned foods;

−

non-synthetic cloth;

−

leather goods;

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


−

wood products;

−

ceramics in cardboard/wood cases;

−

metal tools in cardboard/wood packaging;

−

plastic or glass bottles of non-flammable liquids in cartons;

−

large electrical appliances (with little packaging).

Figure B.01: Material Factor

B.2.2

Material Factor 2

Materials having higher energy content than Material Factor 1 materials, for instance those containing plastics in greater quantities (as defined in Figure B.01). Examples: −

wood or metal furniture with plastic seats;

−

electrical equipment with plastic parts or packaging;

−

electric cables on reels or in cartons;

−

synthetic fibres.

B.2.3

Material Factor 3

Materials which are predominantly unexpanded plastic (see Figure B.01) or materials of similar energy content. Examples: −

accumulators without electrolyte;

−

plastic briefcases;

−

personal computers;

−

unexpanded plastic cups and cutlery.

159


B.2.4

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Material Factor 4

Materials which are predominantly expanded plastic (more than 40% by volume) or materials of similar energy content (see Figure B.01). Examples: −

foam mattresses;

−

expanded polystyrene packaging;

−

foam upholstery.

Storage configuration

Exposed plastic container with non-combustible contents

Material Factor

1

2

3

4

Cat. III or IV

not applicable

not applicable

not applicable

Exposed plastic surface - unexpanded

Cat. III

Cat. III

Cat. III

Cat. IV

Exposed plastic surface - expanded

Cat. IV

Cat. IV

Cat. IV

Cat. IV

Open structure

Cat. II

Cat. II

Cat. III

Cat. IV

Solid block materials

Cat. I

Cat. I

Cat. II

Cat. IV

Granular or powdered material

Cat. I

Cat. II

Cat. II

Cat. IV

No special configuration

Cat. I

Cat. II

Cat. III

Cat. IV

Note: See B.3.1 to B.3.7 for explanations of the storage configurations.

Table B.01: Categories as a function of stored materials configuration

B.3

Effect of stored materials configuration

After determining the material factor, the stored materials configuration shall be consulted in Table B.01 to determine the most appropriate Categorisation. If an appropriate category is given in Table C.01 the higher of the two values shall be used (see B.4). The stored materials configurations specified in the table are described below.

B.3.1

Exposed plastic container with non-combustible content

This applies only to plastic containers containing non-flammable liquids or solids in direct contact with the container. Note : This configuration does not apply to metal parts in plastic storage boxes. Category III:

Containers with non-flammable liquids

Category IV:

Containers with non-combustible solids

Examples:

160

−

plastic bottles of soft drinks or liquids with less than 20% alcohol;

−

plastic tubs or drums of inert powder such as talcum.

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


Note: The non-combustible contents act as a heat sink and reduce the burning rate of the containers. Liquids are more effective than solids since they conduct heat more efficiently.

B.3.2

Exposed plastic surface - unexpanded

The Category should be III or IV when the commodity has exposed plastic surfaces comprising one or more sides or more than 25% of the surface area. Example: - metal parts in PVC storage containers

B.3.3

Exposed plastic surface - expanded

Exposed expanded plastics are more severe than unexposed plastics. They shall be treated as Category IV.

B.3.4

Open structure

Materials having very open structures generally present a higher hazard than materials with a closed structure. The high surface area together with high air access encourages rapid burning. The increase in hazard can be very substantial particularly with ordinary combustibles. Examples: −

cardboard;

−

in empty boxes assembled it is Category II (due to ready air access);

−

in rolls stored vertically it is either Category III or greater (Special Risk) depending on the storage method (closely stacked, banded or unbanded etc.).

B.3.5

Solid block materials

Materials in solid block form have a low surface area to volume/mass ratio. This reduces the burning rate and permits a reduction in Category. Example: −

blocks of solid rubber, PVC floor tiles in block storage etc.

Note: This configuration does not apply to blocks of expanded plastics (Category IV).

B.3.6

Granular or powdered materials

Granular materials excluding expanded plastics that will spill out during a fire tend to smother the fire and are thus less hazardous than their basic material counterparts. Example: −

plastic granules used for injection moulding stored in cardboard boxes

Note: This configuration does not apply to rack storage.

B.3.7

No special configuration

Goods that have none of the above characteristics, e.g. goods in cartons.

161


B.4

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Additional categorising method for polypropylene, polyethylene, polystyrene and plastics with similar fire behaviour

Where stored goods and/or packaging contain polypropylene, polyethylene, polystyrene or plastics with similar fire behaviour, they shall be categorised in accordance with B.2, B.3 and Table B.02. The sprinkler system shall be designed according to the higher category resulting from the two methods. If the percentage by weight of PP/PE/PS materials exceeds that permitted according to L4, K.7 shall be applied for designing the sprinkler system.

Stored goods2)

Packaging1)

V1

V2

V3

V4

L1

Cat. I

Cat. II

Cat. III

Cat. IV3)

L2

Cat. II

Cat. II

Cat. III

Cat. IV3)

L3

Cat. III

Cat. III

Cat. III

Cat. IV3)

L4

Cat. IV3) 4)

Cat. IV3) 4)

Cat. IV3) 4)

Cat. IV3) 4)

1) see B.4.1 2) see B.4.2 3) When installing horizontal sheet barriers in racks in accordance with 11.6.1.4 , choose Cat. III. 4) In the case of categorisations due to PE/PP/PS with rack storage and quick response sprinklers and packaging in cartons, Cat. III is possible. Note: PP/PE/PS = Polyethylene (PE) / Polypropylene (PP) / Polystyrene (PS) and plastics with similar fire behaviour

Table B.02: Categorisation of stored goods and/or packaging containing polypropylene, polyethylene, polystyrene or plastics with similar fire behaviour

B.4.1 Packaging Packaging shall be categorised in accordance with Table B.02 and the following: V1 Non-combustible packaging, wood pallets and combustible edge protection are permitted. The edge protection shall not include more than 20% of the surface area of the packed goods. If the edge protection is made of foam, it shall not include more than 5% - and in the case of edge protection covered by combustible or non-combustible materials not more than 10% - of the surface area of the packed goods. Packaging made of wood, paper or plastics is not permitted. Beverage crates made of PP/PE/PS, empty or with PET bottles, see Annex C. V2 Wood crates, wood pallets, wood packaging, paper, carton, corrugated cardboard and unexpanded plastics (excluding PE/PP/PS unless they are used as foil or edge protection). Foams (excluding foams used for edge protection purposes) are not permitted. Where foam is used for edge protection purposes, it shall not include more than 5% - and in the case of edge protection within crates and cartons not more than 10% - of the surface area of the packed goods. Packaging made of PP/PE/PS materials are permitted where the entire mass ratio per packaging unit (stored goods and packaging) falls below 15% and not more than 10% of the entire surface made of PP/PE/PS while the rest of the surface is made of non-combustible material. This excludes tote boxes (KLT) and similar plastic boxes. V3 Packaging types V1 resp. V2 in connection with foams or PP/PE/PS materials. The foam percentage of the packaging, relating to the volume of the packed goods, shall not exceed 15% - within crates and cartons 30%. Packaging made of PP/PE/PS materials are permitted where the entire mass ratio per packaging unit (stored goods and

162

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


packaging) falls below 15%. The entire mass ratio of PP/PE/PS per packaging unit may be 30%, provided that not more than 20% of the surface area is made of PP/PE/PS and the rest is made of non-combustible material. This excludes tote boxes (KLT) and similar plastic boxes. V4 Packaging made of PP/PE/PS materials are permitted where the entire mass ratio per packaging unit (stored goods and packaging) falls below 30%. The entire mass ratio of PP/PE/PS per packaging unit may be 45%, provided that not more than 20% of the surface area is made of PP/PE/PS and the rest of the surface area is made of noncombustible material; apply K.7 where the mass ratio is higher. This excludes tote boxes (KLT) and similar plastic boxes. Where in spite of chaotic storage no accumulation of materials or packaging made of PP/PE/PS occurs and this can be evidenced to VdS, the a.m. threshold values in percent for the respective stored goods/packaging may be assigned to the entire storage.

B.4.2

Stored goods

For categorising the stored goods according to Table B.02 the following shall be observed: L1 Non-combustible goods, also food in glasses or tin cans L2 Goods of low and medium combustibility, such as wood, paper, cardboard. Foams are permitted up to a ratio of 15% relating to the gross volume, provided that they are enclosed by non-combustible material. PP/PE/PS materials are permitted up to a mass ratio of 15%, provided that not more than 10% of the surface consist of PP/PE/PS and the rest of non-combustible material. This excludes e.g. paper and carton in rolls stored vertically, and corrugated cardboard stored vertically, toilet paper. L3 Goods of high combustibility, such as vertically stored paper and carton rolls, wood piles permeable to air, stored material with a foam ratio of up to 15% relating to the gross volume, and goods with a foam ratio of up to 30% of the gross volume enclosed by noncombustible material are permitted. Goods with a mass ratio of PE/PP/PS of up to 15% are permitted. Goods with a mass ratio of PE/PP/PS of up to 30% are permitted, provided that not more than 20% of the surface consist of PP/PE/PS and the rest consists of non-combustible material. L4 Goods with a higher foam ratio than specified in L3. Goods with a mass ratio of PE/PP/PS of up to 30% are permitted. Goods with a mass ratio of PE/PP/PS of up to 45% are permitted, provided that not more than 30% of the surface consist of PP/PE/PS and the rest consists of non-combustible material; for any higher mass ratio apply K.7. Note: PP/PE/PS = polyethylene (PE) / polypropylene (PP) / polystyrene (PS) and plastics with similar fire behaviour.

163


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Annex C Alphabetic Listing of Stored Products and Categories Table C.01 is applicable where any packaging of the goods, with or without pallets, is no more hazardous than a cardboard box or a single layer of corrugated cardboard wrapping. Product

Category

Comments

Accumulators with electrolyte

II

Plastic accumulator without electrolyte requires special protection in accordance with Annex B

Adhesives

III

Adhesives without solvents

I

Asphalt paper

II

In horizontal rolls

Asphalt paper

III

In vertical rolls

Batteries, dry cell

II

See also accumulators

Beer

I

Beer

II

Beverage crates (plastic) with empty glass bottles

III

Beverage crates (plastic) with full glass bottles

II

Containers in plastic or wooden crates

Non-flammable beverages

Beverage crates III (plastic) without bottles or with full PET bottles Beverage crates (plastic) with empty PET bottles

K7

In the case of block storage and under the following conditions in OH 3 risks foam proportioning is not required: - blocks < 50 m² with appropriate aisles - quick response sprinklers - storage height 1,50 m max.

Books

II

Candles Canvas - tarimpregnated

See wax/paraffin III

Carbon black

II

Cardboard (all types)

III

In rolls stored horizontally

Cardboard (all types)

II

Stored flat

Cardboard cartons

III

Empty, heavy weight, made up boxes

Cardboard cartons

II

Empty, light weight, made up boxes

Carpet tiles

III

Carpets - without plastics

II

Carton - waxed, flats

II

Carton - waxed, made- III up

164

Cellulose

II

Cellulose pulp

II

Baled, without nitrite and acetate

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


Product

Category

Ceramics

I

Cereals

II

Boxed

Charcoal

II

Excluding impregnated charcoal

Charcoal, powder

III

Cloth, synthetic

III

Cloth, wool or cotton

II

Clothes

II

Coconut matting

II

Confectionery

II

Cork

II

Cotton - baled

II

Crockery

I

Electrical appliances

I

Electrical appliances

III

Comments

Stored flat

Special measures may be necessary, such as an increased area of operation

Electrical cable or wire

Predominantly metal construction (not more than 5% plastics)

Storage in racks requires in-rack sprinklers in tier levels

Esparto, alfagrass

III

Loose or baled

Fertilizer solid

II

May require special measures

Fibreboard

II

Firelighters (barbecue) III Flax

II


Flour

II

In sacks or paper bags

Foods - tinned

I

In cardboard boxes and trays

Foodstuffs

II

In sacks

Furniture - upholstered II

With natural fibres and materials but excluding plastics

Furniture - wooden

II

Furs

II

Glass fibre

I

Glassware

I

Grain

II

In sacks

Hemp

II

Special measures may be necessary, such as

Hides

II

Jute

II

Knitwear

II

Laminated board

II

Leather goods

II

Linen

II

Linoleum

III

Matches

III

Mattresses

II

Flat in boxes Empty

an increased area of operation

See clothes

165


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Product

Category

Comments

Mattresses

IV

With foamed plastics

Meat

II

Chilled or frozen

Metal goods

I

Milk powder

II

Office material

III

Paints

I

Water based

Paper

II

Sheets stored horizontally

Paper

III

Weight < 5 kg/100 m², (e.g. tissue paper), rolls stored horizontally

Paper

IV

Weight < 5 kg/100 m², (e.g. tissue paper), rolls stored vertically

Paper

III

Weight > 5 kg/100 m², (e.g. newspaper), rolls stored vertically

Paper

II

Weight > 5 kg/100 m², (e.g. newspaper), rolls stored horizontally

Paper - bitumen coated

III

Paper - pulp

II

Rolled or baled

Paper - waste

III


Pillows

II

Polypropylene and IV polyethylene or plastics with similar fire behaviour – storage containers

In bags or sacks

Feathers and down See B.4 and Annex K7 Rack storage: tier level sprinklers with max. horizontal spacing of 1,5m and ceiling sprinklers with “special” response sensitivity. For all other storage types: max. storage height 3m; only non-combustible pallets, e.g. steel and closed containers shall be used; stacking height per pallet shall not exceed 1m; sprinkler shall have “special” response sensitivity. In the case of block storage and OH3 risk a foam proportioning is not necessary under the following conditions: - blocks < 50 m² with appropriate aisles, - quick response sprinklers, storage height 1,50 m max.

Rags

166

See B.4 and polypropylene and polyethylene storage containers II

Loose or baled

Resins

III

Roof felt in rolls

III

Horizontal storage in rolls

Roof felt in rolls

III

Vertical storage in rolls

Rope - natural fibres

II

Shoes

II

Max. 5% plastics or rubber

Shoes

III

More than 5% plastics or rubber

Soap

II

Soap

II

Water-soluble

Spirituous liquors

I

20% or less alcohol in glass bottles (others see Annex K)

Spirituous liquors

III

More than 20% alcohol in glass bottles (others see Annex K)

String - natural fibres

II

A 08

Polypropylene and polyethylene

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


Product

Category

Comments

Sugar

II

In bags or sacks

Textiles

See clothes

Timber

III

In ventilated stacks

Timber

II

Not in ventilated stacks

Timber - unsawn

II

Tires

By agreement with VdS

Tobacco

II

Vegetable fibres

II

Leaf and finished goods Hay, straw, hemp, cotton etc Special measures may be necessary, such as an increased area of operation

Wax (paraffin)

IV

Wicker work

III

Wine

I

Wood

By agreement with VdS, proportioning of film forming foam concentrate

See timber

Wood - chipboard, plywood

II

Stored flat, excluding ventilated stacks

Wood pulp

II

Baled

Wood veneer sheets

III

Wood wool

IV

Baled

Table C1: Stored Products and Categories

167


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Annex D Requirements for Multi-Storey Buildings D.1

Scope

This Annex specifies requirements particular to the sprinkler protection of multi-storey buildings when zoning is adopted. It applies only to OH sprinkler installations of the wet pipe type. Note: See also Annex E – Special requirements for high rise systems.

D.2

Zoning of installations

Installations with sprinklers connected to a wet alarm valve station in OH risks may be either zoned or not. The number of sprinklers to be controlled by any one wet alarm valve station in Ordinary Hazard may exceed 1000 (see Table 10.01), with the following restrictions: a) the installation shall be zoned in accordance with D.3; b) zoned installations shall not include any hazard greater than OH3; c) car parks and areas involving the unloading and storage of goods shall be on a separate unzoned installation; d) the building shall be sprinkler protected throughout on all floors; e) the total number of sprinklers controlled by any one alarm valve station shall not exceed 10000.

D.3

Requirements for zoned installations

D.3.1

Extent of zones

No zone shall: a) include more than 500 sprinklers; b) encompass more than one ownership; c) cover more than one floor level, which may however include a mezzanine floor that is not greater than 100 m².

D.3.2

Zone subsidiary stop valves

Each zone shall be independently controlled by a single zone subsidiary stop valve, installed in a readily accessible position at the floor level of the zone it controls. Each valve shall be secured open and be labelled to identify the area of protection it controls.

D.3.3

Flushing Valves

Each zone shall be fitted with a valve not less than 20 mm nominal diameter, either on the end of the distribution pipe hydraulically most remote from the water supply, or on the end of each distribution pipe spur, as appropriate. The valve outlet shall be fitted with a brass plug cap.

168

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

D.3.4


Monitoring

Zoned sprinkler installations shall be provided with tamper proof devices to monitor the status of: a) each stop valve (i.e. either fully open or not fully open), including subsidiary stop valves, capable of interrupting the flow of water to sprinklers; b) water flow into each zone immediately downstream of each zone subsidiary stop valve, to indicate the operation of each zone, by means of a water flow alarm switch capable of detecting a flow equal to or greater than that from any single sprinkler; c) water flow through each main installation alarm valve station.

D.3.5

Zone test and drainage facilities

Permanent test and drainage facilities shall be provided immediately downstream of the water flow alarm switch on each zone. The test facility shall simulate operation of any single sprinkler head. Adequate provision shall be made for the disposal of waste water.

D.3.6

Installation alarm valve station

The alarm valve station of a zoned sprinkler installation shall have two stop valves, one on each side of a single alarm valve with a bypass connection of the same nominal bore around all three valves, fitted with a normally closed stop valve (see Figure D.01). Each of the three stop valves shall be fitted with tamper proof devices to monitor their status (i.e. fully open or not fully open).

Figure D.01: Alarm valve bypass arrangement for zoned multi-storey building installations

169


D.3.7

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Installation monitoring and alarms

The monitoring devices required by D.3.4 and D.3.6 shall be electrically connected to a control and indicating panel, located on the premises, where the following indications and warnings shall be given: a) by means of green visual indicators that each monitored stop valve is in its correct operational position; b) by means of audible devices and yellow visual indicators that one or more alarm valve stations are not fully open; c) by means of audible devices and yellow visual indicators that one or more zone subsidiary stop valves are not fully open; d) by means of audible devices and yellow visual indicators that the static pressure in any trunk main supplying the system has fallen to a value 0,5 bar or more below the normal static pressure; e) by means of audible devices and red visual indicators that water is flowing into the installation; f) by means of audible devices and red visual indicators that water is flowing into one or more zones. Facilities shall be provided at the indicator panel for silencing the audible alarms but the visual indicators shall continue to operate until the installation is restored to the normal standby condition. Any change in the panel alarm or fault indication after the audible alarm has been silenced shall cause it to resume sounding until it is again silenced or the panel reset to the normal standby condition.

D.4

Block Plan

Where installations are arranged in zones, the site block plan shall additionally indicate the positions of the zone control valves.

170

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


Annex E Special Requirements for High Rise Systems E.1

Scope

This Annex specifies requirements particular to the sprinkler protection of multi-storey buildings with a height difference between the highest and lowest sprinkler or pump system exceeding 45 m. The requirements are applicable to buildings intended for use with occupancies where the hazard is classified as not greater than OH3. Note: Special fire engineering solutions are needed for high rise systems with hazards greater than OH3, and specialist advice from VdS shall be sought.

E.2

Design criteria

E.2.1

Hazard group

High rise sprinkler systems shall comply with the requirements for OH3 protection.

E.2.2

Subdivision of high rise sprinkler systems

High rise sprinkler systems shall be sub-divided into sprinkler installations such that the height difference between the highest and lowest sprinkler on any one installation does not exceed 45 m (see Figures E.0l and E.02).

E.2.3

Zoning

High rise sprinkler systems shall be zoned in accordance with Annex D as well as D.3 and D.4.

E.2.4

Standing water pressures at back pressure and alarm valves

The minimum standing pressure at any back pressure or alarm valve inlet shall be no less than 1,25 times the static head difference between the valve and the highest sprinkler on the group. Back pressure valves controlling the flow of a group should operate correctly with a ratio of service pressure to installation pressure not exceeding 1,16:1, as measured by valve lift and pressure equalisation upstream of the back pressure valve.

E.2.5

Calculation of distribution pipework for pre-calculated systems

All systems shall be fully calculated. Thus, no details regarding pre-calculated systems are given.

E.2.6

Water pressures

Pipework, fittings, valves and other equipment shall be capable of withstanding the maximum pressure likely to be encountered. Note 1: To overcome the problem of pressures in excess of 12 bar, hydraulic alarm gongs may be driven via a pressure reducing valve or from a secondary water supply such as public water mains, controlled by a diaphragm valve connected to the main group control valve alarm port.

171


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Note 2: The maximum permitted pressure of the components is relevant for the maximum installation pressure.

E.3

Water supplies

E.3.1

Types of water supplies

The system shall have at least one superior single water supply. All systems shall be fully calculated, see E.2.5.

Figure E.01: Typical layout of high rise system with pump supply

172

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


Figure E.02: Typical layout of high rise system with gravity tanks and booster pumps

173


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Annex F Additional Requirements To Increase Life Safety Note: Every sprinkler system is designed for life safety purposes. The requirements specified in this Annex increase the reliability and should therefore be required by the building control authorities as special life safety requirements. For theatres see F.6.

F.1

Subdivision into zones

Installations shall be subdivided into zones, in accordance with Annex D as well as D.3 and D.4, with a maximum of 200 sprinklers per zone.

F.2

Wet Pipe Installations

Sprinkler installations for life safety shall be of the wet pipe type and any subsidiary dry pipe or alternate extension shall comply with 10.5.

F.3

Sprinkler type and sensitivity

Conventional, spray or sidewall sprinklers shall be used. The sensitivity shall be “quick” response, except that “Standard A” and “special” response may be used in rooms not less than 500 m² in area or not less than 5 m in height.

F.4

Alarm valve station

During servicing and maintenance of the installation alarm valves, the sprinkler installation shall be fully operational in all aspects. Note: In some countries alarm valve stations shall be redundant.

F.5

Water Supplies

The system shall have at least one superior single water supply. Note: In some countries duplicate water supplies are required for life safety installations.

F.6

Theatres

National requirements shall be complied with. In theatres with separated stages (i.e. where there is a safety curtain between the stage and auditorium) the safety curtain shall be provided with a line of drenchers controlled by a quick opening valve (e.g. a plug valve) fitted in an accessible position. The water supply for the drenchers shall be taken upstream of any alarm valve station. The stage shall be protected by a water spray installation with automatic and manual activation. Alternatively, stages with a total height that is not greater than 12 m may be protected by sprinklers. All workshops, dressing rooms, scenery, storerooms and spaces below the stage shall be sprinklered.

174

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

F.7


Additional precautions for maintenance

Only one zone of a multi-zone installation shall be shut down at a time. An installation or zone shall be shut down for the minimum time necessary for maintenance. The partial or complete shut-down of a life safety sprinkler installation shall be avoided wherever possible. Only the smallest part of the installation necessary shall be isolated. When a zone (or zones) is charged or recharged with water after draining, the flushing valve(s) (see D.3.3) shall be used to check that water is available in the zone (or zones). Individual alarm valves in a duplicate alarm valve station, where required, shall be separately serviced, provided the water supply to the installation is maintained. The following procedure shall be followed before servicing duplicate alarm valve stations: −

the stop valves to the duplicate alarm valve shall be checked and if necessary opened. One of the stop valves to the alarm valve to be serviced shall be closed and an alarm test (see 18.3.2.3) carried out immediately on the other alarm valve;

−

if water is not available, the stop valve shall be opened immediately, and the fault rectified before proceeding.

175


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Annex G Methods for sizing pipework G.1

Calculation of pressure losses in pipework

G.1.1

Pipe friction loss

Frictional pressure loss in pipes shall be hydraulically calculated. The Hazen-Williams formula should be used:

6,05 x 105

p =

1,85

C

xd

4,87

x L x Q1,85

where: p

is the pressure loss in the pipe, in bar;

Q

is the flow through the pipe, in litres per minute;

d

is the mean internal diameter of the pipe, in millimetres;

C

is a constant for the type and condition of the pipe (see Table G.01);

L

is the equivalent length of pipe and fittings, in metres.

The values of C to be used in sprinkler installation and water supply calculations shall be as indicated in Table G.01. Type of pipe

Value of C

cast iron

100

ductile iron

110

mild steel

120

galvanised steel

120

spun cement

130

stainless steel

140

reinforced glass fibre

140

Table G.01: C values for various types of pipe The pressure loss due to velocity may be ignored.

G.1.2

Static pressure difference

The static pressure difference between two inter-connecting points in a system shall be calculated from:

p = 0,098 h where: p is the static pressure difference, in bar; h is the vertical distance between the points, in metres.

176

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

G.1.3


Flow velocity

The flow velocity shall not exceed: −

6m/s through any valve or flow monitoring device;

−

10m/s at any other point in the system,

for the stabilised flow condition at the demand point involving an area of operation or where the system includes intermediate sprinklers the total number of sprinklers assumed to be in simultaneous operation. Note: The flow velocity in the pipework (including suction pipe) refers to the pipework calculation for the area of operation with the highest water rate, not to the effective flow quantity, i.e. to the intersection of the water supply characteristic and the pipework characteristic. For fittings it is important to observe for which flow velocity the fitting has been approved. The NPSH value for avoiding cavitation shall be calculated based on the full load flow rate.

G.1.4

Fitting and valve friction losses

The pressure loss due to friction in valves, in fittings and in couplings where the direction of water flow is changed through 45° or more, shall be calculated using an equivalent length and applying the formula specified in G.1. The appropriate equivalent length to be used shall be one of following: a) as specified by the equipment manufacturer; tested in the VdS Laboratories; b) as taken from Table G.02, provided that it is no lower than a). If there is a bend, tee or cross where there is a change in direction of flow and there is also a change in diameter at the same point, the equivalent pipe length and pressure loss shall be expressed in pipe length of the smaller diameter.

177


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Nominal diameter1)

Fittings and valves

DN

20

25

32

40

50

65

80

100

150

200

250

Equivalent length2) of straight steel pipe for a C value of 120 90° screwed elbow (standard)

0,63

0,77

1,04

1,22

1,46

1,89

2,37

3,04

4,30

5,67

7,42

90° welded elbow (r/d=1.5)

0,30

0,36

0,49

0,56

0,69

0,88

1,10

1,43

2,00

2,64

3,35

0,40

0,55

0,76

1,02

1,27

1,61

2,30

3,05

3,89

45° screwed elbow (standard)

0,34

0,66

1,25

1,54

2,13

2,44

2,91

3,81

4,75

6,10

8,61

11,34 14,85

Standard screwed tee or cross (flow through branch)

-

-

-

-

0,38

0,51

0,63

0,81

1,13

1,50

-

-

-

-

2,42

3,18

3,94

5,07

7,17

9,40 12,30

Gate valve - straight way

-

-

-

-

12,08 18,91 19,71 25,46 35,88 47,27 61,85

Alarm or back pressure valve (swinging type)

-

-

-

-

2,19

-

-

-

-

16,43 21,64 26,80 34,48 48,79 64,29 84,11

2,86

3,55

4,56

6,38

8,62

1,97

9,90

Alarm or back pressure valve (mushroom type) Butterfly valve Globe valve 1) Values for DN 125 may be interpolated. 2) These equivalent lengths can be converted as necessary for pipes with other C values by multiplying by the following factors: C value

100

110

120

130

140

Factor

0,714

0,850

1,000

1,160

1,330

Table G.02: Equivalent length of fittings and valves

178

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


For reductions in the pump suction pipe the following equivalent pipe lengths shall be adhered to: Nominal pipe diameter

Reduction for pump suction pipe1)

Reduction + expansion for throttle section2)

DN

Inches

20

¾

-

-

25

1

-

-

32

1¼

-

-

40

1½

-

0,5

50

2

3,3

0,6

65

2½

5,0

1,0

80

3

5,0

1,0

100

4

7,0

1,3

125

5

9,0

1,7

150

6

11,0

1,5

200

8

15,0

4,5

250

10

19,0

4,0

1) The equivalent lengths are valid only for reductions by one nominal diameter. For reductions by two nominal diameters these lengths shall be multiplied by factor 3,5, for reductions by three nominal diameters by 9,5, for reductions by four nominal diameters by 19, and for reductions by five nominal diameters by 32. 2

Note: Interpolation factor = 1,75 x saltus – 2,75 x saltus + 2 2) The table values are valid for throttle sections with reduction and expansion by one nominal diameter each. For reduction and expansion by two nominal diameters the table values shall be multiplied by 4,25, for reduction and expansion by three nominal diameters by 11. Throttle sections with different reductions and expansions may also be calculated based on these equivalent pipe lengths. For calculating the nominal diameter saltuses the reduction is relevant. The equivalent length shall be inserted in the pipework and nominal diameter prior to the reduction.

Table G.03: Equivalent lengths of reductions in the pump suction pipe and reduction + expansion for throttle sections

G.1.5

Accuracy of calculations

Calculations shall be carried out with the accuracy of measurements given in Table G.04. Quantity

Unit

Round to

Length

m

0,01

Height

m

0,01

Equivalent length

m

0,01

Flow

l/min

1,00

Pressure loss

mbar/m

1,00

Pressure

mbar

1,00

Velocity

m/s

-0,10

Area

m²

0,01

Density of water application

mm/min

0,10

Table G.04: Accuracy of hydraulic calculations

179


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Furthermore the following degree of accuracy for calculations shall be adhered to: −

the algebraic sum of pressure loss in a loop shall equal 0 mbar + 1 mbar;

−

where the water flows join together at a junction, the calculation shall be balanced to within 1 mbar;

−

the algebraic sum of water flow at a junction shall equal 0 l/min + 0,1 l/min.

G.2

Pre-calculated systems


G.3

Fully calculated systems

G.3.1

Design density – minimum design discharge

The minimum design discharge (in l/min) at each sprinkler within the area of operation is determined by: −

the required minimum pressure at the sprinkler;

−

the product of the effective area per sprinkler and the required design density in accordance with Cl. 6. Alternatively, the area per sprinkler can be the mean of a square group of 4 sprinklers (see Fig. H03-H.06).

Additional sprinklers installed to balance obstructions by fixtures such as ventilation ducts, smaller platforms, foreman’s offices etc. shall be taken into account as follows when calculating flow rate and head: −

If an area of operation ≥ 144 m² contains more than five additional sprinklers, the sixth and any further sprinkler shall be considered in the hydraulic calculation.

−

If an area of operation < 144 m² contains more than two additional sprinklers, the third and any further sprinkler shall be considered in the hydraulic calculation.

In the case of ribbed ceilings or similar partly open ceilings in which ceiling sprinklers represent obstructions, the additional sprinklers shall be relevant for the hydraulic calculation. Throttle sections may be installed to limit the water rate of the hydraulically most favourable area of operation. In these sections the velocity shall not exceed 20 m/s. The throttle section shall be at least 1m long. The nominal diameter of the throttle section shall not be reduced by more than three pipe diameter levels relating to the original pipe. Throttle sections shall not have any branch pipes, if the velocity exceeds 10 m/s. The following nominal diameters shall not be fallen below in throttle sections:

180

Hazard

Density of discharge

Nominal diameter

LH

2,25 mm/min

DN 32

OH / HHP / HHS

up to 10,0 mm/min

DN 50

more than 10,0 mm/min

DN 65

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


The area covered by each sprinkler shall be defined by the centre lines drawn midway between adjacent sprinklers at right angles to the line joining the sprinklers and by the boundary of the area covered (see Figure H.02). Where in-rack sprinklers are installed, the calculation shall be carried out taking into account the simultaneous flow and pressure requirement for roof or ceiling sprinklers and the intermediate level sprinklers.

G.3.2 G.3.2.1

Locations of the area of operation Hydraulically most unfavourable location

Variations in sprinkler spacing, layout, elevation, range centres, sprinkler orifice size and pipe sizes, as well as all possible locations, whether on the distribution pipes or between distribution pipes where these are connected by branch pipes, shall be considered when determining the hydraulically most unfavourable location of the area of operation (see Figures H.03, H.05 and H.06. Note: Proof of the correct position of the hydraulically most unfavourable area of operation in the case of gridded installations entails displacing the area of operation by one sprinkler pitch in each direction along branches, and in the case of looped installations by one sprinkler pitch along distribution pipes. G.3.2.2

Hydraulically most favourable location

All possible locations, whether on the distribution pipes, or between distribution pipes where these are connected by branch pipes, shall be considered when determining the hydraulically most favourable location of the area of operation (see Figures H.04 to H.06).

G.3.3 G.3.3.1

Shape of the area of operation Hydraulically most unfavourable location

The area of operation shall be as near as possible rectangular, even if this means that an adjacent area is only partly loaded. The type of roof, e.g. shed or saddle roof, and the type of storage are not relevant. The area of operation limitation shall be at walls or structural separations or centrally between sprinklers. The following shall be considered: a) in the case of terminal and looped configurations, the far side of the area shall be defined by the branch, or pair of branches where there is an end-centre layout. Sprinklers not constituting a full branch or pair of branches shall be grouped as close as possible to the distribution pipe on the next up-stream branch row to the rectangular area (see Figures H.03 and H.06); b) in the case of gridded configurations where branches run parallel to the ridge of a roof having a slope greater than 6°, or along bays formed by beams greater than 1,0 m deep, the far side of the area shall have a length L parallel to the branches, such that L is greater than or equal to two times the square root of the area of operation; The area of operation shall be as far as possible symmetrical with respect to the sprinkler layout (see Figure H.05).

181


G.3.3.2

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Hydraulically most favourable location

The area of operation shall be as near as possible square. The following shall be considered: a) in the case of terminal and looped configurations, the area shall where possible include sprinklers on one distribution pipe only. The number of sprinklers calculated to be operating on branches, or pairs of branches in end-centre installations, shall be located on each branch or pair of branches at the hydraulically most favourable location. Sprinklers not forming a full branch or pair of branches shall be located on the next branch row at the hydraulically closest locations (see Figures H.04 and H.06); b) in the case of gridded configurations, the area shall be located on branches at the hydraulically most favourable location. Sprinklers not forming a full branch length shall be located on the next branch row at the hydraulically closest locations (see Figure H.05).

G.3.4

Minimum sprinkler discharge pressure

The pressure at the hydraulically most unfavourably situated sprinkler when all the sprinklers in the area of operation are open, shall be not less than that required by G.3.1 or the following in table G.05, whichever is the higher. Hazard class

K factor minimum

Minimum pressure bar

LH

57

0,7

OH

80

0,35

HHP/HHS roof or ceiling protection

80

0,5


115

0,5


160

0,5

In-rack sprinkler

80

21)

In-rack sprinkler

115

11)

1)

Rack protection shall be designed in accordance with 11.6 with a minimum pressure of 0,5 bar for rack sprinklers.

Table G15: Minimum pressure

G.3.5

Minimum pipe diameters

The minimum allowable pipe diameter is 20 mm for LH and 25 mm for OH, HHP and HHS. The water supply of an individual sprinkler may be designed in DN 20 with LH, OH and HH hazards, galvanised or by means of a VdS-approved flexible hose, provided that the connection to the branch or distribution pipe spur runs laterally or upwards (see example in Figure G.01).

DN 20

sprinkler distribution pipe

Figure G.01: Connection to water supply

182

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


Pipe diameters on the installation side of the alarm valve station may decrease only in the direction of water flow, except in the case of grid and loop configurations. Note: This excludes throttle sections used with great non-uniformities and designed and calculated such that cavitation is excluded. The length of branch pipes fed from one end is limited to 30 m. 20 sprinklers max. may be fitted. The length of branch pipes fed from both ends is limited to 60 m. 40 sprinklers max. may be fitted. Upright sprinklers may not be directly connected to any pipe ≥ DN 65. Pendent sprinklers may not be directly connected to any pipe > DN 80. For larger diameters an arm pipe shall be fitted so that the minimum distance from the sprinkler deflector to the edge of the main pipe is 1,5 times the diameter of this pipe.

183


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Annex H Figures with examples (informative)

Figure H.01: Typical pump curve

The hydraulics of any systems shall be fully calculated.

Figure H.02: Determination of area covered per sprinkler (see G.3.1)

184

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


Figure H.03: Most unfavourable areas of operation in comb and double-comb sprinkler layouts (see G.3.2) Note: The areas of operation shall be arranged as square as possible. Only if special fire developments are to be expected (e.g. due to a certain arrangement of fire loads), the area of operation should be “longish”!

Figure H.04: Most favourable areas of operation in one-sided and two-sided sprinkler layouts (see G.3.2)

185


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Figure H.05: Most favourable and unfavourable areas of operation in a gridded pipe layout (see G.3.2)

Figure H.06: Most favourable and unfavourable areas of operation in a looped pipe layout (see G.3.2)

186

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


Annex I Approved components The following components are subject to approval by the authorities: a) sprinklers; b) wet alarm valve assemblies; c) dry alarm valve assemblies − dry alarm valve stations without accelerator and exhauster; − dry alarm valve stations with accelerator and exhauster; − subsidiary valve stations without accelerator and exhauster; − subsidiary valve stations with accelerator and exhauster; d) alarm motors and gongs; e) water flow alarm switches; f) pipe couplings − elastic pipe couplings; − pipe joints; g) pipe hangers − pipe hangers and accessories (type test only if not in compliance with requirements of these Guidelines); h) pressure switches; i) sprinkler pump sets; j) pre-action alarm valve assemblies Type A; k) pre-action alarm valve assemblies Types B; l) monitoring systems, control and indicating systems for sprinkler monitoring; Note: If fault signals of the sprinkler system are indicated at control and indicating equipment, this shall also be approved as monitoring panel. m) controllers − for electrical motors of sprinkler pumps; − for diesel engines of sprinkler pumps; n) feed valves; o) stone traps; p) flow measuring devices; q) check valves; r) relief valves; s) valves and slide valves; t) plastic sprinkler escutcheons; u) reduced capacity tanks < 20 m³ (VdS can also carry out a detail test during approval); v) pipe swivel joints;

187


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

w) steel bellow expansion joints (excluding expansion joints acc. DIN 30681 PN 16 with DIN-DVGW quality mark); x) corrosion protection agents; y) foam proportioners; z) foam pumps; aa) foam concentrate membrane tanks; bb) cables acc. DIN 4102-12, class E 90 (if additional function test with water is required).

Components for which no approval is required: −

pipe hangers and accessories (if in compliance with requirements of 15.2.2 of these Guidelines);

−

compressors, tank filling pumps and pressure tanks;

−

strainers;

−

diesel engines;

−

pressure tanks;

−

electrical motors;

−

gauges acc. DIN;

−

pipe joints with flanges acc. DIN, capillary solder fittings acc. DIN EN 1254, malleable cast iron fittings acc. DIN EN 10242 (incl. sealing material);

−

safety valves (type examination tested);

−

water storage tanks;

−

air filling devices;

−

emergency power supplies;

−

water level indicators;

−

pipe trace heating.

Marking Sprinkler valve stations shall bear the mark of the approved installer. This obligation applies to every second and further licence holder of a product resp. to each first licence holder and all further if the manufacturer is the installer.

188

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


Annex J New technology (Informative) These Guidelines cover only the types of sprinklers specified in Table 12.01. During the years preceding the preparation of these Guidelines new technologies were being developed for special applications, including in particular the following: −

large drop sprinklers;

−

residential sprinklers;

−

special in-rack sprinklers.

Note: For early suppression fast response sprinklers (ESFR) see Annex L. These sprinklers should only be used in accordance with the results of large scale fire test data and where the design criteria are fully acceptable to the authorities involved. It is intended that they will be included in future editions of these Guidelines.

189


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Annex K Protection of Special Hazards National requirements shall be taken into consideration. The following hazards need special consideration.

K.1

Aerosols

Protection for aerosol storages shall be in accordance with table K.01. Precautions shall be taken to avoid projection of aerosol containers, e.g. storage in pallet cages. The maximum area of aerosol storage and any containment shall be considered and the authorities shall be consulted.


Sprinkler K factor

m

Area of operation

mm/min

m²

alcohol based

hydrocarbon based

1,5

-

115/160

12,5

260

-

1,5

115/160

25,0

260

Sprinkler K factor

Minimum density

Area of operation

mm/min

m²

12,5 plus inrack sprinklers3)

260

25,0 plus inrack sprinklers3)

260

STI - Free standing storage or block storage

Maximum vertical height between sprinkler rows m

ST4 Palletised rack storage

Minimum density

alcohol based

hydrocarbon based

levels ≤ 1,8

-

115/160 1) 115/80 2)

-

levels ≤ 1,8

115/1601) 115/802)

1) ceiling sprinklers for areas of operation and min. density for ceiling protection 2) intermediate level sprinklers 3) the intermediate level sprinklers shall be installed in accordance with Category III or IV layout but at the maximum vertical height separations between sprinkler rows given in columns 2 and 3.

Table K.01: Protection criteria for aerosol storage

K.2

Clothes in multiple garment hanging storage

K.2.1

General

This clause describes special provisions for the protection of intensive hanging garment stores having multiple row or garment racks at two or more levels. They may have automatic or semi-automatic garment delivery, picking or transportation systems. Access to elevated garment storage levels within a warehouse is usually by walkways and ramps. A common feature of hanging garment storage is that there is no fire-resistive separation between the decks. Walkways, aisles, ramps and garment racks create a

190

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


significant obstruction to ceiling level sprinkler protection. Protection of hanging garments stored in carousels or vertical blocks without aisles is beyond the scope of this annex. Each garment rack shall be limited to two rows of hanging garments and a storage height of 3,5m between intermediate levels of sprinklers.

K.2.2

Categorisation

This clause applies to all types of garments, irrespective of their storage category.

K.2.3

Sprinkler protection

Each garment rack shall be limited to two rows of hanging garments and a storage height of 3,5 m between intermediate levels of sprinklers. Each rack shall be separated by an aisle of at least 0,8 m width. The garment racks shall be protected by a single row of sprinklers. The spacing between the sprinkler rows shall not exceed 3,0 m. The sprinklers installed directly above the garment racks shall be stagger spaced in the vertical plane, at horizontal intervals of not more than 2,8 m along the length of the rack. There shall be a sprinkler not more than 1,4 m from the rack end. The clearance between the top of the garments and the sprinkler deflector shall be at least 0,15 m (see Figure K.01). Each sprinkler row (in each level) protecting garment storage racks should be capped by a continuous solid horizontal baffle of at least the length and width of the garment row. The baffle should preferably be of a non-combustible material. The upper level of sprinkler rack protection and baffle may be omitted providing the clearance between the top of the garments and the deflectors of the ceiling sprinklers does not exceed 3 m height. Sprinklers shall be installed below all obstructions such as access ramps, main aisles, walkways and transportation routes, with the exception of aisles, not exceeding 1,2 m wide, between sprinkler protected garment storage rows.

K.2.4

Sprinklers in operation

The hydraulic calculation shall be based on the following: Rows:

3

Levels:

≤3

Sprinklers per row:

3

Where there are more than 3 levels of sprinkler protection, 3 rows of 3 sprinklers on 3 protected levels shall be assumed to operate. Where there are 3 levels or less, 3 rows of 3 sprinklers should be assumed to operate on all protected levels.

K.2.5

Ceiling sprinklers

Ceiling sprinklers shall be designed for a density of 7,5 mm/min over an area of operation of 260 m², providing the uppermost level of racks is capped and protected by rack sprinklers.

191


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

If the uppermost level or the barrier is omitted, the ceiling sprinklers shall be designed on the basis at least of Category III goods. The stack height shall be measured from above the uppermost intermediate level sprinklers.

K.2.6

Automatic shutdown

Operation of the sprinkler system shall automatically stop all automatic distribution systems within a warehouse.

K.2.7

Type of system

All installations shall be of the wet pipe type.

3m

ceiling

aisle

3m 3,5 m

2,8 m

capping

min. 0,15 m

rack end

0,8 m

1,4 m

Figure K.01: Typical sprinkler protection for hanging garments

K.3

Flammable liquid storage

The maximum area of flammable liquid storage and any containment shall be in accordance with legal regulations. The use of a film forming foam and wetting agent is recommended. Film forming foam shall be used with flammable liquids that have a flash point below 55°C. Flammable liquids shall be classified into four classes according to their flash point (FP), as shown in Tables K.02 and K.03. Tables K.02 and K.03 shall be used for flammable liquids stored in non-pressurised metal drums with a capacity greater than 20 l but not greater than 208 l. Table K.04 shall be used for flammable liquids stored in nonpressurised metal drums with a capacity less than 20 l.

192

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Class

Flash point


Storage methods

Permitted storage

on side

≤ 12 drums high

on end

≤ 6 drums high

on side

≤ 6 drums high

on end

≤ 2 drums high

on side

≤ 3 drums high

on end

≤ 1 drums high

on side or on end

1 drum high

°C

1

FP > 100

2

FP ≤ 100

3

FP ≤ 55

4

FP ≤ 21

Ceiling sprinklers

Density mm/min

Area of operation m2

10

450

25

450

25

450

25

450

Table K.02: Flammable liquids in metal drums with a capacity > 20 l and ≤ 208 l in freestanding storage or block storage (ST1)

Class

Flash point

Storage methods

°C

1

FP > 100

2

FP ≤ 100

3

FP ≤ 55

4

FP ≤ 21

on side

Intermediated sprinkler level in Figure 11.08 1) 2) configuration

Density m/min

each 12th tier

10

Ceiling sprinklers

th

on end

each 6 tier

10

on side

each 6th tier

25

on end

each tier

10

on side

each 3rd tier

25

on end

each tier

10

each tier

25

on side or on end

Area of operation m2 450 450 450 450

1) Horizontal distance between sprinklers shall not exceed 1,9 m. 2) Drums shall be stored at a height of one drum per tier. Storage layouts with two or more drums per row cannot be protected in accordance with this concept.

Table K.03: Flammable liquids in metal drums (ST4) with a capacity >20 l and ≤ 208 l

Class

Flash point

Storage methods

FP > 100

2

FP ≤ 100

3

FP ≤ 55

4

FP ≤ 21

Ceiling sprinklers

m

Density mm/min

ST1

5,5

10

ST5/6

4,6

7,5

°C

1


ST1

4,0

ST5/6

4,6

ST1

1,5

ST5/6

2,1

ST1

1,5

ST5/6

2,1

Area of operation m2 450

12,5

450

12,5

450

12,5

450

Table K.04: Flammable liquids in metal drums with a capacity of ≤ 20 l in free-standing storage resp. block storage (ST1) or storage with solid or slatted shelves (ST5, ST6)

193


K.4

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Pallets - idle

Idle pallets stored in solid piles or on pallets shall be protected with ceiling sprinklers according to Table K.05. Idle pallets stored in racks shall be protected with ceiling and in-rack sprinklers according to Table K.06. Type of pallet

Maximum storage height m

Wood or cellulose material pallets

3,8

Plastic pallets, material acc. K7 All other plastics

Ceiling sprinkler

Density mm/min

Area of operation m2

see Table 6.02 Category IV

Design in accordance with K7

3,3 3 2,7 2,3 2 1,6

300 300 300 300 300 300

25,0 20,0 17,5 15,0 12,5 10,0

Table K.05: Protection of solid piled or palletised pallets (ST1)

Type of pallets

In-rack sprinklers

Ceiling sprinklers

Wood and cellulose material pallets

Category IV

As for Category IV, with sprinkler rated at 93°C or 100°C see Table 6.03

All plastics

Category IV including one level of sprinklers above top level of storage, sprinklers K=115 and minimum operating pressure 3 bar

Density 25 mm/min Area of operation 300 m2

Table K.06: Protection of rack storage of idle pallets (ST4)

K.5

Spirituous liquors in wooden barrels

Barrels may be stored to a height not exceeding 4,6 m with ceiling sprinklers only. For greater storage heights intermediate sprinklers shall be installed in accordance with Category III/IV requirements. In both cases the ceiling sprinklers shall be installed with a density of 15 mm/min over an area of operation of 360 m². Note 1: Drainage or boundaries should be provided to limit the spread of liquid spills. Note 2: For the purposes of these Guidelines, spirituous liquor is defined as that containing more than 20% alcohol.

194

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


K.6

Non-woven synthetic fabric

K.6.1

Free standing storage

Ceiling sprinklers shall be installed using the criteria shown in table K.07. Storage methods

Maximum storage height1)

Design density

Area of operation (wet or pre-action system2)

m

m/min

m

1,6

10,0

2,0

12,5

2,3

15,0

ST1

2,7

17,5

Free standing or

3,0

20,0

block stacking

3,3

22,5

3,6

25,0

3,8

27,5

4,1

30,0

2

260

300

1) The vertical distance from the floor to the sprinkler deflectors, minus 1 m, or the highest value shown in the table, whichever is the lower. 2) Dry and alternate installations should be avoided.

Table K.07: Non-woven synthetic fabric: design criteria with roof or ceiling protection only

K.6.2

Rack storage

In-rack sprinklers should be used in accordance with Category IV requirements. Ceiling sprinklers should have a minimum design density of 12,5 mm/min over 260 m².

K.7

Risks with storage of plastics – Storage with containers of unexpanded polypropylene (PP) and polyethylene (PE) and polystyrene (PS) or stored PP/PE/PS materials and plastics with similar fire behaviour

K7.1 to K7.4 specify different concepts for the storage of the a.m. materials. K7.1 Palletised racks – ST4 K7.2 One-row or multiple-row post pallet storage ST2 and ST3 and free-standing storage ST1 up to 3 m storage height K7.3 Free-standing storage ST1 up to 4,6 m storage height K7.4 Storage in production areas (One-row or multiple-row post pallet storage ST2 and ST3 and free-standing storage ST1)

K.7.1

Palletised racks – ST4

Single-wall storage containers permeable to water made of polypropylene (PP) and polyethylene (PE) for rack storage shall be classified as Category III (HHS3). All other storage risks with storage containers made of polypropylene (PP) and polyethylene (PE) shall be classified as storage risks with high fire hazard Category IV (HHS4).

195


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Note: Storage containers are classified as permeable to water if a density of 20 mm/min causes a water level of not more than 10 mm in a container filled with actual storage goods. This aim of permeability may generally be achieved by providing the container bottom with 50 evenly spread bores of 5 mm diameter per m² container base area. The water permeability of the container shall not be considerably affected by stored goods or layers. A container with a base area of 600 mm x 400 mm will have a permeability in accordance with the a.m. requirements if 12 bores of 5 mm diameter are evenly spread over the container bottom. The sprinkler system shall be designed in accordance with Tables K.7-1 and K.7-2. Sprinklers of sensitivity rating “Special” or “Quick” shall be used for ceiling protection. For rack protection sprinklers shall be used whose RTI value is lesser or equal to the RTI value of the ceiling sprinklers. Containers (4)

Drenchable packaging (1)

Noncombustible packaging

Sheet barriers

IV

III

III

--

Horizontal sprinkler spacing (m)

1,50

1,90

1,90

--

Vertical sprinkler spacing (m)

2,00

3,50

3,50

--

90

90

90

--

Category

Operating time (min)

Table K.7-1: Classification and design as per K.7 for systems as per 11.5

Containers (4)

Drenchable packaging (1)

Noncombustible packaging

Sheet barriers (2)

IV

III

III

III

Horizontal sprinkler spacing (m)

1,50

2,50

2,50

1,50

Vertical sprinkler spacing (m)

2,00

3,50

3,50

3,50

Operating time (min)

60(3)

60(3)

60(3)

60(3)

Category

Table K.7-2: Classification and design as per K.7 for systems as per 11.6 Note (1): If drenchable packaging, e.g. cartons, is used, it is required that the packaging in cartons does not leave any plastic surfaces uncovered. Note (2): The horizontal solid sheet barriers shall be provided above each sprinkler level (see also 11.6.1). Note (3): A reduction of the operating time is possible, provided that the requirements of 11.6.1.12 are met. Note (4): Open PE/PS/PP plastic surfaces, i.e. unpacked, are treated as containers; granulates in bags are Category III with a horizontal distance of 1,5 m.

196

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


Where rack storage with intermediate sprinklers is classified as HHS3 due to the use of sheet barriers, the number of intermediate levels to be considered in the hydraulic calculation shall be in accordance with 11.6.1.4 and the operating time with 11.6.1.12. The maximum storage height for pallet racks ST 4 without intermediate sprinklers shall not exceed 2,1 m for HHS3 and 1,2 m for HHS4. Above the topmost sprinkler level the storage height shall not exceed 1,5 m. Where the a.m. storage height cannot be adhered to, the rack shall be designed such that above the topmost stored goods another sprinkler level can be installed. With a horizontal sheet barrier in accordance with 11.6.1.4 above the topmost stored goods the ceiling area of operation may be reduced to 150 m², providing no spray cans or flammable liquids are stored. Above the sheet barrier no storage is permitted.

K 7.2

One-row or multiple-row post pallet storage ST2 and ST3 and freestanding storage or block storage ST1

Classification shall be in HHS4. The specifications in 7.2 also apply to expanded plastics. For storage types ST1, ST2 and ST3 the maximum storage height is 3 m. For the storage of plastics, block storage with a surface of 150 m² max. is permitted. Between the blocks aisles of at least 2,4 m width are required. Only non-combustible pallets with closed surface, e.g. steel pallets, shall be used. The storage height per pallet shall not exceed 1 m. Each pallet with so-called KLT (tote boxes) shall be closed with a storage unit cover plate for pallets (P 1208/1210 VDA recommendation 4500). Other storage containers shall be closed with a cover on the topmost level. The sprinklers shall have sensitivity rating “Quick” or "Special". Film forming foam concentrate shall be added to the extinguishing water. Note: If other sprinkler concepts are verified as adequate protection by appropriate fire tests, the above requirements can be adapted. Means of adaptation could be e.g. to abandon foam proportioning and/or adapt the percentage of non-combustible pallets and/or cover plates. This may be the case with minor plastics accumulations, e.g. during modifications or retrofitting, by agreement with the Inspection Services of VdS Schadenverhütung. With PP/PE/PS materials the a.m. requirements apply to container storage. A subdivision of the stored goods with non-combustible cover plates/covers at a vertical distance of 1 m each will not be necessary if PP/PE/PS materials are stored in cartons.

K 7.3

Free-standing storage ST1 up to 4,6m storage height

This protection concept specifies the requirements for free-standing storage (ST1) of plastic containers and materials made of unexpanded PP/PE/PS with a storage height up to 4,6 m. Storage means that a surface of more than 2 m² and/or a height of more than 1,2 m is used.

197


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

The following specifications are based on current fire protection experience. They describe a concept to minimise the effects of a fire. In the case of new findings or fundamental modifications in fire protection technology these requirements will be updated.

K 7.3.1 General Recent fire tests, previous research and experience have shown that in the case of fire the a.m. plastics risks with storage heights above the limit of 3 m specified in VdS CEA 4001, K 7.2 are hard to control. However, by means of high design density sprinkler systems can sufficiently control an initial fire in order to enable the fire brigade to fight the fire in an inside fire attack. The protection concept and the design of these risks shall be agreed with the VdS Inspection Services and the insurer in the planning phase already. This is necessary, as in such fire scenarios considerable smoke gas development may be expected and thus, according to experience, great loss of property and business interruption. The concept specifies requirements for the design of the extinguishing system as well as organisational and fire defence requirements. Note: Generally, this also applies to the storage of unexpanded plastics of special type and form, e.g. so-called big boxes (GLT) and other special risks for which presently no approved protection concepts are available. Single-wall unexpanded big boxes (GLT) permeable to water may be treated as tote boxes (KLT). The instability of such storage constructions in the case of fire shall be taken into account.

K 7.3.2 Scope The following requirements apply to storage type ST1 with a maximum storage height of 4,6 m with ceiling sprinkler protection and a ceiling height of not more than 10,5 m, in which single-wall and double-wall tote boxes (KLT) and other plastic products of the a.m. type are stored compactly.

K.7.3.3 Design of the sprinkler system The exact design of the sprinkler system shall be according to the storage height and the following specifications: −

maximum ceiling height 10,5 m

−

designed as wet pipe system

−

minimum area of operation in all cases 300 m²

−

area per sprinkler 9 m²

−

sprinkler K160, sensitivity rating “Quick”

It is recommended to add film forming foam concentrate. Film forming foam concentrates are appropriate to apply extinguishing water to water-repellent surfaces, such as plastics. Note: If other sprinkler concepts are verified as similarly adequate by appropriate fire tests, the above requirements can be adapted. Such object-related means of adaptation

198

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


may be appropriate for lower risks with minor accumulations of plastic material (fire load), with single-wall storage containers permeable to water and a storage height of less than 3m and especially during modifications and retrofitting. The following may be possible: −

the reduced design density based on Table 6.02 of VdS CEA 4001, but possibly with foam proportioning (to compensate the extinguishing efficiency);

−

the use of sprinklers with lower K-factor (K115) based on Table 12.01 of VdS CEA 4001;

−

according to the application a combination of reduced design density and sprinklers of lower K-factor is possible.

K 7.3.3.1 Design with storage height up to 3,8 m Up to this storage height a design density of 25 mm/min is required. K 7.3.3.2 Design with storage height up to 4,6 m Above a storage height of 3,8 m up to 4,6 m max. the minimum design density is 30 mm/min.

K 7.3.4 Requirements for storage area For the storage of plastics, block storage with an area of 150 m² max. is permitted. The aisles between the blocks shall be at least 2,4 m. Alternatively, blocks of 25 m² are permitted. Between these blocks aisles of 1,2 m are required. It is recommended to use closed containers at the topmost level.

K 7.3.5 Further organisational requirements Apart from the above extinguishing system details further loss prevention measures are required in the scope of an integrated fire protection concept for effective fire fighting. These measures shall be agreed with the property insurer on an individual basis and should include the following: −

fire brigade;

−

extinguishing water supply;

−

fire compartments;

−

smoke compartments, also in consideration of potential cold smoke development;

−

smoke and heat exhaust ventilation systems;

−

operational emergency schedules.

K 7.4 Storage in production areas In sprinklered production areas blocks with PE/PP/PS materials or materials with similar fire behaviour up to 25 m² are permitted, provided that the maximum storage heights specified in 6.2.2 of VdS CEA 4001 with the appropriate minimum design density are complied with (classification HHS4, see Table 6.02 / ST1). This design applies only to production areas (HHP1 to HHP3) with a design density between 7,5 mm/min and 12,5 mm/min.

199


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Several blocks of a protection zone shall not exceed a total of 150 m². This applies if these blocks are divided into small adjacent areas separated by aisles of at least 2,4 m. The side lengths of the blocks shall not exceed 10 m. In a hall of 300 m² the block shall not exceed 25 m². The spacing between the blocks shall be at least 10 m.

25m2

Min. 10m

25m2

Min. 10m

300m2

Min. 10m

Min. 10m

Min. 10m

Min. 10m

300m2

300m2

300m2

25m2

25m2

300m2

300m2

25m2

Min. 10m

25m2

Figure K.02: Layout of blocks in production areas

K.8

Local protection of chipboard manufacture

K.8.1

General

Sprinkler and water spray systems for local protection in chipboard factories may be connected to the water supply or to the pipework of the ceiling sprinklers. Note: Water spray extinguishing systems shall be designed in accordance with VdS 2109. Deviating from Table 10.02 the pipework volume of dry pipe systems shall not exceed 1,5 m³ and of subsidiary systems 0,75 m³. K.8.1.1

Rating basis

The following parameters apply to the design of local protection systems:

200

−

operating time 30 min

−

design density 5 mm/min

−

maximum protection area per triggering sprinkler 9 m²

−

for triggering sprinklers in bunkers 16 m²

−

maximum spacing between triggering sprinklers resp. extinguishing nozzles 3,75 m

−

for triggering sprinklers in bunkers 4,6 m

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

K.8.1.2


Extent and type of protection

The protection in operating areas I and II shall include the objects specified in K.8.1.3 to K.8.1.9. Unless specified otherwise, it is possible to choose either sprinkler or water spray extinguishing systems. Operating area I includes chip processing from the raw material input until up to the glue application, and operating area II includes any machinery (filters, bunkers, cyclones, etc.) downstream of the grinding machine. For a correct assessment of the manufacturing process in the a.m. operating areas the authorities shall receive a block diagram before approving the extinguishing system(s). K.8.1.3

Dryers

The manufacturer of the dryer shall provide evidence that there is appropriate fire protection equipment installed in the dryer. This equipment supplied by the factory or public water mains shall also be connected to the water supply of the sprinkler system. The connection shall have shut-off devices. K.8.1.4

Conveyors

Pneumatic conveyors shall be protected at both ends (inlet and outlet), e.g. by sprinklering the cyclone. Pneumatic conveyors shall also have explosion protection. The explosion hazard shall be reduced by spark extinguishing systems (see VdS 2106). Mechanical conveyors (e.g. rotary valves) shall be protected all over by water spray extinguishing systems. K.8.1.5

Cyclones

Cyclones shall be protected by sprinklers. If the object connected to the cyclone is protected by a water spray extinguishing system, the cyclone may also be connected to this system. K.8.1.6

Surface layer silos (dosing bunkers)

With a base area smaller than 25 m², either a sprinkler system or water spray extinguishing system may be chosen. With a base area equal to or greater than 25 m² a water spray extinguishing system shall be installed. K.8.1.7

Core layer silos (silos for storing dusts)

Water spray extinguishing systems only are appropriate. K.8.1.8

Post-refining

Hammer mills, cross beater mills, impact detachers, knife-ring flakers and other postrefining facilities shall be protected at inlet and outlet by sprinkler or water spray extinguishing systems. K.8.1.9

Sifters and filters

Sifters and filters (e.g. bag, fabric, hose filters) shall be protected by sprinkler or water spray systems.

201


K.8.1.10

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Rooms beneath presses and star coolers

These rooms shall be sprinklered. K.8.1.11

Spreader

The spreader including gluing, bunker and lifting devices shall be protected by sprinkler or water spray systems. K.8.1.12

Presses

Presses such as chipboard presses shall be provided with extinguishing systems for local application approved by VdS for this purpose. The ceiling area of the sprinkler system above the presses is 260 m² for wet pipe systems. For dry pipe systems it may be reduced from 325 m² to 300 m². The minimum design density is 10 mm/min. The design of the system in the production area shall be calculated as follows: 1. calculation of the ceiling area plus the two largest water spray extinguishing groups or local application groups in this production area; 2. calculation of the entire local application for the press. All exhaustions shall be protected by appropriate local application systems. K.8.1.13 Thermal oil plant / Hydraulic installation For the protection of rooms with thermal oil plants or hydraulic installations and for the protection of thermal oil pipes in the production area, sprinkler or water spray systems with foam proportioning shall be installed.

K.8.2

Water supply

The water supply of the extinguishing systems shall always be designed in accordance with the greatest water flow. Determine which systems require the greatest water flow. The sprinkler system in production plus the two largest water spray extinguishing groups located in this production area, or the sprinkler system in the storage area.

K.8.3

Extinguishing and triggering sprinklers

Where water spray extinguishing systems are installed within objects, the open extinguishing nozzles shall be protected against contamination by appropriate caps (e.g. plastic caps, rubber plugs). Where extinguishing or triggering sprinklers are installed at the objects to be protected in separate housings, these housings shall be easy to open and the area around the nozzles shall be easy to clean.

K.9

Special protection concept for racks with solid shelves and gangways

This clause specifies the protection of racks with solid shelves and solid gangways as layouted in Figure K.03. Between rack and gangway there may be a ventilation gap of 0,1m width. Fully solid gangways are also permitted.

202

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


Basic values: Fire hazard class:

HHS 4, up to 50% plastic containers acc. K.7 are allowed*

Type of storage:

ST6

Storage height:

max. 2,5m

Flue width:

1,2m

Total rack width:

max. 1,2m

Level spacing rack sprinklers:

max. 3,6m

The installations shall be fully calculated in consideration of all necessary ceiling and rack sprinklers. Rack and ceiling sprinklers shall be connected via separate valve stations. Note: This concept is based on fire tests and specifies one possible solution for adequate protection. If more than 50% plastic containers are used or materials classified according to K.7, the concept shall be agreed with VdS in the planning phase.

K.9.1

Rack

Sprinkler layout (see also Figure K.03): - rack sprinklers on each rack level and on the top level; - sprinklers shall be arranged on the outsides of the rack underneath the potential ventilation gap. The distance to the longitudinal side of the rack shall not exceed 0,15 m; - rack sprinklers shall be arranged centrally in front of each rack shelf with an allowable distance of max. 1,6 m; - distance between sprinkler and loading area/ventilation gap max. 0,15 m; - distance upper edge stored goods sprinkler deflector at least 0,5 m in the area of intermediate levels; - distance upper edge stored goods sprinkler deflector at least 0,15 m in the area of top level. Sprinklers: −

K factor min. 57

−

RTI value “Quick”

−

upright

−

flat sprinkler water shields or deep sprinkler water shields shall be installed to prevent the sprinklers from wetting each other and protect them against dripping plastics.

Hydraulic calculation of rack protection: −

4 branches with 8 sprinklers on each level, but at least an area of operation of 90 m² per level;

−

0,5 bar minimum pressure at the sprinkler.

203


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Figure K.03: Sprinkler layout in rack

K.9.2

Ceiling

The ceiling protection above the topmost rack sprinkler level shall have the following features: −

design density: 7,5 mm/min

−

area of operation: 300 m²

−

K factor min. 80

−

RTI value min. “Special”

−

area per sprinkler max. 9 m²

If the distance between upper edge of stored goods and ceiling exceeds 4 m, a special agreement with VdS will be required.

K.9.3

204

Additional measures

−

Foam proportioning with AFFF foam concentrate for rack and ceiling protection;

−

to limit horizontal fire spread, continuous vertical sheet barrier shall be installed within the racks at a distance of not more than 7 m;

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


−

no storage above the topmost rack barrier level;

−

at barrier level above the sprinklers continuous baffles shall be fitted. Alternative loading areas shall be agreed with VdS.

K.10

Cable ducts, vertical cable ducts and cable floors

K.10.1 Horizontal cable ducts Dimensions and structural design of horizontal cable ducts to be protected by sprinkler systems shall meet the following requirements: −

cable ducts shall be made of non-combustible building materials;

−

maximum length of 100 m for sections separated by at least fire-retardant walls and ceilings made of non-combustible materials and at least fire-retardant doors and cable seals;

−

maximum width 2,5 m;

−

maximum height 3,0 m;

−

maximum width of cable trays 700 mm;

−

in the case of multi-layer assignment of cables an assignment height of 60 mm per cable tray shall not be exceeded;

−

cables trays shall be made of perforated sheet or similar material with at least 30% open surface;

−

minimum vertical spacing between cable trays 200 mm

−

minimum width of central aisle 700 mm

K.10.1.1

Sprinklers in horizontal cable ducts

Upright spray or flat spray sprinklers with K factor 80 and operating temperature 57°C shall be used. K.10.1.2

Sprinkler layout and spacing in horizontal cable ducts

With cable ducts in accordance with K.10.1 one row of sprinklers shall be arranged in the aisle area, as centrally as possible. If the cable duct is assigned on one side only, a sprinkler-wall spacing of 1,25 m shall not be exceeded. The maximum sprinkler spacing of spray sprinklers is 2,5 m and of flat spray sprinklers 3 m. The vertical distance between sprinkler deflector and topmost cable tray shall be 500 mm for spray sprinklers and 300 mm for flat spray sprinklers. The a.m. spacing range shall be without obstructions. Lights shall be located only centrally in the aisle of the cable duct between the sprinklers. The distances of 500 mm resp. 300 mm may be fallen below, if the sprinklers are evidenced to be appropriate for this. The sprinkler spacing to ceilings shall be between 20 mm and 4500 mm for spray sprinklers and between 50 mm and 300 mm for flat spray sprinklers. K.10.1.3

Parameters of sprinkler system for horizontal cable ducts

The dimensioning of the sprinkler system shall be based on an area of operation of 50 m² and a design density of 12 mm/min. Irrespective of the effective width of the cable duct a theoretical width of 2,5 m shall be applied. The operating time is 30 min.

205


K.10.1.4

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Alarm valves and shut-off devices of sprinkler systems in horizontal cable ducts

The sprinkler system shall be a wet pipe system. Cable ducts up to 3000 m long may be connected to a wet alarm valve station. For each 1000 m duct length there shall be a separate shut-off device and draining. The shut-off device shall be equipped with a monitoring device for the operational status. The shut-off device shall be located outside the associated section. The associated section shall be clearly identified. K.10.1.5

Additional alarm devices of sprinkler systems in horizontal cable ducts

If there is no automatic fire detection and fire alarm system with alarm division (100 m max.), additional alarm devices (water flow alarm switch or wet alarm valve station) shall be provided for the sprinkler system per cable duct section (100 m max.). Water flow alarm switches require test facilities (see Fig. 14.03).

K.10.2 Vertical cable ducts In vertical cable ducts sprinklers shall be located at the topmost position. Further sprinklers shall be provided at a vertical distance of not more than 4 m. The sprinklers at intermediate levels shall be fitted with water shields. It shall be possible to supply all sprinklers installed within a vertical cable duct simultaneously with extinguishing water. If the vertical cable duct is subdivided by at least fire-retardant separations made of non-combustible materials, only the sprinklers of the largest section need to be considered. Sprinklers in vertical cable ducts Upright or pendent standard or spray sprinklers with K factor 80 and operating temperature 57°C shall be used. The minimum pressure at the sprinkler is 1,0 bar, operating time is 30 min.

K.10.3 Cable floors or cable rooms For cable floors or cable rooms shall have an operating area of 260 m². With fireretardant cable floors or cable rooms made of non-combustible materials and smaller than 260 m², the effective surface may be applied as the area of operation. K. 10.3.1 Design density for sprinkler systems in cable floors or cable rooms The design density depends on the number of cable trays arranged one upon the other. It is as follows:

206

−

up to 3 cable trays

5,0 mm/min

−

up to 4 cable trays

7,5 mm/min

−

up to 5 cable trays

10,0 mm/min

−

up to 6 cable trays

12,5 mm/min

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

K.10.3.2


Operating time for sprinkler systems in cable floors or cable rooms

The operating time of the sprinkler system is 60 min. For other types of horizontal and vertical cable ducts and floors the design shall be agreed with the VdS Inspection Services (e.g. with the risk of freezing in the protection area).

K.11

Recycling plants for plastic packaging material

K.11.1 General This concept is based on fire tests and represents one possible solution for adequate protection. The different divisions of recycling plants for plastic packaging material shall be protected by sprinkler or water spray extinguishing systems according to the fire load. Pneumatic conveyors in which fires may occur and be forwarded, require additional protection by spark extinguishing systems. As bulk and bale storage require additional clearing out and damping down, the alarm shall be directly transmitted to the fire brigade. The pump capacity of the fire engine shall be at least 1600 l/min. The protection concept should be agreed with the VdS Inspection Services in the planning phase.

K.11.2 Sprinkler system design parameters for recycling plants The following shall be protected by a sprinkler system: −

bulk storage;

−

bale storage;

−

sorting cabins.

According to size, the following equipment shall be protected by a sprinkler system: −

raw material bunkers;

−

shredders, mills;

−

drying systems;

−

silo systems.

The maximum storage heights for bulk and bale storage are specified in Table K.08 and the design parameters in Table K.09. Max. storage height

Max. room height

Bulk storage

5,0 m

9,0 m

Bale storage

4,0 m

9,0 m

Table K.08: Storage heights bulk and bale storage

207


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Density of discharge (no HHS)

17,5 mm/min1)

Area of operation

260 m² wet pipe system 325 m² dry pipe system

Response sensitivity of sprinklers

“Quick”

Extinguishing agent

water with film forming foam concentrate3)

Operating time

2)

Water supply

90 min

Foam concentrate supply

60 min

Storage tanks or private reservoirs

minimum effective capacity ≥ 70 m³

1) With a smaller storage height than that specified in Table K.09 the density of discharge may be reduced, provided that the extinguishing performance is clearly proved by fire tests. 2) The operating time may be reduced to 60 min for water supply and 45 min for foam concentrate supply, provided that: –

the fire brigade guarantees a response time of 15 min in accordance with DIN 14 011-9 for a group strength of 1:8, confirmed in writing;

-

the supply of film forming foam concentrate is ensured for another 15 min to be fed into the system directly or indirectly by the fire brigade. The foam concentrate supply shall be refilled with the same product by the same manufacturer only;

–

foam extinguishing devices are available; and

–

appropriate vehicles (wheel loaders, fork lifts, dredgers, etc.) and staff for clearing out are available.

In the planning phase compliance with these requirements shall be agreed with VdS. 3) The nominal proportioning rate shall be selected according to the type of foam concentrate and be 1% minimum. All system components shall be appropriate for this proportioning rate.

Table K.09: Design parameters for sprinkler systems for bulk and bale storage

The sprinkler system for the sorting cabins may be designed according to OH3. For the local protection of the equipment specified in this clause a design density of 7,5 mm/min shall be provided. Use sprinklers of response sensitivity “Special”. Where dry pipe systems are installed for the protection of bulk and bale storage, water shall be discharged at the end of the pipework not later than 20 s after the test facility has been opened. This may be achieved e.g. by installing accelerators.

K.11.3 Design parameters of a water spray extinguishing system in recycling plants A water spray extinguishing system (see VdS 2109) shall be used e.g. for the protection of encapsulated mechanical conveyors, such as belt, drag chain and spiral conveyors or vibratory channels with a design density of 7,5 mm/min. Note: Alternatively to the protection by a sprinkler system in accordance with K.11.2 bulk and bale storage may be protected by a water spray extinguishing system with a design density of 17,5 mm/min and a proportioning of film forming foam concentrate as well as in compliance with the storage heights specified in Table K.09. Dry pilot lines with glass bulb release elements of response sensitivity “Special” shall be used for fire detection purposes. Upon release of the water spray extinguishing system the conveyor and sorting equipment of the appropriate area shall be disabled automatically. The water rate for the local protection systems available in the protection areas shall be considered.

208

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


K.11.4 Power supply of pump system The power supply of the pump system should be backed up.

K.11.5 Monitoring of sprinkler or water spray extinguishing system The sprinkler resp. water spray extinguishing systems shall be monitored for operational status.

K.11.6 Fire department supply connection Where fire department supply connections are provided, these should have a supply pipe DN 150 and four “B” hose connections.

K.11.7 Spark extinguishing systems in recycling plants Spark extinguishing systems (see VdS 2106) shall be used to protect pneumatic conveyors transporting residual materials and dusts (e.g. in bale presses, screening plants, sieve sifters, reduced waste container station). Upon release of the spark detector with spark counting device in pneumatic conveyors, the additional local protection nozzles (see VdS 2109) installed in the objects (e.g. drum sieve systems, sieve sifters, reduced waste container station, dust exhausting equipment, filters, cyclone) shall operate automatically, as soon as the alarm threshold has been reached. The design density shall be 7,5 mm/min minimum and the operating time shall be 30 min. Note: The nozzles shall be positioned at the top of each; activation shall be via spark detectors in the exhaustion.

K.12

Local application for paper machines

Drying hoods of paper machines shall be protected by wet pipe systems in accordance with OH3. Note: If high temperatures prevail in the drying hoods (e.g. > 100°C), pendent dry sprinklers or a dry pipe system may be appropriate for this area. Water shall be discharged at the most unfavourably positioned sprinklers after 30 s maximum. Beneath the drying hood ceiling sprinklers with an area of operation of 12 m² shall be positioned. In the area of the roller frames sprinklers shall be positioned between the roller frames such that in the case of fire the storage areas are sprinklered. The basement area shall be protected by a sprinkler row in the foundation area with a sprinkler spacing of 2,5 m maximum. The areas of operation for the sprinklers between the roller frames and in the basement area shall be 90 m².

K.13

Special requirements for the protection of mobile shelving with ceiling sprinklers only

This Annex includes mobile shelving with the top open or closed. Perforated tops are preferred. Only Category I or II products shall be stored in mobile shelving.

209


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

The height of the mobile shelving protected by ceiling sprinklers only shall be limited to 3m. The clearance between the top of the mobile shelving units and the sprinkler deflectors shall not be less than 0,5 m. The area of each block of closed (compressed) mobile shelving shall not exceed 150 m². There shall be aisles of at least 1,2 m surrounding each block of mobile shelving in either the closed or open (uncompressed) condition. Instead of aisles there may also be a separation by at least fire-retardant walls made of non-combustible materials. The walls shall be fully closed, sufficiently resistant to mechanical impact and leading up to a height of 0,5 m minimum above the topmost stored goods. When the mobile shelves are closed (compressed), each shelf unit shall close against hard tops, which shall maintain a space of at least 50 mm between adjacent shell units. A fully closed topmost level shall be avoided. The water density at the ceiling protection shall be in accordance with the specifications of Clause 6 with a minimum of 10 mm/min. For rooms with a floor area less than 150 m² the density shall be applied in accordance with Table K.10: Maximum room height

Minimum density

(m)

(mm/min)

3

7,5

2,6

5

Table K.10: Minimum density

K. 14

Requirements for the protection of automatic parking systems

K. 14.1 Protection of automatic parking systems K.14.1.1

General

Automatic parking systems are garages with neither movement of persons nor vehicular traffic, in which the vehicles are transported by mechanical conveyors from the garage entrance to the parking spaces and back to the garage exit. The heat accumulation required for a quick response of the sprinklers is difficult to achieve due to very open construction, mainly in the case of multi-storey parking systems. Therefore, the sprinklers shall be arranged as in local applications, focusing on the position of the vehicle. Quick response sprinklers shall be arranged with reduced sprinkler distances. Via increased pressure at the sprinkler a drop spectrum with a high amount of small drops may be achieved, ensuring quick fire suppression and preventing fire spread to other vehicles. Appropriate means shall be used to prevent fire spread by ignited fuel.

210

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

K.14.1.2


Rating basis

Sprinklers:

Response sensitivity “Quick”

Minimum pressure at sprinkler:

The hydraulic calculation shall be based on minimum pressure at sprinkler pü = 4 bar and maximum pressure pü = 10 bar.

Minimum density of discharge:

7,5 mm/min

Area of operation:

The area of operation comprises the sprinklers for six parking spaces. The hydraulic calculation shall be based on the sprinklers for the hydraulically most unfavourable six parking spaces of one level. Evidence shall be provided that the sprinklers of the three hydraulically most unfavourable parking spaces situated one above the other can be supplied with the required operating pressure. The water flow for the most unfavourable area of operation shall fall below 70% of the maximum flow of the sprinkler pump.

Operating time water supply:

30 min

Proportioning:

The extinguishing water shall contain min. 3% film forming foam concentrate.

Operating time foam concentrate:

30 min

Water supply:

Automatic parking systems with up to 500 parking spaces shall have at least water supply type 2. In the case of systems with an additional pressure tank, this tank shall have a water quantity of 15 m³ minimum.

Power supply:

If a pump system is used, it shall be powered by a diesel engine. Alternatively, two independent power supplies may be used. This also applies to booster pumps in water pipe systems.

Operating pressure:

The pressure stage of the components shall comply with the operating pressure in the system. The pressure within the pipes of the sprinkler system shall not exceed pü = 16 bar.

A fire department supply connection shall be provided. K.14.1.3 K.14.1.3.1

Sprinkler arrangement Arrangement at parking spaces

The sprinklers shall be arranged above the vehicles such that the automatic placing and removal of any permitted type of vehicle will not cause any damage.

211


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

The sprinkler rows shall be arranged laterally beside the vehicles (see Figure K.04). The sprinklers shall be arranged between every two adjacent vehicles of one row and between the end of one vehicle row and the wall.

Figure K.04: Parking spaces A maximum lateral distance of 0,5 m between sprinkler row and vehicle shall not be exceeded. The sprinkler spacing shall be between 1,5 m and 2,5 m; the distance to the walls shall not exceed half a sprinkler spacing. The sprinkler distance to the ceiling shall be in accordance with 11.4.2. If no end-to-end ceiling is provided, the distance to the lower edge of the collecting tray or to the vehicle carrier of the level above shall be measured. In this case a sufficiently large heat accumulation space above the sprinklers shall be provided, with additional baffles, if required. K.14.1.3.2

Arrangement at conveyors

The sprinklers shall be installed at distances of 4 m max. to each other and 2 m max. to the wall. The protection area of a sprinkler shall not exceed 9 m². The sprinkler distance to the ceiling shall comply with 11.4.2.

212

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


Annex L ESFR Sprinkler systems, planning and installation L.1

General

L.1.1

Scope

This Annex specifies design and installation requirements for Early Suppression Fast Response (ESFR) sprinkler systems. ESFR sprinklers are quick-acting, high-performance sprinklers which have the capability of extinguishing fires within designated risks. There is little room for error in the design and installation of ESFR sprinkler systems; the design principles and the operating characteristics are significantly different to standard sprinkler protection. ESFR sprinklers may be unable to succeed with adverse design features and non-compliance, which may be common practice when installing standard sprinkler protection. It is therefore essential that all the requirements of this Annex are complied with, without exception, when applying ESFR protection. With the exception of the clauses identified in L.4.1, all the requirements of these Guidelines are applicable when installing ESFR sprinklers. Preliminary agreement of the authorities is essential before selecting ESFR sprinklers to be used in a sprinkler installation. EFSR sprinklers are mainly used if in-racks sprinkler cannot be installed for technical reasons. Note 1: Preliminary design considerations shall be carried out to determine if the building construction is suitable for the use of ESFR sprinklers. VdS should be involved even in the planning of ESFR sprinkler systems. Note 2: When applying pressure tanks, an end pressure of 2 bar is sufficient. When applying two pumps with separate power supply and a water volume of at least twice 50% of the total volume, a pressure tank may be omitted. In this case a pressure holding pump is required.

L.1.2

Definitions

Sprinkler, ESFR pattern: Nozzle with a thermosensitive sealing device which opens to discharge water, distributing it in a specified pattern, with sufficient momentum, over a designated area to achieve suppression of a fire or inhibit growth when connected to the appropriate piping and water supplies.

L.1.3

ESFR sprinklers

ESFR sprinklers shall be “Quick” response and have one of the following temperature ratings: −

Bulbs:

68°C 93°C

−

Fusible element:

68 to 74°C 93 to 104°C

The higher temperature ratings shall only be used where needed because of high ambient temperature conditions. The nominal K factor of ESFR sprinklers shall be 200 or 360.

213


L.1.4

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Application

The following clauses of these Guidelines are not applicable to ESFR sprinkler protection: 4.2, 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.4.11, 8.3.2.2, , 10.2, 10.3, 10.4, 10.5, 11.1.2, 11.2, 11.3, 11.4.1, 11.4.2, 11.4.4, 11.4.5, 11.4.6, 11.4.7, 11.4.9, 11.4.10, 11.4.12, 11.4.13, 11.5, 12.2, 12.4, 12.5, 12.6, 12.7, 12.8, 12.9. L.1.4.1 L.1.4.1.1

Storage configurations Longitudinal and transverse flues

Storages should have longitudinal and transverse flues, which are: a) continuous for the full height of each block of storage; b) vertically aligned; c) free of stored goods; L.1.4.1.2

Storage methods ST2, ST3, ST4, ST5 and ST6

The longitudinal and transverse flues with storage methods ST2, ST3, ST4 and ST6 shall be regularly spaced and having dimensions as follows: −

(1) transverse flues shall be at least 0,08 m wide and shall be spaced at distances of not more than 3,0 m; and

−

(2) longitudinal flues shall be at least 0,15 m wide and shall be spaced at distances of not more than 3,0 m.

Figure L.01: Storage methods ST2, ST3 and ST4 transverse and longitudinal flues

214

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


Storage method ST1 shall have either appropriate longitudinal and transverse flues, or else the storage blocks shall not have any flues – especially no flues covered at the top. L.1.4.1.3

Storage methods ST5 and ST6

Single and double-row shelved racks shall comply with one of the following: a) shelves having openings of less than 50% of the plan area shall not exceed 2,0 m² total plan area and shall be bounded on all four edges by flues of not less than 0,15 m width; b) slatted shelves shall have shelf-open areas, uniformly interspaced of at least 50% of the shelf plan area. The distance between openings shall not exceed 0,15 m; or; c) grated or mesh-type shelves shall have uniform openings of at least 50% of the shelf plan area. The horizontal distance between openings shall not exceed 0,15 m.

215


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

L.1.4.3 ESFR sprinklers shall be designed in accordance with Table L.01.

Commodity (storage methods required to comply with L.1.4.1.2 and L.1.4.1.3)

Maximum ceiling height: 1) 9,1 m

Maximum ceiling height: Maximum ceiling height: 1) 1) 9,8 m 10,6 m

Maximum Minimum Maximum storage pressure at the storage 6) 6) height sprinkler height (m)

Minimum pressure at the sprinkler

Maximum storage 6) height

(bar)

(m)

(m)

(bar) K-200 K-360

Expanded plastic and foamed rubber in carton (more than 15% in volume of the cardboard carton)

K-200

Maximum ceiling height: 1) 12,2 m

Minimum Minimum Maximum pressure at storage pressure at the 6) the sprinkler height sprinkler (bar)

(m)

(bar)

K-360

K-200 K-360

7,6

3,5

1,4

7,6

4,2

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

Category 1, 2, 3 & 4 (less than 15% in volume of the cardboard carton)

7,6

3,5

1,4

7,6

4,2

7,6

2,1

10,6

5,2

2,8

Paper rolls stored on end (stored vertically) in open or closed arrays, banded or unbanded: heavyweight 2), 3) paper

7,6

3,5

1,4

7)

7)

7)

7)

9,1

5,2

2,8

Paper rolls stored on end (stored vertically) in open or closed arrays, banded or unbanded : Medium weight paper and plastic coated heavyweight 4), 5) paper

6,1

3,5

1,4

7)

7)

7)

7)

6,1

5,2

2,8

2), 3)

Mezzanine height < 4,5 m. All acceptable stored goods and storage configurations

6 additional sprinklers for hydraulic calculation 3,5 bar for K = 200 and at 1,4 bar for K = 360

Mezzanine height > 4,5 m. All acceptable stored goods and storage configurations

Pressure appropriate for stored goods and ceiling (mezzanine) height

6)

6)

1)

The ceiling height shall be taken as the maximum vertical distance measured from the floor to the underside of the ceiling or roof deck.

2)

Authorities shall be consulted for the protection of plastic commodity.

3)

All types of plastic products shall be contained in wooden, cardboard or non-combustible boxes. All types of plastics and foamed rubber shall not occupy a greater volume than 15% of the capacity of the box.

4)

excluding lightweight paper

5)

lightweight paper - all paper with a weight of less than 50 g/m² and paper with absorbent features (such as toilet paper, paper towelling, disposable absorbent paper product) regardless of weight. Medium weight paper – non-absorbent paper with a hard or smooth finish that weighs 50 g/m² or more but less than 100 g/m². Heavyweight paper – non-absorbent paper or cardboard that weighs 100 g/m² or greater.

6)

Utilisation of the storage height is only possible if the vertical distance from the upper edge of the stored goods to the sprinkler deflector is at least 1 m or the value shown in the table, whichever is the lower.

7)

The values given for a maximum ceiling height of 12,2 m shall be used.

Table L.01: Design of ESFR sprinklers

216

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


L.1.4.4 ESFR sprinklers shall only be installed in buildings with roof or ceiling slope up to and including 170 mm/m. Where roof or ceiling slopes exceed 170 mm/m, the roof or ceiling shall be underdrawn with a false ceiling. The false ceiling shall be of noncombustible construction, having an acceptable slope. ESFR sprinklers shall be deployed below the false ceiling. Standard sprinkler protection shall be used in the roof or ceiling space L.1.4.5 Ceilings shall be capable of withstanding a vertical upward load of at least 150 N/m2. Materials suitable for such purpose include 10 mm gypsum board, corrugated or sheet steel or mineral tile. Suspended ceilings shall be capable of withstanding a vertical upward load of at least 50 N/m2. L.1.4.6 The following example of storage or commodities are not suitable for protection by ESFR sprinklers: −

certain storages which exhibit unusual fire characteristics such as roll tissue;

−

open-top combustible containers;

−

unusual commodities or materials which have not been proven, by either testing or analysis, to be appropriate for ESFR sprinklers protection;

−

warehouses in which the commodities or the type of storage are unpredictable;

−

special risks which are described in Annex K (K.1 aerosols, K.3 flammable liquid storages, K.5 spirituous liquors and K.7 PE, PP, PS and plastics with similar fire behaviour).

L.2

Sprinkler System Design

L.2.1

General

L.2.1.1 Only wet-pipe systems shall be used. L.2.1.2 ESFR protection is based on construction without smoke and heat exhaust ventilation systems or other roof openings. If smoke and heat exhaust ventilation systems are unavoidable, they shall be operated manually. Any draft curtains used in conjunction with roof vents or other roof openings shall be limited in depth and located with respect to sprinklers so that distances specified in Table L.03 are complied with. Any open roof vents or other roof openings shall be closed automatically preferably before, but in no case more than 30 s after, the operation of the first sprinkler. The only smoke and heat exhaust ventilation systems allowed are those in which no openings can occur due to melting up to the point of intended manual release in accordance with DIN 18232. L.2.1.3 The clear space beneath the sprinkler deflectors shall be no less than 1m. L.2.1.4 Skylights shall be flush to the ceiling or underdrawn at ceiling level. The skylights shall be capable of withstanding, without failure, a temperature of 300°C for at least 5 min. Where powered ventilation is employed, the building shall be protected by an approved fire detection and fire alarm installation. The powered ventilation shall be stopped and any dampers closed automatically in response to the fire detection and fire alarm system alarm of fire.

217


L.2.2

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Hydraulic design

L.2.2.1 ESFR sprinkler installations shall be fully hydraulically calculated in accordance with Annex G.1 and G.3. L.2.2.2 The design area of operation shall consist of an area with a minimum of 12 ceiling sprinklers or minimum 90 m² whichever is the greater. This design area of operation shall be the hydraulically most unfavourable area and may include up to 6 additional sprinklers within the same area (e.g. under obstructions). The minimum operating pressures are stated in Table L.01. The water supply shall be capable of providing the demand flow for at least 60 min. L.2.2.3 For hydraulic calculation purposes, 4 sprinklers shall be assumed to operate on each of 3 branch pipes. When branch pipes have less than four sprinklers, all the sprinklers on the branch pipe shall be assumed to operate and the number of branches involved shall be increased until a total of 12 sprinklers are assumed operating. L.2.2.4 Where ESFR sprinklers are installed beneath mezzanines of 4,5 m height from the floor or less, at least 6 ESFR sprinklers shall be assumed to operate (three ESFR sprinklers on each of two branches) at an operating pressure of 3,5 bar. Note: Where standard sprinkler protection is employed beneath mezzanines of 4,5 m height or less, the area of operation and design density shall comply with the appropriate requirements of Section 6 - Hydraulic design criteria. ESFR sprinklers shall be used beneath mezzanines which are higher than 4,5 m; twelve ESFR sprinklers shall be assumed to operate (four sprinklers on each of three branches). Sprinklers beneath walkways, conveyors and mezzanines shall be taken into account when designing the water supplies, in accordance with table L.02.

Obstructions within the design area of operation

Maximum number of additional sprinklers in hydraulic calculation

Obstructions less than 3 m width

2 sprinklers operating at 3,5 bar (K=200) at 1,4 bar (K=360)

Obstructions greater than 3 m width such as walkways and conveyors

4 sprinklers operating at 3,5 bar (K=200) at 1,4 bar (K=360)

Mezzanines1

6 sprinklers operating at the design pressure (see table L.01).

1

Additional sprinklers need not be added to the water supply requirement providing: a) open-fronted mezzanines are fitted vertically with screens which extend at least 1,2 m below the ceiling and are of non-combustible construction and fit tightly against the underside of the ceiling; and b) a clear aisle beneath the screen of at least 0,6 m wide each side of the screen centre-line is maintained.

Table L.02: Sprinklers design beneath obstruction

218

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

L.2.3


Spacing and location of sprinklers

L.2.3.1 The area of coverage of ESFR sprinklers shall be not less than 7,5 m² and not more than 9 m². The distance between sprinklers shall be in accordance with table L.03.

Maximum height ceiling

Distance between sprinklers

min

max

9,1 m

2,4 m

3,7 m

12,2 m

2,4 m

3m

Table L.03: Distance between sprinklers

L.2.3.2 The centre line of the sprinkler heat-sensitive element shall be between 0,1 to 0,33 m below the roof or ceiling for an ESFR sprinkler with a K factor of 200. The centre line of the sprinkler heat-sensitive element shall be between 0,1 to 0,45 m below the roof or ceiling for an ESFR sprinkler with a K factor of 360. Where the roofs or ceilings are constructed using beams and girders or profiled panelling, sprinklers should be located in bays rather than under beams. Bays formed by this method of construction should not exceed 0,75 m depth. Where the ceiling is profiled, the distance from the ceiling to the sprinkler shall be measured from the bottom of the profile, see figure L.02. The position of the deflector shall be in accordance with L.2.3.3. Where this is not practical, the roof or ceiling shall be underdrawn by a suspended ceiling.

Figure L.02: Position of sprinkler deflector relative to profiled ceilings

219


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Figure L.03: Sprinkler deflector above bottom of beam or obstruction

Figure L.04: Obstacles exclusively underneath sprinkler

220

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


Figure L.05: Positioning of sprinklers above an obstruction Note: With obstructions smaller than 30 cm values deviating from Figure L.05 may be accepted by agreement with VdS, provided that the obstruction is located centrally between the sprinklers. L.2.3.3 Where sprinkler deflectors are located above the bottom of beams, girders, ducts, fluorescent lighting fixtures or other obstructions located near the ceiling, the position of the sprinklers with respect to these obstructions shall be in accordance with Figures L.03, L.04 and L.05, as appropriate. L.2.3.4 Continuous obstructions located below sprinklers, such as sprinkler piping, utility piping or duct work up to 0,3 m wide at a horizontal distance of at least 0,6 m from the vertical centre-line of the sprinklers do not require additional sprinklers below. Additional sprinklers shall be located below wider or more closely located obstructions. L.2.3.5 Upright sprinklers shall be positioned so that the deflector has a minimum distance of 0,18 m above the top of the branch pipe. Note: Presently only pendent ESFR sprinklers are VdS-approved. L.2.3.6 Roller-type conveyors and grated walkways with 50% or more uniform openings are not considered as obstructions to ceiling sprinkler discharge. However, when there are more than one level above each other of conveyors or walkways 50% or more open, a line of ESFR sprinklers shall be installed beneath every other level starting from the second level down from the ceiling. (See Figure L.06).

221


L.2.4

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Separation between ESFR and other sprinkler installations

Vertical screens shall be installed between areas protected by ESFR sprinklers and areas protected by other type of sprinklers. This applies whether the roof over the two areas is at the same elevation or at different elevations. The screens shall extend at least 1,2 m below the ceiling, be non-combustible and fit tightly against the underside of the roof. A clear aisle, at least 1,5 m on each side of the centre-line beneath the screen, shall be maintained.

Figure L.06: Positioning of ESFR sprinklers relative to conveyors or walkways

222

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


Annex M Proportioning of film forming foam concentrate in sprinkler systems M.1

Choice and type of sprinkler system

M.1.1

General

Compliance with the local environmental requirements and regulations for the design, inspection and draining of the system and for the water discharged by the system and other environmental requirements shall be ensured (e.g. WHG – Federal Water Act). A proportioning of film forming foam concentrate is possible with −

wet pipe systems;

−

dry pipe systems;

−

quick dry pipe systems.

M.1.2

Wet pipe systems with foam proportioning

Wet pipe systems shall be permanently filled with a water-foam concentrate mixture (premix). Alternatively, wet pipe systems can be designed such that the water-foam concentrate mixture takes 1 min maximum from the proportioning unit to the most unfavourable sprinkler, if only this one sprinkler operates. Alcohol-resistant foam concentrate shall not be used as premix. Note: The choice of premix shall be in accordance with the material of pipework and components. The foam concentrate manufacturer shall indicate the corrosive effect that the mix produced from his foam concentrate has – compared to tap water – on the construction material of the sprinkler system. If water-foam concentrate mixture (premix) is prevailing in the pipework, its quality shall be tested in accordance with the foam concentrate manufacturer, in any case at least once a year. The test intervals depend on the water quality, on local conditions etc. Samples shall be taken at not less than three locations in the pipework at the sampling connections provided for this purpose, i.e. −

at the proportioning point;

−

in the centre of the ceiling pipework or at thermally loaded locations;

−

at the end of the pipework.

The quality of the foam concentrate shall be tested with regard to its spreading coefficient, foaming (if applicable) and surface tension. Note: This may be in accordance with the relevant parts of EN 1568. Valves for testing the foam concentrate-water mixture shall be marked with a permanent label or sticker reading “Test valve for foam concentrate-water mixture”. In the case of a negative test result the pipework shall be drained and flushed before refilling it. If the foam concentrate-water mixture repeatedly fails to fulfil the quality requirements, it may be necessary to test the water supply or examine the water for

223


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

contamination. In case of a contamination the respective mixture shall be removed from the system.

M.1.3

Dry pipe systems with foam proportioning

When opening the test facility located at the end of the pipework of dry pipe systems or quick dry pipe systems, water-foam concentrate mixture shall be discharged after not more than 30 s. This test may be carried out with water.

M.1.4

Function test of alarm devices

The system shall be designed such that the foam proportioning may be disabled during a function test of the alarm devices.

M.2

Foam proportioning unit

M.2.1

General

The proportioning unit shall be designed such that a proportioning even takes place at an extinguishant rate of 200 l/min minimum. Up to an extinguishant rate of 500 l/min maximum the required nominal concentration of the foam concentrate shall be reached. Between 500 l/min and the maximum extinguishant rate this value shall not exceed the tolerances (see M.2.5).

M.2.2

Marking of proportioning unit

Proportioning units shall be permanently marked, at least with the following: −

flow direction;

−

extinguishing concentration;

−

operation range (concentration).

M.2.3

Test facility for foam concentration

Downstream of any proportioning unit a connection shall be provided for testing the foam concentration in the extinguishing water and a shut-off valve. During approval evidence shall be provided to the full extent that the required foam concentration is reached, using appropriate fixed (or held ready on site) flow measuring devices. The test shall be carried out at maximum extinguishant rate with water, and at a value of 500 l/min with water and additionally with foam concentrate for comparison. To minimise the quantity of unnecessary foam concentrate, a surrogate liquid may be proportioned whose flow and shear properties correspond to those of the foam concentrate. In the periodical inspection one year after commissioning, a test can be carried out with water or surrogate liquid and the results compared to those obtained upon commissioning. If the values measured with water or the surrogate liquid exceed the tolerance range after one year, the test shall be repeated with foam concentrate.

224

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

M.2.4


Foam concentration

The proportioning of foam concentrates shall be in accordance with the specified extinguishing concentration taking into account the minimum concentration specified in these Guidelines.

M.2.5

Tolerance

The following values shall be met as tolerances of the extinguishing concentration: −

minimum value: according to foam concentrate approval in consideration of the materials to be extinguished;

−

maximum value: 1,3-fold of the minimum value, in any case not more than 1% absolute

The system shall be fitted with a test facility allowing control of all mechanical and electrical components of the proportioning unit without adding any foam concentrate to the extinguishing water during the test. The proportioning unit shall be reset automatically after control, so that the foam concentrate can be proportioned.

M.3

Foam concentrate pumps

Pumps for foam concentrate shall be appropriate for this application (e.g. corrosionresistant, leak-proof). The pump capacity shall be dimensioned in accordance with the maximum design requirements of the sprinkler system, the viscosity of the foam concentrate and the maximum proportioning tolerance. The maximum pressure of the pump may exceed the permitted nominal pressure of the sprinkler system up to the proportioning unit and shall be, in any operating state, at least as much higher than the water pressure upstream of the proportioning unit, as has been specified by the manufacturer of the proportioning unit, in any case at least 1 bar. Foam concentrate pumps shall operate in positive head conditions. Positive displacement pumps shall be fitted with an appropriate means of pressure limitation. Pumps, suction and pressure pipes up to the proportioning unit shall be fitted with flushing devices. During flushing no water shall flow back into the foam concentrate tank. The power supply of the foam concentrate pump shall be backed up in the case of: −

more than 80 sprinklers in high rack storage;

−

more than 750 sprinkler in HHS;

−

more than 5000 sprinklers in LH, OH and HHP.

M.4

Foam concentrate

M.4.1

General

Foam concentrates are subject to approval in terms of the official regulations for fire extinguishants and fire extinguishing devices. Foam concentrates shall be used that are appropriate for both fire load and equipment, e.g. proportioning unit.

225


M.4.2

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Water quality

The water shall not contain any parts incompatible with foam concentrate.

M.4.3

Foam concentrate supply

The foam concentrate supply is determined by the water flow, the proportioning time and the effective proportioning rate of the system. The total supply of foam concentrate shall ensure a continuous operation of the extinguishing system for 30 min. If an approved works fire brigade with a group strength of at least 1:8 is available, the foam concentrate supply may be reduced by 50%, providing at least the same amount is stored at the works fire brigade and may be connected to the fixed foam concentrate tank of the sprinkler system within 15 min. The fulfilment of these requirements shall be agreed with the VdS Inspection Services in the planning phase. Different foam concentrates shall not be mixed unless the respective manufacturers permit this.

M.5

Foam concentrate tank

M.5.1

General

Storage tanks for foam concentrate shall have a design approval and be established and fitted in accordance with the applicable regulations. According to type and quantity of foam concentrate a collection tray may be required for the protection area. The foam concentrate manufacturer’s storage conditions shall be met.

M.5.2

Normal pressure tank

When determining the effective capacity of the tank, the heat expansion of the foam concentrate shall be taken into account. The tank shall be fitted with ventilation devices, a fill level indicator and an overflow protection. For checking the inner walls of the tank inspection openings shall be provided. Connections for filling and draining the tank shall be provided. The filling pipe shall lead to the vicinity of the tank bottom. The suction connection for the foam concentrate shall be located above the tank bottom. The volume beneath the suction pipe connection shall not be taken into account when determining the effective volume. Where sediment-free synthetic foam concentrate is stored in fibreglass or rust-proof steel tanks, the connection may be fixed at tank bottom level.

226

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

M.5.3


Pressure tanks

Pressure tanks (membrane tanks) shall be fitted with filling, draining, ventilation, fill level indicating, cleaning and inside area testing devices. Appropriate devices shall be fitted to prevent any involuntary foam proportioning into the system. An operation manual shall be fixed in the direct vicinity of the tank. Any operational sequences listed therein shall be followed by all means. During operation of the extinguishing system pressure tanks cannot be refilled. The total volume of foam concentrate may be allocated to several tanks connected to each other. To avoid irregular extraction, the pressure losses in the connection pipes shall be balanced.

M.6

Foam concentrate pipes and water-foam concentrate mixture pipes

Components and pipes permanently filled with foam concentrate shall not change the characteristics of the foam concentrate. They should be made of stainless steel. Foam concentrate pipes upstream of the proportioning unit, which cannot be filled within 10s, shall be permanently filled with foam concentrate. The foam concentrate pump and the connection between foam concentrate tank and proportioning unit shall be made of stainless steel, providing they are permanently filled with foam concentrate. Pipes and components permanently filled with water-foam concentrate mixture shall comply with 15.1.2. Galvanised pipes and pipes with internal lining shall not be used. In foam concentrate pipes strainers shall be installed upstream of the proportioning unit in the direction of flow. The strainers should be fitted such that the sprinkler system can operate even while they are being cleaned (flushed). Strainers are not required if membrane tanks and proportioning units with restrictors ≥ 8mm in diameter are used.

M.7

Pressure loss calculation with foam concentrate pipes

Foam concentrate pipes shall be dimensioned such that pressure loss differences are taken into account with the following operating conditions: −

lowest resp. highest anticipated water rate;

−

lowest resp. highest anticipated temperature of foam concentrate in the pipework.

With foam concentrate pumps: The effective NPSH value of the foam concentrate pump shall exceed the required NPSH by at least 1 m. Any pressure loss in the foam concentrate pipes shall be calculated in accordance with the DARCY formula. For foam concentrate with non-Newton characteristics special considerations apply. Viscosity according to flow velocity shall be used.

227


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

L ρ Δp =λ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅v 2 (Darcy formula) d 2 with: Δp

pressure loss, in N/m²

λ

pipe friction factor

L

pipe length, in m

d

pipe diameter, in m

ρ

fluid density, in kg/m3

v

flow velocity, in m/s

The absolute pipe friction factor λ shall be calculated as a function of the Reynolds number Re according to the following equations. The Reynolds number is a result of:

Re = d ⋅

v γ

with: γ

kinematic viscosity, in m²/s

For calculating the Reynolds number the kinematic viscosity of the lowest possible temperature at the location of the foam concentrate tank shall be used. For Re < 2350 (laminar range) the following applies:

λ=

64 Re

For 2350 < Re < 65

d k

(hydraulically smooth pipes)

with: k

pipe surface roughness, in mm (for steel pipes: k = 0,5 mm; for stainless steel pipes: k = 0,2 mm)

the following applies:   λ  λ = 2 ⋅lg Re⋅   2,51    

For 65

228

d k

−2

< Re < 1300

d k

the following applies:

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

  2,51 k   λ =  − 2⋅ lg +    Re⋅ λ 3,71⋅ d 

For Re > 1300

d k

 d   λ = 2 ⋅ lg  3,71⋅  k   

M.8


−2

(hydraulically rough pipes) the following applies:

−2

Disposal

The necessary extinguishing water retaining systems shall be dimensioned in accordance with the guidelines for calculating extinguishing water retaining systems for the storage of substances hazardous to waters. Outdated, contaminated or non-required foam concentrates resp. foam concentrate solutions (premix) shall be disposed of in accordance with legal regulations (extinguishing water retaining guidelines).

Annex N Commodity classification methodology utilising calorimeter tests (informative) N.1

Introduction

Efficient and reliable sprinkler protection of storage risks is dependent on appropriate commodity classifications. The European sprinkler installation specification CEA 4001 subdivides commodities into four categories, based on experience and fire test results. Full-scale fire testing has been the preferred solution for determining commodity classifications, but is a costly procedure. The development of a purpose built Fire Products Collector (FPC) by Factory Mutual Research Corporation (FMRC) has made the classification of commodities possible using smaller amounts of materials than has hitherto been acceptable. The FPC consists of a large capacity calorimeter hood with a water application pipework array located below the collector hood, beneath which a fuel array is burnt.

N.2

Test principles

This classification methodology assesses the heat output of the burning goods, placed beneath the calorimeter, in a fuel array of eight pallets. The pallets are ignited in a specified manner and are allowed to burn freely until a predefined condition is achieved, at which time water is released at one of three application rates onto the burning fuel array. The convective heat release rate is measured over the duration of the test. Three tests are undertaken at different water application rates.

229


N.3

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Method

The method used is described in the document “NORDTEST METHOD NT FIRE 049". The document may be obtained from: NORDTEST P.O. Box 116 FIN-02151 ESPOO FINLAND Phone: +3589 4554600 Fax: +3589 4554272

N.4

Evaluation of test results

A rank value is determined for each of the three test results, by means of comparing the results with those of known commodities. The ranking system, by comparison, ultimately enables the determination of a commodity classification for the goods under consideration.

N.5

Bibliography

a) Chicarello, P-J- Troup, J.M, "Fire products collector test procedure for determining the commodity classification of ordinary combustible products", Factory Mutual Research Corporation, August 1990. b) Heskestad, G. (a fire products collector for calorimetry in the MW range", Factory Mutual Research Corporation, June 1981. c) "Commodity classification - A more objective and applicable methodology", Swedish National Testing Research Institute, SP Report 1993:70. d) Chicarello, P-J Troup, J.M., "Combustible Products: commodity classification - fire test procedure", Nordtest method, NT FIRE 049.

230

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


Annex O List of numbering of tables and figures CEA/VdS CEA (informative) For a better overview the tables and figures of these VdS CEA Guidelines were newly numbered. The original numbers of the tables and figures of the CEA specifications CEA 4001 : 1995-09 are specified in Tables O.01 and O.02.

CEA Table No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29

VdS CEA Table No. 5.01 5.02 6.01 6.02 6.03 n/a n/a 7.01 n/a n/a 8.01 8.02 n/a 8.03 9.01 9.02 9.03 n/a 10.01 10.02 11.01 11.02 11.03 11.04 12.01 12.03 13.01 15.03 15.04

CEA Table No. A1 A2 A3 B1 C1 G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6 G7 G8 G9 G10 G11 G12 G13 G14

VdS CEA Table No. A.01 A.01 A.03 B.01 C.01 G.01 G.02 G.04 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

Table O.01: List of table nos.

231


CEA Figure No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

VdS CEA Figure No. 1.01 5.01 5.02 8.02 8.03 9.01 11.01 11.02 11.05 11.06 11.07

Table O.02: List of figure nos.

232

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

CEA Figure No. B1 D1 E1 E2 H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 H7 H8 H9 H10 H11 H12

VdS CEA Figure No. B.01 D.01 E.01 E.02 H.01 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a H.02 H.03 H.04 H.05 H.06

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


Annex P Confirmation on the Connection of Hydrant Systems Confirmation on the connection of hydrants to the water supply of the sprinkler system Building project

Postal code / City Areas

Operator / Insurer / Competent fire protection authority Address

Postal code / City

The hydrants are intended to be connected to the distribution pipework of the sprinkler system. We are aware of the fact that in case of repair and maintenance works the hydrants are not available as intended. When water is extracted from the hydrants, a remote alarm is released at a specified location, unless appropriate organisational measures are taken. We hereby confirm that we consent to the connection of the hydrants/hydrant system to the water supply of the sprinkler system in view of the a.m. restrictions.

_________________

____________________________

Date

Stamp and signatures

233


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Annex Q Confirmation: Concrete-casting of Sprinkler Pipes Object / Building project:

Street:

Postal code/City:

Areas:

Sprinkler systems in accordance with VdS CEA 4001 are characterised by their high success rate. The intention is to grant this reliability over a long period of time. In case of any leakages of the pipework, it shall be possible to do the repair works at short notice without decommissioning any sections of the extinguishing system over a longer period. Damage repair and modifications of concrete-cast pipework require increased effort and thus lead to longer downtimes of the extinguishing system. The casting dates shall be communicated to VdS Schadenverhütung beforehand. VdS Schadenverhütung reserves the right to do an on-site inspection and/or witness the pressure tests. The owner confirms by his signature that he is aware of the effort required in case of any works to be carried out at the concrete-cast pipework.

______________________ Place, date

Copies to: -Owner -Installer of extinguishing system -VdS Schadenverhütung

234

____________________ Stamp / Signature of owner

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


Annex R Requirements for Material and Fire Resistance Classes and their Classification in accordance with DIN 4102 and DIN EN 13501 Source (in extracts): Building Rules List, Editor: Deutsches Institut für Bautechnik (DIBt)

R.1

Principles

The classification of the material and fire resistance classes in accordance with DIN 4102 or DIN EN 13501 in line with this VdS CEA 4001 is analogous to the classification according to building control requirements. However, this classification does not replace the required certificates of suitability or applicability by the building control authorities.

R.2

Combustibility of materials

As regards combustibility, the requirements of VdS CEA 4001 are classified according to the material classes of DIN 4202-1 and DIN EN 13501-1 in accordance with Table R.2 (excluding floorings) and for floorings in accordance with Table R.3. The smoke growth and burning droplets, which are also included in the respective material class of DIN 4102-1, are marked in the European class system with an additional “s” (smoke) and “d” (droplets) in accordance with Table R.1. These additional requirements have been included in Table R.2 to give you an idea of the corresponding European classification. In this context, “SMOGRA” indicates the Smoke Growth Rate and “TSP” indicates the Total Smoke Production during the standardised test duration of 10 minutes.

Smoke (s)

Smoke growth

Droplets (d)

Burning droplets

s1

SMOGRA ≤ 30 m²/s² and TSP600S≤ 50 m²

d0

no burning droplets within 600 s

s2

SMOGRA ≤ 180 m²/s² and TSP600S≤ 200 m²

d1

no burning droplets >10 s within 600 s

s3

neither s1 nor s2

d2

neither d0 nor d1

Table R.1: Additional characteristics of the fire behaviour

235


Material class DIN 4102-1

A

A1 A2

Requirements of VdS CEA 4001 for materials (no floorings)

non-combustible

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

European class DIN EN 13501-11)2) Materials, except linear pipe insulation

Linear pipe insulation3)

Additional requirements No smoke

No burning droplets

A1 A2

A1L A2L

x

x

-s1 d0

-s1 d0

x

x

B C

-s1, d0 -s1, d0

BL CL

-s1, d0 -s1, d0

x

x

A2 A2 B B C C

-s2, d0 -s3, d0 -s2, d0 -s3, d0 -s2, d0 -s3, d0

A2L A2L BL BL CL CL

-s2, d0 -s3, d0 -s2, d0 -s3, d0 -s2, d0 -s3, d0

A2 A2 B B C C

-s1, d1 -s1, d2 -s1, d1 -s1, d2 -s1, d1 -s1, d2

A2L A2L BL BL CL CL

-s1, d1 -s1, d2 -s1, d1 -s1, d2 -s1, d1 -s1, d2

A2 B C

-s3, d2 -s3, d2 -s3, d2

A2L BL CL

-s3, d2 -s3, d2 -s3, d2

D D D E

-s1, d0 -s2, d0 -s3, d0

DL DL DL EL

-s1, d0 -s2, d0 -s3, d0

-s1, d1 -s2, d1 -s3, d1 -s1, d2 -s2, d2 -s3, d2 -d2

DL DL DL DL DL DL EL

-s1, d1 -s2, d1 -s3, d1 -s1, d2 -s2, d2 -s3, d2 -d2

combustible materials

B1

of low flammability

B

B2

of normal flammability

D D D D D D E

B3

of high flammability

F

x

x

x

FL

1)

The European testing and classification regulations do not cover the glow behaviour of materials. For applications in which the glow behaviour is important, the glow behaviour shall be proven in accordance with national regulations. 2) Except for class A1(no application of footnote c of Table 1 of DIN EN 13501-1) and E, the fire behaviour of exterior wall surfaces and exterior wall cladding (construction types) cannot be finally classified acc. DIN EN 13501-1. 3) Index „...L“ (Linear Pipe Thermal Insulation Products) indicates the fire behaviour classes for heat insulation products of linear pipes. Table R.2: Material classes acc. DIN 4102-1 and DIN EN 13501-1 (excluding floorings) and their classification acc. requirements of VdS CEA 4001

236

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Material class DIN 4102-1

A1 A2

A


Requirements acc. VdS CEA 4001 for floorings

non-combustible

European class 1) DIN EN 13501-1

A1fl A2fl -s1

combustible materials of low flammability

Bfl Cfl

-s1 -s1

B2

of normal flammability

A2fl Bfl, Cfl, Dfl Dfl Efl

-s2 -s2 -s2 -s1 -s2

B3

of high flammability

Ffl

B1

B

1)

Index „...fl“ (floorings) indicates the fire behaviour classes for floorings Table R.3: Material classes for floorings acc. DIN 4102-1 and DIN EN 13501-1 and their classification acc. requirements of VdS CEA 4001

R.3

Fire resistance of components

In the European standards new codes have been introduced for the fire resistance classes of components (construction products and construction types) according to the system shown in Table R.4. Performance classes are shown in Table R.5.

R

E

I

Basic criteria

W

t

Fire resistance

M

C

S

Additional criteria

Table R.4: System of the European codes

237


Additional criteria

Basic criteria

Code

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Criterion (characteristics of the components)

Application

R (résistance – resistance)

load bearing capacity

E (étanchéité – enclosure integrity)

enclosure integrity

I (isolation – insulation)

heat insulation (under impact of fire)

W (radiation)

limitation of radiation penetration

M (mechanical)

mechanical impact on walls (shock)

Sm (smokemax. leakage rate)

limitation of smoke permeability (leak tightness, leakage rate) fulfils the requirements both at ambient temperature and at 200°C

smoke control doors (as additional requirement also for fire-resisting closures)

C… (closing)

self-closing characteristic (if applicable, with number of load cycles) incl. continuous operation

smoke control doors, fireresisting closures (incl. closures for conveyors)

P

maintenance of power supply and/or signal transmission; test under fire impact by standard temperature-time curve

PH

maintenance of power supply and/or signal transmission; test under lower fire impact than standard temperature-time curve

G

soot fire resistance

chimneys

K1, K2

fire protection capacity

wall and ceiling cladding (fire protection cladding)

I1 , I2

various heat insulation criteria

fire-resisting closures (incl. closures for conveyors)

direction of the classified fire resistance

non-bearing exterior walls, installation ducts/channels, ventilation systems/flaps

a↔b (above – below)

direction of the classified fire resistance

false ceilings

ve, ho (vertical, horizontal)

classified for vertical/horizontal installation

ventilation ducts/flaps

U/U (uncapped/uncapped)

pipe end uncapped inside fire test box/pipe end uncapped outside fire test box

firestop seals for pipes

C/U (capped/uncapped)

pipe end capped inside fire test box/pipe end uncapped outside fire test box


U/C (uncapped/capped)

pipe end uncapped inside fire test box/pipe end capped outside fire test box


i→o i←o i↔o (in – out)

to specify the fire resistance

electrical cable systems general

Table R.5: European performance classes, criteria and applications on fire resistance in accordance with DIN EN 13501-2 and DIN EN 13501-3

238

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


The characteristics on fire resistance behaviour classified in accordance with DIN EN 14501-2, DIN EN 13501-3 and DIN EN 13501-4 of components and special components can be assigned to the requirements of VdS CEA 4001, Tables R.6 and R.7. The designations in square brackets correspond to the designations of fire resistance classes as specified in DIN 4102. Additionally, these Guidelines distinguish between components according to the fire behaviour of their materials: −

components made of non-combustible materials;

−

components made of combustible materials.

The designation of the European fire resistance classification of components does not include any specifications on the fire behaviour of the materials of these components. Therefore, the fire behaviour of the materials is taken into account in accordance with DIN 4102-2 and determined in more detail in accordance with DIN 4102-1 or DIN EN 13501-1 (see Tables R.2 and R.3).

239


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Bearing components Requirements of VdS CEA 4001

without enclosure1

with enclosure1

R 30

REI 30

Non-bearing interior walls

Non-bearing exterior walls

False floors

EI 30

E 30 (i→o) and EI 30-ef (i←o)

REI 30

fire-retardant

EI 30(a↔b)

[F 30]

[F 30]

[F 30]

[W 30]

[F 30]

R 60

REI 60

EI 60


EI 60(a↔b)

[F 60]

[F 60]

[F 60]

[W 60]

[F 60]

R 90

REI 90

EI 90


EI 90(a↔b)

[F 90]

[F 90]

[F 90]

[W 90]

[F 90]

R120

REI 120 -

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

highly fire-retardant

fire-resistant

fire resistance 120 min.

Independent false ceilings

[F 120]

[F 120]

fire break wall

-

REI 90-M

EI 90-M

complex separation wall

-

REI 180-MGDV

RE 180-MGDV

1

For steel components coated with reactive fire protection systems, the indication IncSlow as specified in DIN EN 13501-2 is also required. GDV

The requirements for the stability of complex separation walls during shock are specified in the Leaflet VdS 2234 published by Gesamtverband der Deutschen Versicherungswirtschaft e. V. (German Insurance Association – GDV).

Note: Values in square brackets specify the fire resistance class in accordance with DIN 4102. Table R.6: Fire resistance classes of components in accordance with DIN EN 13501-2 and their assignment to the requirements of VdS CEA 4001

240

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


241


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Annex S Combustion Heat of Insulating Materials of Cables and Wires (acc. VdS 2134) S.1 General The fire load is determined in accordance with the following tables specifying the combustion heat of insulating materials of electrical cables and wires per running metre. The combustion heat values have been agreed in a workgroup with the specialist association “Cables and insulated wires” of the Zentralverband der Elektrotechnischen Industrie e.V. (ZVEI – German electrical and electronics industry association) and foreign manufacturers. Cables and wires of different brands with the same designations can have different proportions of insulating material. The combustion heat of halogenated and halogen-free cables and wires with improved resistance in the case of fire is almost identical. However, halogen-free cables and wires with improved resistance in the case of fire mainly have the following advantages: −

low-smoke combustion, minor impairment of escape routes and of fire fighting operations and minor contamination of rooms and their contents;

−

lower flammability, after removal of ignition source cables and wires stop burning within few seconds, whereas cables and wires with PVC or VPE insulation keep burning after removal of ignition source

−

minor fire spread due to more favourable fire behaviour

S.2 Application The combustion heat can be the basis for calculating the fire load in accordance with VdS CEA 4001 Cl. 4.1.1 n). They are also an appropriate guidance for calculations in accordance with DIN 4102-4 “Fire behaviour of building materials and building components”, Cl. 6.5.1.21.

S.3 Application of tables The cables and wires are distinguished according to: −

construction types;

−

insulating materials; − halogenated; − halogen-free;

−

nominal cross section of the conductors;

−

number of conductors.

Depending on the form and type of construction, different quantities of insulating material are required. In Table 1 the most current cable and performance types are listed, specifying their cross sections and number of conductors.

242

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


Note: The values can be converted as follows: − 1 MJ/m2 corresponds to 0,278 kWh/m2 − 1 kWh/m2 corresponds to 3,6 MJ/m2

1

Cl. 6.5.1.2: The specifications of 6.5 do not apply to a fire load of the false ceiling area, therefore they do not apply to a classification of the false ceilings in case of a fire load from above. Therefore, the specifications imply that there are no combustible materials in the false ceiling area between the raw and the false ceiling, except for the parts belonging to the false ceiling construction. Cable insulations or materials whose fire load is evenly spread and < 7 kWh/m² are also considered unobjectionable. In case of cable bundles, pipe insulations, wires, insulation layers etc. consisting of components of material class B with a fire load > 7 kWh/m², or in case the false ceiling with fire load from above is to be classified in a fire resistance class, the suitability of the false ceilings shall be verified by tests in accordance with DIN 41022 : 1977-09, Cl. 4.1, 6.2.2.5 and 7.2.1.

243


Design of cables and wires

Dimensions of cables and wires Number of conductors and nominal cross section n mm²

244

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

halogenated NYM

NYY

n mm² mm²

halogen-free NYCY/ NYCWY

NHXHX

NHXCHX

kWh/m

1 x 1,5

0,17

1 x 2,5

0,22

0,22

0,22

1x

4

0,25

0,33

0,28

1x

6

0,28

0,33

0,28

1 x 10

0,36

0,33

0,28

1 x 16

0,42

0,42

0,39

1 x 25

0,58

0,58

0,53

1 x 35

0,67

0,58

1 x 50

0,81

0,69

1 x 70

0,92

0,81

1 x 95

1,17

1,03

1 x 120

1,31

1,14

1 x 150

1,58

1,39

2 x 1,5

0,42

0,69

0,69

2 x 2,5

0,53

0,78

0,78

2x 4

0,67

1,00

0,89

2x 6

0,75

1,11

1,00

2 x 10

1,17

1,31

1,19

3 x 1,5

0,44

0,75

0,78

3 x 2,5

0,58

0,83

0,86

3x 4

0,72

1,08

1,00

3x 6

0,92

1,22

1,08

3 x 10

1,28

1,42

1,28

3 x 16

1,53

1,69

1,53

3 x 25

2,39

2,47

2,25

3 x 35

2,78

2,14

2,56

3 x 50

2,60

3,19

3 x 70

3,08

3,94

3 x 95

4,06

5,14

3 x 120

4,47

5,89

3 x 150

5,42

7,25

4 x 1,5

3 x 1,5/1,5

0,53

0,83

0,78

0,89

0,78

4 x 2,5

3 x 2,5/2,5

0,67

0,94

0,86

1,00

0,89

4x 4

3 x 4/4

0,92

1,25

1,11

1,14

1,00

4x 6

3 x 6/6

1,08

1,42

1,25

1,28

1,11

4 x 10

3 x 10/10

1,50

1,67

1,47

1,50

1,33

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)



n mm² mm²

4 x 16

3 x 16/10

Design of cables and wires halogenated NYM

NYY

1,86

NYCWY

NHXHX

NHXCHX

2.03

1,75

1,86

1,58

1,75 2,89

3 x 25/16

2,89 2,67

3 x 25/25 4 x 35

NYCY/ kWh/m

3 x 16/16 4 x 25

halogen-free

1,58 2,64

2,53

2,42

2,53 3,28

3 x 35/16

2,61 2,67

3 x 35/35

2,31 3,00

2,22

2,69

2,22

4 x 50

3,31 3 x 50/25

3,31

3 x 50/50

3,92 2,78

4,08 3 x 70/35

4,06

3 x 70/70

3,53 4,81

3,28

5,11 3 x 95/50

5,19

3 x 95/95

4,31

6,25 4,28

5,69 3 x 120/70

5,81

3 x 120/120

5,58 7,14

4,72

6,97 3 x 150/70

7,03

3 x 150/150

5,33 5,33

6,58

4,72

4 x 150

4,11 4,11

4,28

4 x 120

3,33 3,33

3,28

4 x 95

2,61 2,61

2,78

4 x 70

2,31

6,11 6,11

7,14 5,72

7,64

5,72

7,50 7,50

5 x 1,5

4 x 1,5/1,5

0,58

0,94

0,86

1,03

0,89

5 x 2,5

4 x 2,5/2,5

0,75

1,08

0,97

1,14

1,03

5x 4

4 x 4/4

1,11

1,44

1,28

1,31

1,17

5x 6

4 x 6/6

1,28

1,64

1,44

1,47

1,31

5 x 10

4 x 10/10

1,83

2,00

1,69

1,83

1,53

5 x 16

4 x 16/16

2,31

2,39

2,08

2,17

1,89

5 x 25

4 x 25/16

3,42

3,42

2,92

3,14

2,69

4 x 35/16

2,67

3,06

4 x 50/25

3,44

4,00

4 x 70/35

4,17

4,89

4 x 95/50

5,33

6,44

4 x 120/70

5,94

7,36

245


Design of cables and wires


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

halogenated NYM

NYY

n mm² mm²

halogen-free NYCY/ NYCWY

NHXHX

NHXCHX

kWh/m

4 x 150/70

7,22

6 x 1,5

0,67

7 x 1,5

0,67

8,97

1,08

1,17

7 x 2,5

1,22

1,31

7x 4

1,67

1,50

12 x 1,5

1,56

1,69

12 x 2,5

1,78

2,00

12 x 4

2,53

2,31

19 x 1,5

2,06

2,36

19 x 2,5

2,44

2,69

19 x 4

3,42

3,14

24 x 1,5

2,56

2,86

24 x 2,5

2,94

3,28

24 x 4

4,33

3,97

37 x 1,5

3,39

3,92

37 x 2,5

4,00

4,69

37 x 4

6,03

5,53

Table S.1: Combustion heat of cables and wires with nominal voltages up to 1000V

246

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)


Dimensions of wires

Construction type of wires halogenated

Number of conductors & nominal diameter

I-YY Bd

halogen-free

IE-Y(ST) Y Bd

I-HH Bd

IE-H(ST) H Bd

n

n

mm

kWh/m

2x

2x

0,6

0,11

0,22

4x

2x

0,6

0,17

0,33

6x

2x

0,6

0,22

0,39

10 x

2x

0,6

0,28

0,53

16 x

2x

0,6

0,39

0,81

20 x

2x

0,6

0,44

0,97

24 x

2x

0,6

0,50

1,11

30 x

2x

0,6

0,67

1,36

40 x

2x

0,6

0,81

1,72

50 x

2x

0,6

0,94

2,00

60 x

2x

0,6

1,17

2,39

80 x

2x

0,6

1,42

3,06

100 x

2x

0,6

1,69

3,72

2x

2x

0,8

0,19

0,28

4x

2x

0,8

0,28

0,39

8x

2x

0,8

0,42

0,58

12 x

2x

0,8

0,58

0,86

16 x

2x

0,8

0,72

20 x

2x

0,8

0,83

24 x

2x

0,8

0,94

28 x

2x

0,8

1,17

32 x

2x

0,8

1,28

36 x

2x

0,8

1,39

40 x

2x

0,8

1,50

44 x

2x

0,8

1,61

48 x

2x

0,8

1,83

52 x

2x

0,8

1,94

56 x

2x

0,8

2,06

60 x

2x

0,8

2,14

64 x

2x

0,8

2,25

68 x

2x

0,8

2,36

72 x

2x

0,8

2,47

76 x

2x

0,8

2,72

80 x

2x

0,8

2,83

1,17

1,78 2,08

Table S.2: Combustion heat of wires for telecommunication and data processing systems

247


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Design of cables

Dimensions of cables

halogenated Number of conductors & nominal cross section

NA2xSEY

n mm² mm²

halogen-free

NYSEY kWh/m

3 x 35/16

10,28

10,56

3 x 50/16

11,67

11,67

3 x 70/16

13,06

12,78

3 x 95/16

14,72

14,72

3 x 120/16

16,68

16,12

Table S.3: Combustion heat of cables with nominal voltages exceeding 1000V

Annex SL Extinguishing support systems

Additional regulations to the CEA sprinkler guidelines for achieving Class 3 of the VdS classification model for sprinkler systems Contents SL.1 Scope................................................................................................................... 249 SL.2 Installer................................................................................................................ 249 SL.3 Separation ........................................................................................................... 249 SL.4 Rating basis ........................................................................................................ 249 SL.5 Water supply ....................................................................................................... 250 SL.6 Operating time .................................................................................................... 251 SL.7 Power supply ...................................................................................................... 251 SL.8 Sprinklers ............................................................................................................ 251 SL.9 Alarm ................................................................................................................... 251

248

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

SL.1


Scope

As extinguishing support systems are designed only for bridging the time between an alarm and the beginning of the fire fighting operations, these systems do not fulfil the requirements set to water extinguishing systems (e.g. sprinkler systems) in general. Agreements shall be made with authorities and loss insurers as to whether extinguishing support systems are appropriate to ensure adequate protection of life and property. Racks with intermediate sprinklers are permitted up to a height at which the required design density of ceiling sprinklers alone does not exceed 10 mm/min.

SL.2

Installer

Extinguishing support systems shall be installed only by installers approved for the assembly of sprinkler systems. Any components of extinguishing support systems shall be approved according to the list in Annex I.

SL.3

Separation

Extinguishing support systems of configuration levels 2 and 3 shall be separated from unprotected areas according to Table SL.01. Configuration level

Type of separation

2

at least fire-retardant and made of non-combustible materials

3

at least fire-resistant and made of non-combustible materials

Table SL.01: Separations

SL.4

Rating basis

SL.4.1 General The pipework shall be dimensioned according to Annex G using the data from Clauses 6 and 11 so that the extinguishing support systems may also be extended to sprinkler systems. Note: The rating basis according to Clauses 6 and 11 for dimensioning the pipework shall be used to enable an extension of the system without modifying the pipework. Unless otherwise stated in this Annex, all aforementioned clauses of these Guidelines apply analogously. The design criteria which are reduced for extinguishing support systems refer to the number of water sources, the extinguishing water quantity and the operating times. Note: Extinguishing support systems are designed such that the operator is able to extend the system to a higher configuration level at all times. Where dry pipe systems have to be installed, water shall be discharged not later than 30 s after opening the test facility at the end of the pipework. This may be achieved e.g. by installing accelerators.

249


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

SL.4.2 Design density In hazards protected by extinguishing support systems, the required design density according to Cl. 6 shall not exceed the following values: −

5 mm/min in configuration level 1

−

7,5 mm/min in configuration level 2

−

10 mm/min in configuration level 3

SL.5

Water supply

SL.5.1 Water sources Water sources may be: −

pressure tanks;

−

elevated private reservoirs;

−

water mains;

−

pump systems.

The minimum water volume of pressure tanks shall be 7,5 m³ for LH hazards and 15 m³ in all other cases. Note: For further extensions of the system it is important to note that a larger pressure tank may be required. An immediate investment in a larger tank may reduce consequential costs for any further configuration levels. A fire department supply connection shall be provided. The operating time of the pressure tank shall be calculated based on the arithmetic mean of initial and end pressure. For reducing the water rate throttle sections ≥ DN 40 may be installed. The flow velocity in the throttle section shall not exceed 20 m/s. The power supply of pipe separators shall be backed up. The minimum effective volume of reduced capacity tanks shall be 5 m³ for configuration level 1, 10 m³ for configuration level 2 and 20 m³ for configuration level 3. The effective volume of the reduced capacity tanks may be added to the total water volume. Note: For a further extension of the system Clause 6 should be adhered to. An immediate investment in a larger tank may reduce consequential costs for any further configuration levels.

SL.5.2 Areas of operation The water supply of extinguishing support systems shall be dimensioned such that the size of the areas of operation at least complies with the following specifications:

250

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Fire hazard

Configuration level 11) (5 sprinklers min.)


Configuration level 2

Configuration level 3

LH

50 m²

60 m²

72 m²

OH1

50 m²

60 m²

72 m²

OH2

50 m²

72 m² (50% of the area of operation acc. Cl. 6)


OH3

80 m²



OH4

125 m²



HHP1 ²)

-



HHP2 ²)

-

-


HHS1 ²) ³) + HHS 2 ²) ³) (no plastics)

-

-


1) Basis shall be either – the area of operation of 5 sprinklers or – the value specified in the Table, – whichever is the greater. 2) In the case of dry pipe systems the area shall be increased by 25%. 3) The design density for the appropriate storage height and type of storage shall be determined acc. Cl. 6.

Table SL.02: Areas of operation of extinguishing support systems according to configuration level

SL.6

Operating time

The operating time of the extinguishing support system shall be: −

30 min in configuration level 1

−

30 min in configuration level 2

−

30 min for LH and OH in configuration level 3

−

40 min for HHP and HHS in configuration level 3

SL.7

Power supply

Power supplies may be: −

public electrical mains;

−

private power generators;

−

diesel engines.

SL.8

Sprinklers

“Quick” or “Special” response sprinklers shall be used in extinguishing support systems. Ceiling sprinklers shall have the same or a slower response sensitivity than sprinklers at intermediate levels. In dry pipe systems “Special” response sprinklers shall be used.

SL.9

Alarm

Extinguishing support systems shall have an audible alarm and an electrical alarm transmission to a permanently manned location (fire brigade).

251


VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Annex Z Notification of installation for sprinkler systems

The appropriate form of the notification of installation is included in the Guidelines for the approval of installers for fire extinguishing systems.

252

VdS CEA 4001en_2010

Recommend Documents